SACE Emax 2
1SDH001330R1002 DOC. N° 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
SACE Emax 2
Operating instructions for the design engineer
Low voltage air circuit-breakers Emax E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2
ABB | SACE Emax 2
2 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
|
Contents
Glossary......................................................................................... 3
Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2........................................... 4 1 - Contents..........................................................................4 2 - Guide to the product choice............................................6 3 - Selectivity between ABB SACE circuit-breakers............ 10 4 - Documents and Tools for the design engineer............... 11
Trip unit Overview........................................................................ 14 1 - General characteristics..................................................14 2 - Ekip Touch models and versions.................................... 15 3 - Accessories and software.............................................. 16 4 - Operating features......................................................... 17
Ekip Touch - Settings.................................................................127 1 - Main settings............................................................... 127 2 - Additional settings....................................................... 131
Ekip Touch - Test........................................................................133 1 - Test.............................................................................. 133
Ekip Touch - Additional functions.............................................135 1 - Zone Selectivity........................................................... 135 2 - Generator protection.................................................... 138 1 - Power Controller.......................................................... 139 2 - Load Shedding............................................................ 140 3 - IPS Interface protections............................................. 142
Ekip Dip........................................................................................ 18 1 - Operator interface..........................................................18 1 - Protections - Introduction.............................................. 20 2 - Measurements............................................................... 27 3 - Test................................................................................ 28 4 - List of alarms and signals..............................................29 5 - Additional functions.......................................................31 6 - Default parameters........................................................34
Ekip Touch - Interface and menus.............................................. 35 1 - Presentation of interface................................................ 35 2 - Navigation......................................................................37 3 - Graphic pages...............................................................39 4 - Menu.............................................................................43 5 - Changing parameters and commands...........................48 6 - PIN and security............................................................50
Ekip Touch - Protections............................................................. 51 1 - Protections - Introduction.............................................. 51 2 - Standard Protections..................................................... 52 3 - Voltage protections........................................................ 62 4 - Voltage Advanced protections....................................... 65 5 - Frequency protections................................................... 69 6 - Power protections.......................................................... 72 7 - ROCOF protections....................................................... 78 8 - Protection Adaptive....................................................... 79 9 - Additional protections and functions.............................. 80 10 - Logic selectivity...........................................................90 11 - Performance table........................................................92 12 - Functions.....................................................................95
Ekip Touch - Measurements......................................................110 1 - Standard Measurements.............................................. 110 2 - Ekip Measuring Measurements.................................... 114 3 - Class 1 Power & Energy Metering................................ 117 4 - Datalogger................................................................... 118 5 - Network Analyzer......................................................... 120
Ekip Touch - Default...................................................................144 1 - Ekip TOUCH default parameters.................................. 144
Mechanical characteristics........................................................145 1 - E1.2 description........................................................... 145 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description.......................................... 153 3 - Environmental conditions............................................. 163 4 - Installation................................................................... 165 5 - Technical characteristics.............................................. 173
Accessories................................................................................176 1 - Overview...................................................................... 176 2 - Standard accessories.................................................. 179 3 - Assembly and disassembly.......................................... 180 4 - Introduction to the electronic accessories................... 182
Internal electronic accessories.................................................183 1 - Rating Plug.................................................................. 183 2 - Measurement............................................................... 184 3 - Ekip Signalling 4K........................................................ 186 4 - Ekip LCD...................................................................... 189
External electronic accessories................................................190 1 - Ekip Supply.................................................................. 190 2 - Ekip Com Modbus RTU............................................... 191 3 - Ekip Com Profibus DP................................................. 194 4 - Ekip Com DeviceNet TM...................................................... 196 5 - Ekip Com Modbus TCP............................................... 199 6 - Ekip Com Profinet........................................................ 203 7 - Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM....................................................205 8 - Ekip Com IEC 61850.................................................... 208 9 - Ekip Link...................................................................... 212 10 - Ekip Com Hub............................................................ 216 11 - Ekip Signalling 2K...................................................... 220 12 - Ekip Synchrocheck.................................................... 223 13 - Ekip Signalling 3T...................................................... 229
© 2020 ABB SACE Emax 2 | I
1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Other electronic accessories.....................................................232 1 - Ekip Signalling 10K...................................................... 232 2 - Ekip Signalling Modbus TCP........................................ 232 3 - Ekip Multimeter............................................................ 233 4 - Rc Toroid..................................................................... 233 5 - Toroid S.G.R................................................................ 233 - External neutral.............................................................. 234 6 - Ekip Com Actuator....................................................... 234 7 - Ekip AUP..................................................................... 234 8 - Ekip RTC...................................................................... 234 9 - Testing and Programming............................................ 235
Electrical accessories................................................................236 1 - Electrical control accessories...................................... 236 2 - Electrical signalling accessories................................... 240
Mechanical accessories............................................................248 1 - Mechanical Protection accessories.............................. 248 2 - Mechanical safety accessories.................................... 250 3 - Mechanical Interlocks.................................................. 255
Alarms or failures.......................................................................256 1 - Identification of alarms or failures................................ 256 2 - Self-diagnosis.............................................................. 262
Predictive analysis program......................................................264 1 - Presentation................................................................. 264 2 - Service offers............................................................... 265
Service........................................................................................266 1 - Power Care.................................................................. 266
II | © 2020 ABB SACE Emax 2
1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Glossary
Term SACE Emax 2 CB Trip unit / Protection release Mainboard Ekip Dip Ekip Touch
Ekip LCD
Trip coil
TRIP
Vaux 4P / 3P / 3P + N If
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Description New series of ABB SACE air circuit-breakers Circuit-breaker Electronic unit connected to the CB (Mainboard), which provides measuring, monitoring and protection functions for the CB if faulty operating conditions occur. In the event of an alarm, it commands a TRIP Electronic board of the CB to which the Trip Unit and all the main accessories and electronic actuators connect Trip unit SACE Emax 2 CBs, equipped with dip-switch type interface Trip unit for SACE Emax 2 CBs, equipped with touchscreen display and available in four different versions Trip unit for SACE Emax 2 CBs, equipped with LCD display; alternative to Ekip Touch for applications in particular environmental conditions CB opening actuator controlled directly by Trip unit Concluding action of protection timing or a test command which, except in special configurations applicable to the trip unit, coincides with activation of the trip coil, which instantly opens the bars of each pole and interrupts the circulating current Auxiliary power supply CB configuration: four-pole (4P), three-pole (3P) and three-pole with external neutral (3P + N) Fault current measured by Trip unit, useful for calculating the trip time t t
3 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Glossary |
Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - Contents
Foreword
SACE Emax 2 is the new series of low voltage air circuit-breakers up to 6300 A, designed for managing all low voltage electrical installations with the maximum efficiency: from industrial installations, marine applications, conventional power generation and renewable energy installations, to buildings, malls, data centers and communication networks.
Overview
This manual contains all the useful information for:
· Facilitating the choice of the product and of the features required. · Rapid access to all the necessary information for proper design. · Proper use of all the features available with the solid-state protection trip units. · All the supporting documentation. · Link to management software.
recipients
This manual refers to two user profiles, as defined by standard IEC 60050:
· skilled person, in the electrical field (IEV 195-04-01): person with relevant education, training, knowledge and experience to enable him or her to perceive risks and to avoid danger which electricity can create
· instructed person, in the electrical field (IEV 195-04-02): person adequately advised or supervised by electrically skilled persons to enjable him or her to perceive risks and to avoid danger which electricity can create
IMPORTANT: operations which can be performed by persons trained on the subject of electricity are specifically indicated in this manual. All the remaining operations
described in this manual must be performed by skilled persons, in the field of electricity. ABB declines all liability for damage to persons or property caused by failure to comply with the instructions in this document.
Specifications and supporting To ensure that the Emax 2 circuit-breaker is installed and configured correctly, please read the information in documents this manual and in the technical documentation of the product, supplied with the circuit-breaker or available in the website ABB library
Document 1SDH000999R0002
1SDH001000R0002 1SDH001316R1002 1SDH001140R0001 1SDC200023D0906 1SDM000091R0001
Description Installation, operation and maintenance instructions for Sace Emax E1.2 CBs and Ekip Dip Trip units Installation, operation and maintenance instructions for Sace Emax E2.2E4.2-E6.2 CBs and Ekip Dip Trip units Manual of Ekip Touch Trip units for Sace Emax 2 CBs Communication System Interface for Emax 2 CBs Sace Emax 2 CBs General catalog Sace Emax 2 CBs Circuit diagrams
WARNING! carefully read the instructions for putting into service and maintenance given in the installation manuals 1SDH000999R0002 (for E1.2) or 1SDH001000R0002
(for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2).
Design notes The information in this manual was written in Italian and then translated into other languages to conform to the laws and/or commercial requirements concerning the product.
4 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 1 - Contents
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Regulations
Emax 2 circuit-breakers and their accessories comply with the following international standards:
· IEC 60947 · EN 60947 · CEI EN 60947 · IEC 61000 · UL 1066
They comply with the following EC directives:
· "Low Voltage Directives" (LVD) No. 2006/95/EC · "Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive" (EMC) No. 2004/108/EC
Emax 2 circuit-breakers also feature a range certified according to these standards:
· Russian - GOST (Russia Certificate of Conformity) · Chinese - China CCC (China Compulsory Certification)
5 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 1 - Contents
2 - Guide to the product choice
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Foreword The circuit-breaker must check and protect , in case of failure and malfunction, the installation components that are connected to it. To perform this function, Emax 2 circuit-breakers offer a series of options, that can be selected by the user according to the particular requirements of the installation.
For a good design, the main characteristics the components must be selected with the greatest care.
In order to help the design engineers in selecting the Emax2 circuit-breakers, a sheet is provided below containing the main selection criteria for air circuit-breakers. This sheet can be completed (in whole or in part) by the design engineer to guide subsequent design choices and can be used by the client for work contracts. Besisdes, this sheet is a useful tool for rapid configuration in CAT selection software.
Device
Type of device Circuit-breaker Switch-disconnector
Standard
Reference standard IEC (EN 60947-2) UL (UL 1066-ANSI C37.50)
Mechanical characteristics
Insulation function Yes No
Nº poles 3 4
Installation version Fixed Withdrawable
Terminals Horizontal/Vertical Spread Front Extended front Spread front Floor For 4x240 FcCuAl cable
NOTE: consult the technical catalog for details about the terminals.
6 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 2 - Guide to the product choice
Electrical characteristics
Service rated voltage
400 V AC
415 V AC 500 V AC
525 V AC
690 V AC
______ V AC
Rated uninterrupted current (40°C) (Iu)
100 A
800 A
200 A
1000 A
250 A
1200 A
400 A
1250 A
600 A 630 A
1600 A 2000 A
Ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (lcu)
42 kA
120 kA
50 kA 66 kA
130 kA 150 kA
85 kA
200 kA
100 KA
a ______ V:
Service short-circuit breaking capacity (lcs) According to the reference standard:______ % of Icu
Admissible rated short-time withstand current (Icw)
Without intentional delay (class A)
With intentional time-delay (category B): 1 s Icw ______ kA
3 s Icw ______ kA
ABB | SACE Emax 2
2500 A 3200 A 4000 A 5000 A 6000 A 6300 A
NOTE: make sure that the combination of all the electrical values selected is available. Consult the technical catalog for further details.
7 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 2 - Guide to the product choice
Electronic protections Ekip Dip can be configured with the following protections:
Current protections Overload (L - ANSI 49) Time-delayed overcurrent Instantaneous overcurrent (l - ANSI 50) Earth fault current (G - ANSI 51N & 50N TD)
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Touch can be configured with the following protections:
NOTE: the protections are either present by default or must be installed by means of an additional package, depending on the Trip unit model and version (consult Trip unit
Overview for details)
Current protections Overload (L - ANSI 49) Time-delayed overcurrent Second time-delayed overcurrent (S2 ANSI 50TD) Instantaneous overcurrent (l - ANSI 50) Earth fault current (G - ANSI 51N & 50N TD) Zone selectivity for S, I and G protections (ANSI 68) Directional overcurrent (D ANSI 67) Zone selectivity for D protection (ANSI 68) Programmable instantaneous overcurrent (2I - ANSI 50) Earth fault current with external toroid (Gext - ANSI 51G & 50GTD) Modified differential ground fault (MDGF) Residual current (Rc ANSI 64 & 50 NTD) Current unbalance (IU ANSI 46) Voltage controlled overcurrent (S(V) - ANSI 51V) Second voltage controlled overpower (S2(V) - ANSI 51V)
Voltage protections Undervoltage (UV - ANSI 27) Overvoltage (OV - ANSI 59) Second undervoltage protection (UV2 ANSI 27) Second overvoltage protection (OV2 ANSI 59) Voltage unbalance (VU ANSI 47) Cyclical direction of the phases (ANSI 47) Residual overvoltage (RV ANSI 59N)
Frequency protections Underfrequency (UF - ANSI 81L) Overfrequency (OF - ANSI 81H) Second minimum frequency protection (UF2 ANSI 87L) Second maximum frequency protection (OF2 ANSI 87H) Rate of change of frequency (ROCOF ANSI 81R)
Power protections Reverse active power (RP - ANSI 32R) Power factor (ANSI 78) Loss of field or reverse reactive power (RQ ANSI 40 or 32RQ) Reactive overpower (OQ ANSI 32OF) Active overpower (OP ANSI 32OF) Active underpower (UP ANSI 32LF)
Miscellaneous protections Synchronism between two supply sources - Synchrocheck (SC - ANSI 25) Interface protections (IPS)
8 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 2 - Guide to the product choice
Electrical and mechanical accessories
Electrical signalling Open/closed auxiliary contacts - AUX Ready to close signalling contact - RTC Ready to close signalling contact Ekip RTC Ekip protection trip unit tripping signalling contact S51 Remote resetting - YR
Service trip units First and second opening coil - YO First and second closing coil - YC Undervoltage coil - YU
Motor operator Motor
Protections Protection device for opening and closing push buttons - PBC Compartment door flange
Terminal-covers and separators High terminal-covers - HTC Low terminal-covers - LTC Phase separators PB
Other accessories mechanical operation counter - MOC
ABB | SACE Emax 2
NOTE: for full details on Emax 2 electrical and mechanical accessories see chapter " Electrical accessories" starting on page 236.
Electronic accessories
Electronic accessories Measurement Module - Protection and measurements of voltage, power and energy Ekip Signalling 10K/ 4K/ 2K/ 3T/ Modbus TCP - Programmable input and output contacts Ekip Supply - Power supply for trip units and modules Ekip COM - Communication with multiple protocols Ekip Synchrochek - Synchronism between two power supply sources Ekip Multimeter - Power supply and measurements from switchgear front Ekip LCD - Interface with LCD display for particular environmental conditions
NOTE: for full details on Emax 2 electronic accessories see chapter "Accessories" starting on page 176.
9 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 2 - Guide to the product choice
3 - Selectivity between ABB SACE circuit-breakers
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Foreword It is possible to obtain selectivity between ABB SACE circuit-breakers (including Emax 2).
There is selectivity in an installation when, in the event of an overload or short-circuit, it is possible to identify and isolate the point of overload or fault by opening only some circuit-breakers to guarantee service continuity to the installation.
NOTE: selectivity is recommended in all installations with multiple switchgears or circuitbreakers connected, for example cascading or in a tree (with a main circuit-breaker on
the supply side, and other circuit-breakers downstream to protect areas on the other side). Thus, only the circuit-breaker immediately upstream the overload or fault trips, and avoids opening of the circuit-breakers further upstream.
Types of selectivity
With ABB SACE electronic trip units selectivity can be:
· Current-based selectivity, activated in the event of over-current, and in which the protections of the trip units are set with different current thresholds, based on the principle the closer the fault point is to the power supply the greater the current will be.
· Time selectivity, activated in the event of a short-circuit in which the S protection normally trips, and in which the protections of the trip units are set with different tripping times, so that with cascading circuitbreakers the circuit-breakers further downstream open before those further upstream.
· Time-current selectivity, which is a combination of the previously mentioned types, and in which the protections of the trip units are set so that the tripping times and current thresholds increase with proximity to the power supply.
· Energy selectivity, which uses current-limiting circuit-breakers, characterized by extremely short tripping times in the event of a short-circuit to avoid the current reaching the peak value (in the case of ABB SACE circuit-breakers, for example, all the moulded-case circuit-breakers of the Tmax series and certain air circuit-breakers of the Emax series are limiters).
· Zone Selectivity, which is an evolution of time selectivity, and in which is a dialog created between the trip units by means of output and input blocking signals. For more information on Zone Selectivity with ABB SACE circuit-breakers and in particular Emax 2, see the chapter "1 - Zone Selectivity" starting on page 135.
Further documents
For each type of selectivity, the protections must be set so that only those circuit-breakers capable of isolating the overload or fault open, without the rest of the installation being de-energized. Relevant definitions, operating principles, areas of application, advantages and disadvantages, requirements, indications for setting the protections and examples are provided in the Technical Application Paper QT1 1SDC007100G0205 "Low voltage selectivity with ABB circuit-breakers".
10 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 3 - Selectivity between ABB SACE circuit-breakers
4 - Documents and Tools for the design engineer
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Supporting software Different softwares are available; the majority are free of charge and are designed to facilitate, optimize and extend the functions and configurations of SACE Emax 2 in your installation:
Ekip Connect 3 ABB software to interface with Ekip Touch and other low voltage devices (Link)
EPiC ABB APP to interface with Ekip Touch using a smartphone / tablet via Bluetooth (Link)
Ekip View ABB software which supervises the communication network, analyzes the trend of the electricity values and monitors the plant conditions (1SDH001276R0001)
NOTE: the link launches the software package download, which requires about 1.3 Gb of space.
e-Design ABB software suite (Link) which includes the following tools: · DOC, to design the single-line diagrams of low and medium voltage electrical installations, choose the
operating and protection devices and check and coordinate the protections · CAT, for technical / commercial cost estimating of ABB products · Curves, for drawing, calibrating and printing the trip curves of the protection devices · OTC, for assessing the thermal behavior of the switchgear and sizing its fans and air conditioners · UniSec, for configuring medium voltage switchgear
Front CAD Software comprising libraries of block graphics for ABB panel-making products to be used with the latest versions of AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, IntelliCAD (Link)
Slide Rules App for sizing low voltage electrical cables according to the installation methods specified by current regulations and installation practices. Further information on the documentation is available on the Apple Store, in particular: Slide rules.
11 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 4 - Documents and Tools for the design engineer
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Further documents Various documents available free of charge in the ABB libraries describe SACE Emax 2 and the functions it supports:
Brochure: introductory overview Main features of SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers (1SDC200023B0201)
Brochure: History of air circuit-breakers
Presentation of the origin and evolution of ABB air circuit-breakers ABB for low voltage applications (1SDC200024B0201)
Brochure: retrofitting kit Overview of retrofitting kits for New Emax circuit-breakers (1SDC200034L0202)
Product notes for consultants General overview of the features of Emax 2 circuit-breakers, specifically for consultants (1SDC200032L0201)
Product notes for switchgear engineers
General overview of the features of Emax 2 circuit-breakers, specifically for switchgear engineers (1SDC200028L0201)
Product notes the Ekip Link system Introduction to the new Ekip Link switchgear control system (1SDC200031L0202)
Product notes for Power Controller Introduction to the new Power Controller load management system (1SDC200030L0202)
Product notes for generator protections
General features for the new generator protections available with Emax 2 protection trip units (1SDC200035L0202)
Product notes: migration to Emax 2 Advantages and details of migration from New Emax to Emax 2 circuit-breakers (1SDC200036L0201)
White Paper for generator protections White Paper on generator protections (1SDC007409G0202)
White Paper for Ekip Power Controller White Paper on the Power Controller function (1SDC007410G0202)
White Paper for communication White paper of communication modules for Emax 2 (1SDC007412G0201)
Continued on the next page
12 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 4 - Documents and Tools for the design engineer
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Product Notes for IEC 61850 Overview of the new IEC 61850 communication modules (1SDC200038L0201)
Product notes for Network Analyzer Introduction to the new Network Analyzer measurement and analysis system (1SDC200037L0202)
Catalogue Emax 2 general catalogue (1SDC200023D0209)
Handbook The purpose of this manual for electrical installations is to provide designers and users of such installations with rapidly consulted reference material (1SDC010002D0206)
IPS White paper on the Interface protection System (IPS) and Interface Device (DDI) (1SDC007117G0202)
Load shedding White paper on Load Shedding - Load shedding priority (1SDC007119G0201)
Synchronism and reclosing White paper for Synchro reclosing synchronization solutions (1SDC007118G0201)
13 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 4 - Documents and Tools for the design engineer
Trip unit Overview
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - General characteristics
Families
SACE Emax 2 can be configured to operate with two Trip unit families:
· Ekip Dip with interface via dip-switches · Ekip Touch with touchscreen display
Both families provide protection and measuring functions related to signals from the installation and are available in different models and versions.
There are four Ekip Touch models available:
· Ekip Touch · Ekip Hi-Touch · Ekip G Touch · Ekip G-Hi Touch
All Ekip Touch models are also available in the version with LCD display for installations situated in particularly aggressive environmental conditions.
Main functions Ekip Dip and Ekip Touch provides the following functions:
1. Measurement: measurement of different quantities, such as: current, voltage, power, energy
2. Protection: depending on the measurements made and the parameters configured by the user, the Trip unit checks for the presence of alarms and commands circuit-breaker opening if necessary
3. Signalling: management of contacts and communication networks to optimize plant efficiency, communication among different CB and other functions
The functions are provided both by transducers and actuators inside the circuit-breaker, and by means of a vast range of external accessories.
Presentation
Figure 1
Figure 2
Ekip Dip has a dip-switch (1) interface for configuring and verifying the protections and main parameters (page 18).
Ekip Touch has a touchscreen display (1) for accessing the configuration menus and checking parameters, measurements and information (page 35).
The nominal size of the Rating plug (2) can be checked on the front.
All the external connections, including the supply and communication modules, the external sensors and mechanical accessories, are available in the upper terminal box (3) (page 16 for an overview of the electronic accessories).
14 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Trip unit Overview | 1 - General characteristics
2 - Ekip Touch models and versions
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Default functions and Every Ekip Touch module has default measurement and protection functions, which can be extended with the extensions aid of additional software packages.
The extensions (additional SW packages) can be pre-engineered when the circuit-breaker is ordered or at a later date (in this case, via ABB Ability Marketplace TM
Overview
Figure 3
Model
Versions Standard protections Voltage protections Voltage advanced protections Frequency protections Power protections ROCOF protections Adaptive protections Standard Measurements Ekip Measuring Measurements Class 1 Power & Energy Metering Datalogger Network Analyzer
Ekip Touch
LSI, LSIG X O (1)
Ekip Hi-Touch LSI, LSIG X X
O (1)
O
O (1)
X
O (1)
X (3)
O (1)
O
O
X
X
X
O
X
Ekip G Touch LSIG X X (3)
X (3)
X (3) X (3) O O X
X
O (2)
X
O
O (1)
X
X
O (1)
X
O
Ekip G Hi-Touch LSIG X X
X
X X X X X
X
Page
52 62
65
69 72 78 79 110
114
X
117
X
118
X
120
X = Available by default; O = Optional
(1) Configurable if Measuring Measurements package is present (2) Only available at the time circuit-breaker is ordered (3) Certain protections of the complete package are available by default; the remaining ones can be activated on request
15 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Trip unit Overview | 2 - Ekip Touch models and versions
3 - Accessories and software
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Internal and external The functions of Ekip Touch can be expanded by further internal and external accessories, which differ as to accessories function and assembly position; certain accessories can also be configured with Ekip Dip.
Internal modules
Name Measurement (1) Ekip Signalling 4K (2)(5) Ekip LCD Rating Plug (3)(6)
Function Measurement and supply from installation voltages Programmable digital inputs/outputs LCD interface for aggressive environments Defines rated current In
Page 184 186 189 183
External modules for assembly in upper terminal box(5):
Name Ekip Supply (6) Ekip Com (4)
Ekip Link (4)(6) Ekip Signalling 2K Ekip Signalling 3T Ekip Synchrocheck
Description
Page
Power supply of Trip unit and modules in terminal box
190
Communication between Trip unit and external buses (various protocols)
191
Communication between Trip units via an intranet with ABB proprietary protocol
212
Programmable digital inputs/outputs
220
Measurement from current loop and temperature sensors
229
Measurement of an external voltage and management of synchronism between two supply sources
223
Other external modules and accessories:
Name Ekip Signalling 10K (5)(6) Ekip Multimeter (5)(6) Toroid S.G.R. Toroid Rc External neutral (6)
Description Programmable digital inputs/outputs Panel front display Sensor for protection from earth fault currents Sensor for protection from residual currents Sensor for protecting the external neutral line with 3P circuit-breaker
Page 232 233 233 233 234
In addition, the supervision, configuration and reporting functions are provided by further modules for temporary communication and supply:
Name Ekip TT (6) Ekip T&P (6) Ekip Programming (6)
Description Supply and tests Supply, communication, programming and tests Supply, communication and programming
Page 235
(1) Version and availability of the module depend on the Trip unit model and on activation of the measurements
package (2) Configurable with circuit-breakers E2.2, E4.2 and E6.2 (3) Assembled by default at the time equipment is ordered; can be replaced afterwards with a model of a
different size (4) Always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (5) Presence of auxiliary supply required and, for terminal box models, of Ekip Supply (6) Accessory also available and compatible with Ekip Dip
Additional functions
Ekip Touch can be equipped with further software configurations compliant with different functional applications:
· Power Controller · Load Shedding · Interface protections (IPS) · Synchro reclosing · Embedded ATS
For details consult the Technical catalog or the summary documents of each function (page 11).
16 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Trip unit Overview | 3 - Accessories and software
4 - Operating features
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Introduction Ekip Dip and Ekip Touch have been developed and certified to function in specific environmental, electrical and mechanical conditions; full details are available in the Technical catalog (page 13).
The following sections describe the electrical and power supply characteristics that enable Trip unit and the relative electronic accessories to operate correctly.
Electrical characteristics The Ekip Touch and Ekip Dip measurement and protection functions described in this document are provided with primary voltage and current values within the following nominal ranges:
Parameter Primary current Primary voltage Rated frequency Peak factor
Rated operating range 0,004 ÷ 16 In (1) 5 ÷ 690 V AC (2) 45 ... 55 Hz (with fn= 50 Hz) / 54 ... 66 Hz (with fn= 60 Hz) Complying with standard IEC 60947-2
(1) range with reference to each phase; In refers to the rated size defined by the Rating plug installed on the Trip unit, available in models from 100 A to 6300 A, depending on the circuit-breaker model used (2) for Ekip Touch rated highest line-to-line voltage connected directly to Trip unit, also to sockets inside the CB; external transformers must be used for higher voltage values, consult the chapter dedicated to the Measurement modules
Self-supply The internal current sensors are able to supply the Trip unit directly; Ekip Touch versions Hi-, G, G Hi- are also fitted with the Measurement enabler with voltage sockets module, which allows the Trip unit to be supplied by the installation voltages as well:
Parameter Minimum three-phase turn-on current Minimum three-phase turn-on voltage
Operating limits > 30 A (E1.2-E2-2-E4.2 with Rating Plug < 400 A) > 80 A (E1.2-E2-2-E4.2 with Rating Plug 400 A) > 160 A (E6.2) > 80 V
Auxiliary power supply Ekip Dip and Ekip Touch can be connected to an external auxiliary supply source, which is useful for activating certain functions such as communication via Local Bus, recording manual operations, certain measurements and the datalogger if available.
The auxiliary supply can be provided by modules from the Ekip Supply range or by direct connection to the terminal box.
Direct connection must guarantee the following operating conditions:
Parameter Voltage Tolerance Maximum ripple Maximum inrush current @ 24 V Maximum rated power @ 24 V
Connection cable
Operating limits 24 V DC galvanically isolated ±10% ±5% 10 A per 5 ms 4 W Insulated with grounding cable (same characteristics as Belden 3105A/B or higher)
IMPORTANT: if connection is direct, the power supply must be galvanically insulated and provide the insulation characteristics established by standard IEC 60950 (UL
1950) or equivalent.
17 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Trip unit Overview | 4 - Operating features
Ekip Dip
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - Operator interface
Introduction
The operator interface of the Ekip Dip protection trip unit allows you to:
· Set the parameters relating to the available protections. · View the status of the trip unit and alarms. · Connect to the frontal connector to communicate and perform the opening test.
Components of the interface The Ekip Dip operator interface appears as follows:
Figure 4
The following table provides a description of the components of the interface:
Position A B C D E F G H I L M N O P Q R
Type
LED
Protections: thresholds
Protections: times Settings Test
Description L Protection LED (alarm and trip) L Protection LED (pre-alarm) S Protection LED (alarm and trip) I Protection LED (trip) G Protection LED (alarm and trip) Power-on LED (trip unit powered and on) L Protection dip-switch (threshold I1) S Protection dip-switch (threshold I2) I Protection dip-switch (threshold I3) G Protection dip-switch (threshold I4) L Protection dip-switch (time t1) S Protection dip-switch (time t2 and type of curve) G Protection dip-switch (time t4 and type of curve) Neutral and frequency dip-switch Test pushbutton Test connector
IMPORTANT: the figure above refers to an Ekip Dip, LSIG version. In the case of Ekip Dip LI or LSI versions, LEDs and dip-switches related only to the protections
present are available.
LEDs The LEDs are useful on Ekip Dip in order to distinguish and identify various types of information on the protection trip unit, the circuit-breaker and state of the line currents.
Operational conditions
The operation of the LED is determined by the power supply conditions of the trip unit: · With the trip unit energized (by current sensors or by auxiliary power supply or by Ekip TT or by Ekip T&P)
the LEDs are operational for all the signals. · With the trip unit de-energized, the LEDs are limited to the signalling of the last switch-off or trip event
(combined with the check via iTest, described below).
18 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Continued on the next page Ekip Dip | 1 - Operator interface
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
NOTE: with the trip unit off, the operation of the LEDs is guaranteed if the internal battery of the trip unit is working properly.
About The LEDs combined with the protections provide various information, through different combinations of lighting and blinking.
NOTE: all the combinations related to protection LED signals are described in chapter Selfdiagnosis and signalling , on page 29.
The power-on LED provides information about the power status of the protection trip unit: · LED on (default configuration) fixed or blinking, signals trip unit energized. · LED off signals trip unit de-energized.
NOTE: with Ekip T&P module and Ekip Connect software, it is possible to configure how the power LED functions (LED fixed or blinking).
Protections: thresholds The thresholds of all the protections can be modified with various dip-switches, as specified on the serigraph of the interface.
The values of the protections make reference to the current In, a nominal value defined by the Rating Plug.
IMPORTANT: · Modification of the thresholds must be performed in the absence of protection
alarms. · Modifications carried out in alarm conditions are accepted by the trip unit when resting
condition is restored (absence of protection alarms).
Protections: times The times and the curves of the protections can be modified with various dip-switches, as specified on the serigraph of the interface.
IMPORTANT: · Modification of the times must be performed in the absence of protection alarms.
· Modifications carried out in alarm conditions are accepted by the trip unit when resting condition is restored (absence of protection alarms).
Settings Two further settings are available:
· Neutral allows activation and adjustment of the protections on the neutral pole. · Frequency allows the selection of the installation frequency.
iTest pushbutton
The iTest pushbutton is useful for three operations:
· Perform tests (circuit-breaker opening test and LED test). Consult chapter 3 - Test on page 28. · Reset the signal of the tripped protection. This operation can be performed when the circuit-breaker is
both open and closed and with currents present, by pressing the push-button for about 1 second (the signal disappears when the push-button is released). · With the trip unit off, check the information relating to the switch-off or tripping event.
NOTE: with the trip unit off, pressing of the iTest button switches on (for approximately 4 seconds):
· the power-on LED, if the trip unit is off due to an energy drop (primary current less than the minimum level of operation, removal of auxiliary power supply with circuit-breaker open, etc...).
· the protection tripped LED if the trip unit is off due to a protection trip.
Test connector
The test connector allows the connection of Ekip TT and Ekip T&P modules, in order to perform the following operations:
· Temporary energizing of the trip unit to check the status, and perform the trip test (option possible with all the front interface modules).
· Analysis, supervision and setting of additional parameters through external communication test units (Ekip T&P).
19 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Dip | 1 - Operator interface
1 - Protections - Introduction
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Operating principle The protection functions are available with all Ekip Dip versions.
1. If the signal measured exceeds the set threshold, the specific protection activates (prealarm and/or alarm).
2. The alarm appears on the display and, after a period of time (timing t t), depending on the protection parameters set, can convert into a trip command (TRIP) transmitted to the internal Trip coil of the CB.
NOTE:
· if the signal measured drops below the set threshold before the trip time has elapsed, Ekip Dip quits the alarm and/or timing state and returns to the normal operating condition
· all protections have a default configuration: check the parameters and change to suit the installation requirements before putting into service
· to allow circuit-breaker tripping to be controlled by a specific protection, the protection itself must be enabled
L Protection L protection protects against overloads
NOTE: the protection is available and active for all the versions of the trip unit.
t I1
When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips in a time that decreases as the current read
L
increases.
Parameters
t1
All the parameters that can be modified by the user affect the response curve, and related tripping times.
I Parameter
Description
The value I1 contributes in calculating the tripping time, and also defines the current value that, if exceeded, activates the protection (with reference to the curve, it is the part parallel to the y-axis).
Threshold I1
IMPORTANT: · The protection is activated and starts timing for currents between 1.05 and 1.2 of the threshold I1 set (1). · The delay is interrupted if the current drops below the activation threshold.
The value t1 contributes in calculating the tripping time (with reference to the curve, T1 affects the entire curve by shifting it as a whole along the y-axis).
Time t1
IMPORTANT: The protection limits the tripping time to 1 second in two cases:
· if, according to the calculation, the time is less than 1 second. · If the fault current is greater than 12 In.
(1) Example (with I1 set to 400 A): the protection is activated for currents between 420 A and 480 A.
With the module Ekip T&P and with the Ekip Connect software, it is possible to activate the function Thermal Memory, and adjust the threshold of Pre-alarm.
20 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Dip | 1 - Protections - Introduction
ABB | SACE Emax 2
S Protection S protection protects against selective short circuit.
NOTE: the protection is available for LSI and LSIG versions of the trip unit.
t I2 S t2
When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips within a fixed or dynamic time (the time decreases as the current reading increases).
Parameters All the parameters that can be modified by the user affect the response curve, and related tripping times.
I
Parameter Enable
Type of curve
Description By setting the threshold dip-switches to the Off position, the protection is disabled. It determines the dynamic of the curve and the tripping time, fixed or dynamic according to the selection:
NOTE: calculation of the tripping time of the inverse time curve is based on a mathematical expression. The details are provided in the table on page 26. It defines the current value that activates the protection when exceeded (with reference to the curve, it is the part parallel to the y-axis).
Threshold I2 Time t2
IMPORTANT: · The I2 threshold set must be higher than the I1 threshold. An incorrect configuration returns an alarm signal. · The delay is interrupted if the current drops below the activation threshold.
The selected function determines the contribution of t2: · Fixed time: t2 is the delay time between exceeding the I2 threshold and sending the opening command. · Dynamic time: t2 contributes in calculating the tripping time (with reference to the curve, t2 affects the entire curve, shifting it as a whole along the vertical axis).
IMPORTANT: · The minimum tripping time of the protection is t2. If, according to the calculation, the tripping time is less, it is automatically limited to t2. · For all the UL versions, the maximum time allowed is 0.4 s. If a higher value is set, the trip unit signals the error and forces the parameter to 0.4 s.
With the module Ekip T&P and with the Ekip Connect software, it is possible to activate the function Thermal Memory.
21 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Dip | 1 - Protections - Introduction
ABB | SACE Emax 2
I Protection I protection protects against instantaneous short circuit. When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips within a fixed non-adjustable time.
t I3
Parameters
I
The user can set the intervention threshold.
Parameter
t3
Enable
I Threshold I3
Description By setting the threshold dip-switches to the Off position, the protection is disabled. It defines the current value that activates the protection when exceeded (with reference to the curve, it is the part parallel to the y-axis).
IMPORTANT: The I3 threshold set must be higher than the I2 threshold. An incorrect configuration returns an alarm signal.
22 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Dip | 1 - Protections - Introduction
ABB | SACE Emax 2
G Protection G protection protects against a ground fault.
NOTE: the protection is available for the LSIG version of the trip unit.
t I4
When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips within a fixed or dynamic time (the time
G
decreases as the current reading increases).
Parameters
t4
All the parameters that can be modified by the user affect the response curve, and related tripping times.
I Parameter
Enable Type of curve
Description By setting the dip-switches of the threshold in one of the available combinations other than Off, the protection is enabled. If enabled, the protection is inhibited automatically by the trip unit under two conditions: · Disconnection of one or more current sensors. · Current measured on one of the phases higher than a maximum value.
IMPORTANT: the maximum current value that deactivates G protection varies according to the threshold set:
· 8 In (with I4 0.8 In) · 6 In (with 0.5 In I4 < 0.8 In) · 4 In (with 0.2 In I4 < 0.5 In) · 2 In (with I4 < 0.2 In)
It determines the dynamic of the curve and the tripping time, fixed or dynamic according to the selection:
NOTE: calculation of the tripping time of the inverse time curve is based on a mathematical expression. The details are provided in the table on page 26.
It defines the current value that activates the protection when exceeded (with reference to the curve, it is the part parallel to the y-axis).
Threshold I4 Time t4
IMPORTANT: · The delay is interrupted if the current drops below the tripping threshold. · For all the UL versions the maximum threshold allowed by the trip unit is 1200 A. If a higher value is set, the trip unit signals the error and forces the parameter to 1200 A.
The selected function determines the contribution of t4: · Fixed time: t4 is the delay time between the exceeding of the I4 threshold and the sending of the opening command. · Dynamic time: t4 contributes in calculating the tripping time (with reference to the curve, t4 affects the entire curve, shifting it as a whole along the y-axis).
IMPORTANT: · The minimum tripping time of the protection is t4. If, according to the calculation, the tripping time is less, it is automatically limited to t4. · For all the UL versions, the maximum time allowed by the trip unit is 0.4s. If a higher value is set, the trip unit signals the error and forces the parameter to 0.4 s.
With the Ekip T&P module and with the Ekip Connect software it is possible to adjust the threshold of Prealarm.
23 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Dip | 1 - Protections - Introduction
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Neutral and frequency Adjusting of the neutral setting is used to customize the L, S and I protections on the Neutral pole with a control factor different from the other phases.
NOTE: use the adjustment of the neutral setting only with four-pole or three-pole circuitbreakers with external neutral: with three-pole circuit-breakers and neutral protection
active, the trip unit signals the absence of the current sensor.
The adjustment of the frequency is used in order to set the installation frequency (between 50 and 60 Hz).
Neutral parameters The user can activate the protection and set the percentage for calculation of the protection thresholds.
Parameter Enable
Threshold InN
Description
By setting the threshold dip-switches to the Off position, the protection on the Neutral is disabled.
It establishes the multiplication factor applied to the trip thresholds of the protections: · 50%: trip threshold of the neutral current lower than other phases. · 100%: same trip thresholds for all poles. · 200%: trip threshold of the neutral current higher than other phases.
Limitations
The adjustment of the Neutral threshold to value of 200 % must be performed considering the following formula: (I1 * InN) Iu.
I1 indicates the threshold of L protection in Amperes (example: In = 1000 A; I1 = 0.45 In = 450 A), InN is the neutral threshold expressed as a multiplication factor (example: 2), Iu indicates the size of the circuit-breaker (example: 1000 A).
WARNING! With 200% threshold and measured neutral current exceeding 16In, the Trip unit resets the protection to 100% by itself
24 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Dip | 1 - Protections - Introduction
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Additional protections
The Ekip T&P module, and the Ekip Connect software, allow you to set some protections not available via dip-switch:
· Thermal Memory · T Protection · Prealarm threshold · Hardware Trip
Thermal Memory
The function, which is available for L and S protections, allows overheating in the cables connected to the circuit-breaker to be prevented: in the case of trips within brief intervals, the unit considers the time between commands and the entity of the faults so as to reduce opening time.
IMPORTANT: for the S protection the function can be activated if the selected curve is time-dependent.
NOTE: the function also reduces the trip time in the case of overloads which have not led to the open command (longer than 100ms)
T Protection
T protection protects the circuit-breaker against abnormal temperatures recorded by the protection trip unit.
T protection is always active; via Ekip Connect it is possible to enable tripping, which takes place for temperatures t < -40 °C or t > 85 °C.
Pre-alarm
The purpose of the pre-alarm, available for L and G protections, is to signal that the measured current is near the activation threshold of the protection itself.
It is possible to set the pre-alarm threshold in order to establish the pre-alarm activation values; the pre-alarm threshold is expressed as a percentage in relation to the protection thresholds (I1 and I4) and is adjustable between 50% and 90% (default value). Example: with I1 = 0.6 In and pre-alarm threshold L=50 %, the pre-alarm is activated for currents greater than 0.3 In
The pre-alarm condition is activated for currents higher than the threshold set, and is deactivated for: · Current less than the pre-alarm threshold. · Current greater than the activation threshold of protection.
Hardware Trip
If enabled, the protection activates if one or more disconnections of the current sensors, Rating plug, Trip coil or an alarm inside the unit are detected.
The protection activates with a TRIP if the disconnections persist for more than one second; in the case of Trip coil disconnection, the unit merely handles alarm signaling.
25 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Dip | 1 - Protections - Introduction
Summary table of protections
ABB L
ANSI (5) 49
Threshold (1)
I1 = 0.4...1 In
Threshold tolerance (3)
Time (1)
activation for If in the range (1.05...1.2) x I1
t1 = 3...144 s
S (t = k)
50 TD
I2 = 0.6...10 In
± 7 % with If 6 In t2 = ± 10 % with If > 6 In 0.1...0.8 s
Calculation formula t t (2) tt = (9 t1) / (If / I1) 2
t t = t2
S (t = k / l 2)
51
I2 = 0.6...10 In
I
50
I3 = 1.5...15 In
G (t = k)
50N TD
I4 (4) = 0.1...1 In
± 7 % with If 6 In t2 = ± 10 % with If > 6 In 0.1...0.8 s
tt = (100 t2) / (If) 2
± 10 % ± 7 %
Not adjustable t t 30 ms
t4 = 0.1...0.8 s
t t = t4
G (t = k
/ l 2)
51N
Iinst
-
I4 (4) = 0.1...1 In
Defined by ABB
± 7 % -
t4 = 0.1...0.8 s
tt = 2 / (If / I4) 2
Instantaneous -
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Calculation example t t (2)
t t = 6.75 s with: I1 = 0.4 In; t1 = 3 s;
If = 0.8 In
Tolerance t t (3)
± 10 % with If 6 In ± 20 % with If > 6 In
The better of the
-
two values:
± 10 % or ± 40 ms
t t = 5 s con: I2 = 1 In; t2 = 0.8 s;
If = 4 In
± 15 % with If 6 In ± 20 % with If > 6 In
-
-
-
t t = 0.32 s with: I4 = 0.8 In; t4 = 0.2 s; If = 2 In
The better of the two values: ± 10 % or ± 40 ms
± 15 %
-
-
(1) See the serigraph for the available combinations. (2) t t calculation is valid for If values that have exceeded the trip threshold of the protection. Use fault current and threshold values expressed in In to calculate t t, as shown in the example. (3) Tolerances valid with trip unit energized in service conditions or with the auxiliary; tripping time 100 ms, temperature and currents within operating
limits. If these conditions are not guaranteed, the tolerances in the table shown below apply. (4) In the presence of auxiliary power supply, you can select all the thresholds. In self-supply mode the minimum threshold is limited to: 0.3 In (with In
= 100 A), 0.25 In (with In = 400 A) or 0.2 In (for all other sizes). (5) ANSI / IEEE C37-2 encoding.
Key
· (t=k) - Fixed time curve · (t=k/I2) - Dynamic time curve · tt - Tripping time · If - Primary fault current
Tolerances in particular cases If the conditions defined in point (3) of the above table are not guaranteed, the following tolerances apply:
Protection L S I G
Tolerance threshold Activation for If in the range (1.05...1.2) x I1 ± 10 % ± 15 % ± 15 %
Tolerance t t ± 20 % ± 20 % 60 ms ± 20 %
26 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Dip | 1 - Protections - Introduction
2 - Measurements
ABB | SACE Emax 2
List Ekip Dip is able to take various measurements, all available via Ekip Connect::
Parameter Instantaneous currents Trip Min Max Measurements Operation counters
Description Phase current and earth fault measurements in real time List of current protection trips (TRIP) History of minimum and maximum currents, recorded at a settable interval Number of mechanical and electrical operations
All information are available via the Ekip T&P module and via Ekip Connect software; instantaneous measurements are also available via the Ekip Multimeter unit.
Instantaneous currents The instantaneous currents, available in the Measurements pages, are real time measurements of the phase and earth fault currents expressed in root mean square value; the measurement time and performance depend on the rated current defined by the Rating plug (In):
Measurement
Phase currents Internal earth fault currents (2)
Monitor time (min-max) 0,004...64 In
0,08...64 In
Normal operating range 0,2...1,2 In
0,2...1,2 In
Accuracy of value read (1) 1 %
2 %
(1) the accuracies refer to normal operating ranges, as established by IEC 61557-12 (2) available with LSIG versions
Maximum and minimum The trip unit is able to record the maximum and minimum current, measured inside an interval that can be currents programmed by the user.
Every measurement recorded is accompanied by the following information: · Recording interval. · Phase and value of maximum and minimum current measured. · Date and time of the recording (referring to the internal clock).
NOTE: in the case of the minimum current, if the value drops below the 0.03 In threshold, it will be recorded and represented by the symbol "..." in the measurement field.
Trips The trip unit is able to record the last 30 openings of the circuit-breaker caused by protection functions (trips). The trips include useful information: · The protection that caused the trip · The progressive number of the opening · The date and time of the opening (referring to the internal clock) · The measurements associated to the trip protection.
Contact Wear Contact wear indicates the state of deterioration of the main contacts of the circuit-breaker. The value is expressed as a percentage, and is 0 % in the case of no wear, and 100 % in the case of total wear. The contact wear is calculated automatically by the trip unit at every opening for protection or, in the presence of an auxiliary power supply, also at every manual opening of the circuit-breaker.
Number of operations
In the presence of auxiliary power, the trip unit records a series information relating to the openings of the circuit-breaker:
· Number of manual operations · Total number of operations (manual + trips)
27 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Dip | 2 - Measurements
3 - Test
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Presentation
The Ekip TT and Ekip T&P modules connected to the Ekip Dip allow you to perform various tests:
· Trip unit LED test · Check on the presence of the internal battery · Circuit-breaker opening test (trip test) · Protection test.
LED test The LED test can be performed directly on Ekip Dip:
Phase Operation
1
Connect a module to the front test connector of frontal test.
2
Press the iTest pushbutton for at least 6 seconds, but less than 9 seconds.
3
When the protection LEDs light up, trip unit the iTest pushbutton.
Check the following switch-on sequence:
4
· S, I, G LEDs on fixed · Led pre-alarm L and alarm L that alternate three times
· All the protection LEDs off
Battery test
The battery check is integrated in the LED test procedure, except for the battery error signal:
· If the battery is absent or not working, after iTest is pressed the error is signalled by five flashes of the pre-alarm LED L.
· If the battery is present and working, the LED test proceeds as in the normal procedure.
Protection test In order to perform the protection test, follow the instructions below:
Phase Operation
1
Make sure that the circuit-breaker is closed and that there are no primary currents.
2
Connect Ekip T&P to the front test connector.
3
Start the communication with Ekip Connect.
4
Open the Information page and select the Test command, which opens the protection test page.
5
Set up the test as required and verify that the trip unit functions properly.
Opening test The opening test can be performed directly on the trip unit or from Ekip Connect. To perform the test:
Phase 1 2 3 4
Operation Make sure that the circuit-breaker is closed and that there are no primary currents. Connect a module to the front test connector of frontal test. Press the iTest pushbutton for at least 9 seconds. Check that the circuit-breaker opens and that the TU Reset button comes out
To perform the test from Ekip Connect:
Phase Operation
1
Make sure that the circuit-breaker is closed and that there are no primary currents.
2
Connect Ekip T&P to the front test connector.
3
Start the communication with Ekip Connect.
4
Select the trip test command.
5
Check that the circuit-breaker opens and that the TU Reset button comes out
Further information on Ekip Connect is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/ DownloadCenter/, in particular with the manual 1SDH000891R0002.
28 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Dip | 3 - Test
ABB | SACE Emax 2
4 - List of alarms and signals
LED view Ekip Dip continuously monitors its own operating condition and that of all the devices to which it is connected. All the signals are available with the front LEDs. The protection LEDs provide information with various combinations of lighting and flashing, while the power-on LED, as described on page 19, indicates the power-on conditions of the trip unit.
NOTE: the number of LEDs depends on the version of Ekip Dip (LI, LSI, LSIG).
Summary table of LED signals
The following table summarises the signals available with the protection LEDs and the operations to be carried out in response to alarms or fault conditions signalled.
Type of Information
Slow flashing (0.5Hz)
Fast flashing (2 Hz)
On and fixed
Colour and LED
All R G
Internal configuration error (5).
Trip coil disconnected or trip command failed
Current sensors disconnected
x
Rating Plug error
Protection delay
Temperature alarm (1)
Pre-alarm L
Trip (2)
Hardware Trip (3)
Installation error
Parameter error
Circuit-breaker state not defined or in error
x
Error on Local Bus
Maintenance alarm
Software incompatibility
Low battery (during selftest) (4)
All R+G
All R
R (single)
G
x
x
x x
x
x
All R+G
All R
R (single)
G
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
2 flashes every 2 s
All R G
3
4
flashes flashes
every every 3 s 4 s HELP
GG
A
B
B
X
B+E
C
C
C
C
B
E
x
D
B
x
F
x
F
G
H
(1) The temperature alarm is signalled by lighting of the protection L and I red LEDs. (2) The last trip can also be displayed with trip unit off, by pressing the iTest key. (3) The Hardware Trip is signalled by lighting of the pre-alarm L yellow LED and the protection I red led. (4) Five flashes when self-test is started up (5) Error present with one of the three flashing options displayed alongside.
Key to LED colours
The above table lists the colors of the LEDs, to be interpreted as follows: · R = red LED (alarm LED L, S, I, G). · G = yellow LED (pre-alarm LED L).
NOTE: for further details refer to the table listing the components of the interface, available on page 18.
Continued on the next page
29 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Dip | 4 - List of alarms and signals
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
HELP
Some LED signals indicate connection errors or operational errors that require corrective or maintenance operations. The following are the suggestions for checking with reference to the preceding LED table:
HELP note A B C
D
E F G
Operation
Contact ABB and give details about the state of the LEDs on the unit.
Check the connections between trip unit and accessories (Rating Plug, trip coil, sensors, etc).
Normal operation/signalling provided by the trip unit.
Error in setting of the dip-switches. Check and correct the following conditions: · All the dip-switches of L are in the ON position · I1 I2 or I2 I3. · Iu < (2 * In * I1) in the case where InN = 200 %. · I4 < 0.3 In (con In = 100 A), 0.25 In (con In = 400 A) or 0.2 In (for all other sizes), in the absence of auxiliary power supply. · t2 > 0.4s (in the case of UL circuit-breaker) · t4 > 0.4s (in the case of UL circuit-breaker) · I4 > 1200 A (in case of UL circuit-breaker)
Install by pressing and holding the itest pushbutton for at least 5s.
Connect via Ekip Connect in order to set the Local Bus or to confirm maintenance.
Replace the battery.
30 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Dip | 4 - List of alarms and signals
5 - Additional functions
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Presentation Ekip T&P and Ekip Programming allow the protection trip unit to be connected to Ekip Connect software and to access parameters and commands that cannot be accessed directly from the front interface: a description of the various functions is given below.
The additional protections available via Ekip Connect are described on page 25.
Maintenance
The Maintenance function allows signalling to the user, via LED, that:
· One year has passed since the last maintenance. · Contact wear has increased by more than 10% compared with the value at the last maintenance.
Via Ekip Connect there are two selections available:
· Activation: it allows to the maintenance function to be activated. · Reset: it allows confirmation of maintenance on the trip unit; the present date and contact wear values
are recorded, and the signal is reset.
The reference date is that of the internal clock, and the elapsed time is calculated both with the trip unit on and off (provided that the internal battery is working).
NOTE: manual modification of the date can cause variations in the calculation of the time elapsed, and therefore in the date of the next maintenance.
NOTE: the maintenance signal due to increased contact wear is active for values higher than 20 %.
Local Bus In order to activate communication on the Local Bus with the Ekip Link, Ekip Multimeter or Ekip Signalling 10K modules, the Local Bus parameter must be enabled.
NOTE: communication with the modules is active if the auxiliary power supply is present.
Date and time The Ekip Dip trip unit has a user-adjustable internal clock. Setting the date can be useful for some functions such as the recording of trips and minimum and maximum currents, and maintenance.
The clock is active if the internal battery of the trip unit is working.
31 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Dip | 5 - Additional functions
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Programmable States There are sixteen independent programmable states identified by the letters A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, offering different solutions for event control. The value of each programmable state can be either "True" or "False". Different configuration parameters are available: · Trigger: event or combination of more events of state activation (up to 24, in AND or OR logic configuration). · On Delay: state activation delay calculated from trigger presence onwards. · Off Delay: state de-activation delay calculated from trigger absence onwards. NOTE: the state become activate if the trigger is present for longer than the On delay setting and become inactive if the trigger is absent for longer than the Off delay setting.
Trigger State
Delay ON
Programmable State TRUE FALSE
Delay ON
Delay OFF
Delay OFF
The states can be used with the external Ekip Signalling 10K module, on Link Bus or with the programmable functions, to transfer the desired signalling combination on contacts.
Programmable Functions
Ekip Dip allows you to program five commands so that they are automatically activated according to the signalling state or the events selected by the user. The commands are:
· Trip · Reset of the trip signal. · Reset signalling contacts of the Ekip Signalling 10K module. · Opening coil command (YO). · Closing coil command (YC).
Each command provides two programming parameters:
· Activation function: event or events (up to eight, in logical AND or OR configuration) that activate the command.
· Delay: command sending delay, calculated starting from the occurrence of the activation event.
NOTE: the command is sent if the event is present for a time greater than the delay that has been set.
NOTE: the YO and YC commands are possible only if the coils and Ekip Actuator are present, and if all the operating conditions exist (see page 133).
32 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Dip | 5 - Additional functions
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Circuit-breaker label and user Labels that can be configured by the user so as to facilitate remote identification of the trip unit; in detail the Data CB label, the trip unit model and the communication address form the identifier used by Ekip Connect for the devices connected.
Date of installation Installation date of the circuit-breaker.
Load Profile Timers SACE Emax 2 has 4 counters which display how long the maximum current measured has remained in each percentage band.
The counters are expressed in seconds and the bands are: 0-49%In, 50-79%In, 80-89%In, >90%In.
Led Alive
The parameter allows the behaviour of the power-on LED indicator of the trip unit and of all modules that can be connected to Ekip Supply to be changed. If activated:
· Trip unit: it comes on at a frequency of 0.5 Hz. · Modules connected to Ekip Supply: if there are no communication errors, they synchronize with the flashes
of the trip unit LED.
If deactivated, the power-on leds on the respective devices come on with a steady light.
Modules network settings retention
It allows the communication parameters of the circuit-breaker to be controlled if the trip unit is replaced:
· Overwrite: the parameters of the new trip unit are valid, so it is advisable to make sure that the communication parameter settings suit the communication network.
· Keep module data: the new trip unit updates its communication parameters with the ones in the Ekip Com modules of the circuit-breaker, used up to that moment in the various communication networks.
The trip units are supplied with the parameter set as Overwrite.
Wink The command allows the power-on LED on the protection trip unit to flash at 3 Hz so as to physically identify a trip unit that would not be identifiable in other ways.
3 Hz flashing is disabled by sending another Wink command or by switching off the trip unit.
Glitch The commands of Glitch 16 to 23 activate the respective glitch registers, which can be used for customizing programmable functions or output contacts.
33 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Dip | 5 - Additional functions
ABB | SACE Emax 2
6 - Default parameters
The Ekip Dip trip units are supplied with the following default parameters, some adjustable with the front DIPs (protections, Frequency, Neutral), other via front bus.
Protection/Parameter L S (1) I G (1) Frequency
Neutral
Hardware Trip Local Bus Alive LED Maintenance
Value 1 In; 144 s Off; 0.1 s 4 In Off; 0.1 s 50 Hz (IEC) / 60 Hz (UL) Off (for three-pole circuit breakers). 50 % (for four-pole circuit-breaker) Disabled Off Disabled (Power-on LED fixed) Off
(1) S Protection available with LSI and LSIG versions of the trip unit. G Protection available with LSIG version.
34 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Dip | 6 - Default parameters
Ekip Touch - Interface and menus
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - Presentation of interface
Functions
The Ekip Touch operator interface allows you to:
· display signals and measurements of the functions in progress or recorded events · configure the parameters, the protections present and other functions of the unit · set parameters concerning the accessory modules connected · perform tests
Components The Ekip Touch interface includes a touchscreen, short-cut push-buttons, status leds and a service connector for certain external accessories:
Figure 5
Pos. A B C D E F G
Description Single-touch color touchscreen display Power led Warning led Alarm led HOME push-button iTEST push-button Service connector
Display The touchscreen display of Ekip Touch is the single-touch, color type. The touchscreen function is active when the unit is on.
35 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 1 - Presentation of interface
LEDs LEDs
Colour
Power
Green
Warnings Yellow
Alarm Red
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Description Indicates the on status of Ekip Touch: · off: no power and unit off · on, steady (Power mode) or flashing (Alive mode): unit on and self-supplied by external Vaux or service connector The Power mode or Alive mode can be selected via Ekip Connect: if the Alive mode has been selected and external modules are connected, the Power leds of Ekip Touch and the modules flash in the synchronized mode.
Signals that certain alarms are present: · off: no alarm · on steady: prealarm of an active protection or status contacts error · two flast flashes every 0.5 s: trip unit parameter configuration error · fast flash: Rating Plug or Measurement module installation error
Signals that an alarm is present: · off: no alarm · on steady: on steady signals a TRIP due to a protection · on flashing: protection timing tripped or alarm due to disconnection of a current sensor · two flast flashes every 2 seconds: Rating Plug error · on with fast flashing: protection timing tripped or alarm due to disconnection of a current sensor
If on at the same time, the Warning and Alarm leds provide further signals:
· leds on with fast flashing: no communication between Trip unit and Mainboard · leds on with slow flashing: internal error · leds on and steady internal configuration error
These cases need assistance from ABB.
Push-buttons Pushbutton HOME
iTest
Description
Allows different areas of the menu to be accessed: · from pages: HOME, Histograms, Measuring instruments, Measurements, Main measurements -> open: Main page · from pages: Main page, Alarm list, at any point of the menu area -> open: HOME page
Allows certain pages of information about the unit to be rapidly consulted; press the button in successionj to display the following pages: · Alarm list, if messages are present · Info, if Customer Page option is active · Protection unit, with information about Ekip Touch · Circuit breaker, with information about the CB · Last trip, with information about the last trip, if available Consultation is active from pages: HOME, Histograms, Measuring instruments, Measurements, Main measurements
NOTE: with Ekip Touch off and the internal battery charged, press iTEST to temporarily switch on the Power led and, in the case of a trip, the display with information about the trip protection and the Alarm led
Service connector The service connector enables Ekip Touch to be connected to Ekip TT, Ekip T&P and Ekip Programming, allowing the unit to be temporarily supplied, parameter configuration prior to putting into service, tests and extension of the configuration functions.
IMPORTANT: only use cables supplied by ABB or with ABB accessories
36 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 1 - Presentation of interface
2 - Navigation
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Levels and pages The Ekip Touch menu is divided into several levels, all accessible using the touchscreen display and buttons available in the units:
Level 1 (HOME) Page shown on power up; appears when push-button of the same name appears, as described on page 36; from here you can:
1. access the MAIN PAGE (level 2), by pressing the HOME button 2. access the Alarm list, by selecting the diagnostic bar at the bottom 3. access the Summary pages of some of the measurements by pressing on the edges
Figure 6
NOTE: Ekip Touch is supplied with the Histograms page configured as HOME; if the configuration is different, the Histograms can be set as the main page by pressing
and holding the HOME key for five seconds and confirming the message on the display
Level 2 (MAIN PAGE) This page allows you to:
4. access one of the graphic pages: Histograms, Measuring instruments and Measurements 5. access the MENU AREA (level 3)
Figure 7 37 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Continued on the next page Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 2 - Navigation
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Level 3 (MENU AREA): You can access all the configuration menus and consult the parameters in this page
6. Protections and Advanced 7. Measures 8. Settings 9. Test 10. About
Figure 8
LEVEL 4 (MENUS and SUBMENUS) Selection of one of the level 3 menus accesses a set of submenus with the list of available options, which are organized into several levels through to details of the specific parameter. Each submenu has a command for returning to the previous menu (11); if the list contains more than five options, there is also a scroll bar (12) for full consultation.
Figure 9
To consult a parameter, it just needs to be selected. Consult the dedicated section for instructions on how to configure and save the parameters (page 48).
38 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 2 - Navigation
3 - Graphic pages
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Histograms The page displays the histograms of the current and voltage measurements acquired in real time and certain status information:
Figure 10
Pos. A
Description
Up to four information icons are available:
The letter corresponding to the active configuration is displayed if Adaptive
or
Protections package is present and with Dual Set enabled;
External power supply present (Vaux or through a service connector); the plug
or
icon indicates Vaux
Remote parameter writing configuration activre, modules Ekip Com connected, Vaux present
Bluetooth antenna state; four options available, see next chapter for details
Datalogger active
Histograms of the voltage and current measurements acquired in real time.
The bar of each signal is represented in scale 0 to 125 % with reference to the rated current and
voltage values of the, and can be of three colors:
B
· light blue: no protection in alarm status · yellow: one of the tripped protections is in prealarm status with respect to set thresholds
· red: one of the tripped protections is in alarm status with respect to set thresholds
NOTE: Histogram Ne is available with 4P or 3P + N configurations
C
Maximum phase current measured in real time
D
Maximum line-to-line voltage measured in real time
The Bluetooth icon changes, depending on the state of the antenna and the wireless communication:
Icon
Description
Antenna off or being powered (approx. two seconds from being enabled via the menu)
Antenna on but no device connected
Pairing in progress (Pairing command executed via menu)
External device connected to Trip unit
39 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 3 - Graphic pages
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Summary page
Press on the sides of the display (1) from the Home page to access further summary pages for certain measurements:
· Main measurements page: maximum phase current, maximum line-to-line voltage, power factor, total active/reactive/apparent powers
· Ekip Synchrocheck main measurements page (when module is present): Int and Ext frequencies and voltages, phase difference, synchronism status (page 45)
Figure 11
NOTE: both pages can be set as the main page by pressing HOME, holding it for five seconds and confirming the message on the display
Measuring instruments
Figure 12
Depending on the Trip unit model, certain measurements acquired in real time are shown on these pages by means of a pointer; each page displays a specific measurement:
Page 1 2 3 4 5
Measurement type page Maximum phase current Maximum line-to-line voltage Total active power Total reactive power Total apparent power
Unit of measurement/indicator A V kW kVAR kVA
The scale of values ranges from 0 to 125 % and refers to the rated values set (for powers: rated current x rated voltage x 3). Press on the sides of the display to browse the pages; quit the Measurement tools section with the HOME key. Page orientation (horizontal by default) can be changed in the Settings menu.
NOTE: each page can be set as the main page by pressing HOME, holding it for five seconds and confirming the message on the display
40 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 3 - Graphic pages
Measurements
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Figure 13
If provided for by Trip unit model, the Measurements pages contain a list of measurements acquired in real time, expressed in absolute value:
Page 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Name Current Voltage Active power Reactive power Apparent power Energy counters Power Controller Load shedding Ekip Signalling 3T
Measurements Currents: phase, earth fault, external/Rc earth fault Voltages: line-to-line, phase, neutral Phase and total active powers Phase and total reactive powers Phase and total apparent powers Total active, reactive and apparent energies Power Controller measurement summary, if installed Summary of Load Shedding measurements, if present Summary of Ekip Signalling 3T module measurements, if present
Ekip Touch configuration involves certain exceptions: · the Ne current measurements are available with 4P and 3P + N configurations · the phase voltage measurements are available with the 4P and 3P + active external neutral voltage
configuration · with the 3P configuration, pages: Active Power, Reactive Power and Apparent Power are replaced by the
Powers page with the total active, reactive and apparent power measurements · Ige/Rc current available with external sensor activated · Power Controller page available with Power Controller function activated · Load Shedding available with Load Shedding function activated Press the sides of the display to browse the pages; press the HOME key to quit.
NOTE: each page can be set as the main page by pressing HOME, holding it for five seconds and confirming the message on the display
41 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 3 - Graphic pages
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Diagnosis bar and Alarm list The Diagnosis bar lists the faults detected by the unit. It shows a detail of each alarm for about two seconds.
Figure 14
Select the bar to access the Alarm List page, with the list of alarms present.
Figure 15
NOTE: the Alarm List page also appears when the iTEST button is pressed in the cases provided for and described on page 36
Each signal is followed by an icon that identifies the type of alarm:
Icon
Alarm type
Alarm
Warning, error or prealarm
About
Timing due to tripped protection
The complete list of alarms is given on page 262.
42 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 3 - Graphic pages
4 - Menu
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Introduction Press Enter or ESC from the main page to access the different menus of the Trip unit.
The menus are the 4th level pages that can be dislpayed and comprise list of: · submenus · settable parameters · information and measurements · commands that can be executed Selection of each menu item enables: access to submenus, consultation of information in detail, configuration of a parameter, execution of a command.
Elements of each item The items in each list consist of:
· main name (white color) · additional description or set value (light blue color)
Figure 16
Protections Menu The Protections menu can be used to configure the following protections (1):
Name L S S2 I G (2) Gext (2) MDGF (2)
Parameters List and description in dedicated chapter List and description in dedicated chapter List and description in dedicated chapter List and description in dedicated chapter List and description in dedicated chapter List and description in dedicated chapter List and description in dedicated chapter
SW package
Page
53
54
Standard Protections 55
56
57
(3)
84
(4)
85
(1) if the Adaptive Protections package is available and Dual set has been activated, an intermediate menu where the set can be selected (Set A / Set B) will be available before the list of protections (2) available for LSIG versions (3) available if the presence of toroid S.G.R. has been activated previously (4) available if the presence of the MDGF toroid has been previously activated
43 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 4 - Menu
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Advanced menus The Advanced menu can be used to configure the following protections (1):
Name MCR 2I IU UV (2) OV (2) UV2 (2) OV2 (2) VU (2) S(V) (2) S2(V) (2) RV (2) UF (2) OF (2) UF2 (2) OF2 (2) RP (2) D (2) RQ (2) OQ (2) UP (2) OP (2) ROCOF (2) V DIR, VINV (2) 59 S1 (2) Warnings
Signallings
Functions Synchrocheck RC
Parameters
SW package
Page
List in dedicated chapter List in dedicated chapter List in dedicated chapter
58
Standard Protections
59
60
List in dedicated chapter
62
List in dedicated chapter
63
List in dedicated chapter
Voltage protections 63
List in dedicated chapter
64
List in dedicated chapter
64
List in dedicated chapter List in dedicated chapter List in dedicated chapter
65
Voltage Advanced protections
66
68
List in dedicated chapter
69
List in dedicated chapter List in dedicated chapter
Frequency
70
protections
70
List in dedicated chapter
71
List in dedicated chapter
72
List in dedicated chapter
73
List in dedicated chapter List in dedicated chapter
76 Power protections
75
List in dedicated chapter
76
List in dedicated chapter
75
List in dedicated chapter
ROCOF protections 78
List in dedicated chapter List in dedicated chapter VS Warning, FS Warning, FW1 Warning
142
Interface protections (IPS)
142
142
Threshold 1 I1, Threshold 2 I1, Threshold Iw1, Threshold Iw2, Phase Sequence (2), CosØ (3) Standard
92
Protections
External Trip, Trip Reset, Switch On SET B (4)
92
List in dedicated chapter
(5)
89
List in dedicated chapter
(6)
87
(1) if the Adaptive Protections package is available and Dual set has been activated, an intermediate menu where the set can be selected (Set A / Set B) will be available before the list of protections The only menu always present via Advanced is Functions (2) available if provided for by Trip unit model or if the relative SW package has been activated, where possible
(page 14) (3) CosØ available if provided for by Trip unit model or if the Power Protections package has been activated (4) SET B available when Adaptive Protections package is present (5) available when Ekip Synchrocheck is present (6) available when Rating Plug type Rc is installed in unit and when presence of toroid Rc has been previously activated in Settings menu
44 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 4 - Menu
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Measurements Menu
Menu Historicals Power factor (1) Frequency (1) Energy (1) Peak factor (1) Harmonic dist. Ekip Synchrocheck (2)
Network Analyzer (3)
Maintenance
Submenus
Description
Trip
Description in dedicated chapter
Events
List of events recorded
Measurements
List and description in dedicated chapter
-
Power factor measurement
-
Frequency measured
Energy counters
Measurement of energies
Reset counters
Meter reset command
Energy RESET
List and description in dedicated chapter
-
Peak factor of each phase
-
Activation command for current harmonic distortion monitoring
-
Description in dedicated chapter
V Sequences
3s V Sequences THD Current THD Voltages Counters
Measurements associated with Network Analyzer function: list and description in dedicated chapter
Waveforms
Contact Wear
LastServiceContactWear
Installation
Installation and maintenance dates and commands
Last Maintenance
Service RESET
Page 111 111 111 114 114 114 114 114 61 227
120
130
(1) available if provided for by Trip unit model or if SW Measuring Measurements package has been activated (2) available when Ekip Synchrocheck module is present (3) available if provided for by Trip unit model or if Network Analyzer SW package has been activated
45 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 4 - Menu
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Settings Menu
Menu
Submenus
Enable (5) Bluetooth Low Energy
-
Configuration
Hardware Trip
Circuit Breaker
T Protection Neutral Protection (2)
Earth protection (7)
Installation
Main Frequency
-
Phase Sequence
-
Local/Remote
Modules
Local Bus Modul x (3)
Functions
Monitor time
-
Test Bus
-
Power Controller (4)
Enable (5) -
Load Shedding (4)
Enable (5) -
Network Analyzer (6)
Enable (5) -
Datalogger (6)
Enable (5) -
Dual Set (6)
Enable (5) Default set
Date
System
Time Language
New PIN
View
-
Description and parameters
Page
Enabling and configuration of Bluetooth Low Energy communication
128
Phase number selection
127
Protection activation command
Protection activation command
61
Enable, Neutral threshold
External sensor configuration
129
Installation of modules
47
Grid frequency configuration
127
Phase sequence configuration
64
Parameter writing configuration
Configuration of local bus presence 128
Details in chapters of each module
Switch On LOCAL, Signalling RESET
Measuring range configuration
112
Test bus activation
130
Function enabling and parameters: see details in dedicated chapter
139
Function enabling and parameters: see details in dedicated chapter
139
Function enabling and parameters: see details in dedicated chapter
120
Function enabling and parameters: see details in dedicated chapter
118
Function enabling and parameters: see details in dedicated chapter
79
Configuration of unit date
Configuration of unit time 130
Configuration of menu language
PIN Configuration
Representation parameters of menus
and measurements: see details in dedicated chapter
130
Functions Maintenance
YO Command YC Command Alarms
Function, Delay
89
Activation of maintenance signals
113
(1) with CB in 3P configuration (2) available with CB in 4P or 3P with neutral configuration (3) the menu populates with the list of accessory modules detected by the unit with Local Bus activated and in
the envisaged connection and supply conditions (4) available if the function has been installed in the Trip unit (5) additions are only made to the list of the specific submenu when the function is enabled (=On) (6) available if provided for by Trip unit model or if relative SW package has been activated (7) available with LSIG versions
46 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 4 - Menu
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Installation menu If Ekip Touch detects that Rating Plug or Measurement module have not been installed properly, it signals an alarm (page 262) and completes Settings menu with the specific installation section:
Menu Circuit Breaker
Submenus 1 Installation
Submenus 2 Rating Plug Ekip Measuring
Commands Install Install
Correct installation is confirmed by a message on the display and disappearance of the alarm signal and installation menu.
NOTE: availability of submenus depends on the module, which appears to have not been installed
Test Menu
Menu Autotest Trip Test Test CB Ekip Signalling 4K (1)
Ekip Signalling 2K (1)
ZoneSelectivity (2) Rc Test (5)
Submenus Ekip Signalling 2K-1 (1) Ekip Signalling 2K-2 (1) Ekip Signalling 2K-3 (1) S Protection (3) G Protection (4) -
Description, parameters and Commands Autotest command TRIP command Close CB, Open CB Module autotest command
Module autotest command
Input, Force Output, Release Output Test instructions
(1) available if one or more Ekip Signalling modules are connected and detected by Ekip Touch (2) available if Ekip Touch is on with auxiliary supply (3) available with S and/or S2 and/or D protection enabled, for S protection the set curve must be t=k (4) available with G and/or Gext and/or MDGF and/or D protection enabled and curve t=k (5) available with Rating Plug and Rc toroid present
About Menu Menu Protection Unit
Circuit Breaker
IEC61557-12 (1) Feature Collection Modules Power Controller (3) Load shedding (3)
Submenus -
-
Modul x (2) Load Input Status Load Active Load Input Status Load Active
Information provided Information about Ekip Touch: Mainboard serial number, Trip unit serial number, type, version, standard, SW version, date and time, language
CB information: TAG name, CB name, rated current, number of poles, CB status and position, total operations, CB serial number
Status of 1% measurements (from Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package), serial number of assembly and current sensors connected
List of tripped protections in Trip unit
Module information: serial number, SW version, status of inputs/outputs/contacts (if present)
Status of loads (open/closed)
Load configuration (activated/not activated)
Status of loads (open/closed)
Load configuration (activated/not activated)
(1) available if Class 1 Power & Energy Metering SW package is provided for by Trip unit module or if it has been previously activated (2) available if one or more modules are connected and detected by unit (3) available if function has been installed and enabled in Trip unit
47 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 4 - Menu
5 - Changing parameters and commands
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Changing parameters Comply with the following procedure to change one or more parameters:
IMPORTANT: parameters can be changed with Trip unit in the Local mode and in the absence of timing alarms
1. Select parameter and enter PIN if required 2. Select new value from list or with the aid of page commands 3. Select Confirm command if present:
Figure 17
4. When the new value has been selected/confirmed, the menu of the parameter is accessed automatically, the changed item presents the new value in light blue and a tick to confirm:
Figure 18
Now proceed by confirming the programming (Step 5) and make further changes (Step 1).
or access other parameters
Select the arrow at the top left to access the top menu until the Programming page appears:
Figure 19
6. Various commands are enabled in the programming page: · Confirm to validate the new parameters and conclude the programming procedure · Abort to interrupt the save data process · Modify to go back to the menus and change the parameter or others
Figure 20 48 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 5 - Changing parameters and commands
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Commands Selection of a command implies its immediate execution or opening of an intermediate confirm window. Correct execution is indicated by a confirm window, which disappears automatically from the display. Certain commands, selection of which immediately activates the respective test sequences without any confirm window, are an exception to this rule: · Auto Test · Ekip Signalling 2K module commands IMPORTANT: confirmation on the display refers to launching the command, not to verification of the operation required, which is at the user's charge whichever type of command is concerned: reset parameters, display, open/close contacts
Exceptions
Before validating a change to a parameter, the Trip unit checks all its parameters to make sure there is no conflict or incorrect condition:
· if the Trip unit detects an incorrect condition, the relative details appear on the display and parameter modification is annulled.
Before executing a command, the Trip unit checks all its parameters to ensure there is no conflict or incorrect condition:
· if the Trip unit detects an incorrect condition, the relative details appear on the display and command execution is annulled.
WARNING! aborting the programming affects all the parameters modified during the same session
49 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 5 - Changing parameters and commands
6 - PIN and security
Safety
ABB | SACE Emax 2
WARNING! the user is responsible for security against unauthorized access and modification: configure all Trip unit access points (display menu and, if present,
Ekip Connect and remote communication systems) using the access PIN and controlled and authorized connection systems
Function The PIN code enables access to certain areas of the Trip unit and prevents unintentional setting errors from being entered via the display. However, parameters can still be modified without having to enter the PIN via: · service connector, using Ekip T&P or Ekip Programming and the Ekip Connect application · bus, in the presence of Ekip Com modules and with Trip unit configured as Remote (page 129). To ensure your unit is in secure conditions, the Wizard window immediate asks you to change the PIN code on first power up; this is strongly recommended by ABB.
Description The PIN code is a number formed by five digits, each of which can be given a value from 0 to 9; the default value is: 00001 and can be changed in the Settings-New PIN menu. The PIN code must be entered to: · change a parameter (including the PIN code itself) · access the Test menu Once the PIN code has been entered, all menus can be browsed for two minutes: once two minutes have elapsed, the PIN code must be entered again (depending on the case in question).
NOTE: the PIN code must also be entered again if a programming session has been annulled (page 48).
Entry The following page will appear when the PIN code is requested: change (1) and confirm (2) each digit to complete the entry process.
Figure 21
NOTE: · if the PIN is wrong, "Wrong PIN" will appear for three seconds after which the entry page will be displayed again; use the command at the top left to quit · there is no limit to the number of wrong PIN that can be entered
Disabling The PIN code can be disabled by entering its value as: 00000; In this case, the PIN is only required to change the PIN itself in the Settings menu.
Recovery if the PIN code is lost, consult document 1SDH001501R0002, available in the ABB website, or contact ABB directly.
50 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 6 - PIN and security
Ekip Touch - Protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - Protections - Introduction
Operating principle The protection functions are available with all Ekip Touch models and versions.
Each protection is associated with a different signal (current, voltages, frequencies, powers, etc) but the operating principle is the same:
1. If the signal measured exceeds the set threshold, the specific protection activates (prealarm and/or alarm).
2. The alarm appears on the display and, after a period of time (timing t t), depending on the protection parameters set, can convert into a trip command (TRIP) transmitted to the internal Trip coil of the CB.
NOTE:
· if the signal measured drops below the set threshold before the trip time has elapsed, Ekip Touch quits the alarm and/or timing status and returns to the normal operating condition
· all protections have a default configuration: check the parameters and change to suit the installation requirements before putting into service
References Many of the protection thresholds are displayed in two different quantities: absolute value and relative value. The relative value depends on the type of measurement:
Type of protection Current Voltage Frequency Power
Reference In Un fn Sn
Description Nominal current of the Rating plug Line-to-line voltage setting Frequency setting 3 x In x Un
Protections packages The protections described in the following chapters are grouped into packages, the availability of which depends on the model and version of the Trip unit, and on their ability to be installed as additional package:
Package Standard Protections Voltage protections Voltage Advanced protections Frequency protections Power protections Adaptive protections
Page 52 62 65 69 72 79
51 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 1 - Protections - Introduction
2 - Standard Protections
List The Standard protections available for all Ekip Touch models, are:
Name
Type of protection
L
Overload with inverse long-time delay
S
Selective short-circuit
S2 (2)
Short-circuit with adjustable delay
I
Instantaneous short-circuit
G (1)
Earth fault with adjustable delay
MCR
Instantaneous short-circuit on circuit-breaker closing
2I
Instantaneous short-circuit programmable
IU
Current unbalance
Neutral
Different protection on neutral phase
Harmonic distortion Distorted waveforms
T
Abnormal temperatures
Hardware Trip
Internal connection errors
(1) not available with LSI version of Ekip Touch (2) not available with Ekip G Touch
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Page 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 60 61 61 61
52 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
L Protection Function
t I1
If the current of one or more phases exceeds threshold I1, the protection trips and, after a time established
by the value read and by the parameter settings, transmits the TRIP command.
L
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
· the summary table of the protections with the calculation formulas (page 92)
t1
· the graph with trip curve (from page 95)
Parameters
I Parameter Curve
Threshold I1 Time t1 Thermal memory
Description
Default
Establishes curve dynamics and trip time calculation: · t = k / I 2 according to IEC 60947-2. · IEC 60255-151 SI · IEC 60255-151 VI · IEC 60255-151 EI · t = k / I 4 according to 60255-151
t = k/I 2
Establishes the value that activates the protection and contributes
towards calculating the trip time. The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and
1 In
can be set within the range: 0.4 In to 1 In, in 0.001 In steps
Contributes towards calculating the trip time. The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 3 s .. 144 s, in 1 s steps
144 s
Activates/deactivates the thermal memory function (page 80)
NOTE:the function is available with curve t=k/I 2
OFF
Prealarm I1
Warns that the measured current is near to protection activation threshold I1. The value is given in percentage of threshold I1 and can be set within the range: 50% I1 to 90% I1, in 1% steps.
NOTE: the prealarm condition deactivates in two cases: · current lower than prealarm threshold I1 · current higher than threshold I1
90 % I1
Limitations and additional functions
· threshold I1 must be lower than threshold I2 (if S protection is activated) · the trip time of the protection is forcibly set at 1 s if the calculation results give a lower theoretical value
and/or if the current reading is more than 12 In · with CB in UL standard configuration, the only available curve is t = k/I 2
53 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
S Protection Function
t I2
If the current of one or more phases exceeds threshold I2, the protection trips and, after a time established
by the value read and by the parameter settings, transmits the TRIP command.
S
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
· the summary table of the protections with the calculation formulas (page 92)
t2
· the graph with trip curve (page 98)
Parameters
I Parameter Enable Trip Enable Curve
Threshold I2
Time t2 Thermal memory
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu.
OFF
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command. if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as ON information.
Establishes curve dynamics and the threshold or trip time calculation:
· t = k: fixed time trip
t = k
· t = k/I 2: inverse time-delay dynamic trip
Establishes the value that activates the protection and contributes
towards calculating the trip time. The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and
4 In
can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
It is the trip time or contributes towards timing calculation, depending on the type of curve selected. The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.05 s to 0.8 s, in 0.01 s steps
0,05 s
Activates/deactivates the thermal memory function (page 80)
NOTE:the function is only available with curve t=k/I 2
OFF
Activates/deactivates the function and selectivity time availability on
ZoneSelectivity
the display (page 80) NOTE:the function is only available with curve t=k
OFF
Selectivity time StartUp enable StartUp Threshold
StartUp Time
This is the trip time of the protection with the zone selectivity function activated and selectivity input not present (page 80) The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.04 s to 0.2 s, in 0.01 s steps
0,04 s
Activates/deactivates the function and availability of the associated parameters on the display (page 83)
OFF
Protection threshold valid during Startup time, in the conditions in
which the function is activated (page 83) The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and
0,6 In
can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
This is the time for which the StartUp threshold remains activated and
is calculated from the moment the activation Threshold is exceeded
(page 83)
0.1 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to
30 s, in 0.01 s steps
Limitations and additional functions
· threshold I2 must be higher than threshold I1 (if S protection is activated) · in the presence of curve t= k/I 2, the protection trip time is forced to t2 if the calculation results give a
theoretical value lower than t2 itself · the block functions and type of selectivity can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via
Ekip Connect) or communication via system bus (page 80) · with CB in UL standard configuration, the maximum value of t2 is 400 ms
54 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
S2 Protection Function
t I5
S2 protection functions in the same way as S protection: if the current of one or more phases exceeds
threshold I5 for longer than time t5, the protection activates and sends a TRIP command. S2
NOTE: unlike S protection, S2 protection only has one fixed time trip curve and has no thermal
memory
t5 It is independent of S protection, thus thresholds and functions of the two protections can be programmed so as to take advantage of different plant solutions (example: signaling with S and open command with S2 or
I vice versa, or both S and S2 for signaling or tripping).
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
· the summary table of the protections with the calculation formulas (page 92) · the graph with trip curve (page 98)
Parameter Enable Trip Enable
Threshold I5
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu.
OFF
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command. if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as ON information.
Establishes the value that activates the protection and contributes
towards calculating the trip time. The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and
4 In
can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
Time t5
This is the trip time of the protection. The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.05 s 0,05 s to 0.8 s, in 0.01 s steps
Activates/deactivates the function and selectivity time availability on
the display (page 80)
ZoneSelectivity
NOTE: if both S and S2 selectivities are activated, the input and output are shared with the OR function; to stimulate inputs and
OFF
outputs, it is sufficient for even only one of the two to be
activated
Selectivity time
This is the trip time of the protection with the zone selectivity function activated and selectivity input not present (page 80) The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.04 s to 0.2 s, in 0.01 s steps
0,04 s
StartUp enable StartUp Threshold
StartUp Time
Activates/deactivates the function and availability of the associated parameters on the display (page 83)
OFF
Protection threshold valid during Startup time, in the conditions in
which the function is activated (page 83) The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and
4 In
can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
This is the time for which the StartUp threshold remains activated and
is calculated from the moment the activation Threshold is exceeded
(page 83)
0.1 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to
30 s, in 0.01 s steps
Limitations and additional functions
· threshold I5 must be higher than threshold I1 (if S2 protection is activated) · the block functions and type of selectivity can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via
Ekip Connect) or communication via system bus (page 82) · with CB in UL standard configuration, the maximum value of t5 is 400 ms
55 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
I Protection Function
t I3
If the current of one or more phases exceeds threshold I3, the protection trips and, after a non-programmable
fixed time, transmits the TRIP command.
I
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
· summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 92)
· the graph with trip curve (page 99)
Parameters
I Parameter Enable
Threshold I3
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu.
ON
Establishes the value that activates the protection. The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and 4 In can be set within the range: 1.5 In to 15 In, in 0.1 In steps
ZoneSelectivity StartUp enable StartUp Threshold
StartUp Time
Activates/deactivates the function
OFF
Activates/deactivates the function and availability of the associated parameters on the display (page 82)
OFF
Protection threshold valid during Startup time, in the conditions in
which the function is activated (page 82) The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and
1,5 In
can be set within the range: 1.5 In to 15 In, in 0.1 In steps
This is the time for which the StartUp threshold remains activated and
is calculated from the moment the activation Threshold is exceeded
(page 82)
0.1 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to
30 s, in 0.01 s steps
Limitations and additional functions
· threshold I3 must be higher than threshold I2 (if S and I protections are activated) · I protection can be activated with MCR protection disabled · the block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or
communication via system bus (page 83)
56 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
G Protection Function
t I4
Ekip Touch calculates the vector sum of the phase currents (L1, L2, L3, Ne) and obtains the internal earth
fault current (Ig): if current Ig exceeds threshold I4, the protection trips and, after a time established by the
G value read and by the parameter settings, transmits the TRIP command.
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
t4
· the summary table of the protections with the calculation formulas (page 92)
· the graph with trip curve (page 100)
I Parameters
Parameter Description
Default
Enable
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu.
OFF
Trip Enable
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command. if disabled,
the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as
ON
information.
Curve
Establishes curve dynamics and the threshold or trip time calculation:
· t = k: fixed time trip
t = k
· t = k/I 2: inverse time-delay dynamic trip
Threshold I4
Establishes the value that activates the protection and contributes towards calculating the trip time. The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and can be set within the range: 0.1 In to 1 In, in 0.001 In steps
0,2 In
Time t4
It is the trip time or contributes towards timing calculation, depending on
the type of curve selected.
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to 1
s, in 0.05 s steps
0,4 s
NOTE: in the presence of curve: t = k, t4 can also be configured as:
instantaneous; in this mode, the trip time is comparable to that
given for I protection (page 92)
Prealarm I4
Warns that the measured current is near to the protection activation
threshold.
The value is given in percentage of threshold I1 and can be set within the
range 50% I4 to 90% I4, in 1% steps.
90 % I4
The prealarm condition deactivates in two cases:
· current lower than prealarm threshold I4
· current higher than threshold I4
Activates/deactivates the function and selectivity time availability on the
ZoneSelectivity
display (page 80) NOTE: the function is only available with curve t = k
OFF
Selectivity time StartUp enable StartUp Threshold
StartUp Time
This is the trip time of the protection with the zone selectivity function activated and selectivity input not present (page 80) The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.04 s to 0.2 s, in 0.01 s steps
0,04 s
Activates/deactivates the function and availability of the associated parameters on the display (page 83)
OFF
Protection threshold valid during Startup time, in the conditions in which the function is activated (page 83) The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and can be set within the range: 0.2 In to 1 In, in 0.1 In steps
0,2 In
This is the time for which the StartUp threshold remains activated, as
calculated from the moment the activation Threshold is exceeded (page
83)
0.1 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to 30
s, in 0.01 s steps
Continued on the next page
57 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Limitations and additional functions
· in the presence of curve t= k/I 2, the protection trip time is forced to t4 if the calculation results give a theoretical value lower than t4 itself
· in the absence of Vaux, the minimum threshold is 0.3 In (for In <= 100 A), 0,25 In (for In <= 400 A) or 0.2 In (for all the other sizes); if lower values are set, the Trip unit forces the threshold to the minimum admissible value and the "Configuration" error appears
· depending on the I4 threshold setting, the protection deactivates for an Ig higher than: 8 In with threshold I4 0.8 In; 6 In with 0.8 In > I4 0.5 In; 4 In with 0,5 In > I4 0,2 In; 2 In with I4 > 0.2 In
· with t4=instantaneous operation is guaranteed in the presence of Vaux; in self-supply mode, the Trip unit forces the time to 100 ms and the "Configuration" error appears
· the block functions and type of selectivity can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or communication via system bus (page 80)
· with CB in UL standard configuration, some parameters have different maximum values: I4 maximum = 1200A, Startup maximum = 1200A, t4 maximum = 400ms
Protection MCR Function
t I3
The protection remains activated for a time interval running from the open - closed change of status of the CB, after which it deactivates. MCR If, during this time interval, the current of one or more phases exceeds threshold I3, the protection transmits the TRIP command after a non-programmable fixed time.
The MCR protection only functions with Vaux or with supply via the Measurement enabler with voltage sockets module.
I To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult: · summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 92) · the graph with trip curve (page 99)
NOTE: to activate MCR, protection I must be disabled
Parameter Enable Threshold I3
Monitor Time
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu.
OFF
Establishes the value that activates the protection. The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and 6 In can be set within the range: 1.5 In to 15 In, in 0.1 In steps
Defines the time interval in which the MCR protection remains activated, as calculated from the open - closed change of status The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.04 s to 0.5 s, in 0.01 s steps
0,04 s
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or communication via system bus (page 80)
58 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
2I Protection Function
t I31
If the current of one or more phases exceeds threshold I31 and a trip event is present, the protection
transmits the TRIP command after a non-programmable fixed time.
2I
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
· summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 92)
· the graph with trip curve (page 99)
Parameter I Enable
Description
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu.
Default OFF
Threshold I31
Establishes the value that activates the protection. The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and 1,5 In can be set within the range: 1.5 In to 15 In, in 0.1 In steps
Protection enabling makes the 2I Mode section available in the Advanced - Functions menu, where the protection activation event can be configured:
Parameter Activation Function
Delay
Description
Default
Two alternative modes are available: · Dependent function: the protection is activated if the programmed activation event has occurred; this configuration makes the function and delay parameters available · Activated: the protection is always activated
Dependent function
The activation event between the input contacts of Ekip Signalling 2K,
the statuses of the unit (open/closed) and the Custom function can be
selected NOTE: Ekip Connect allows the Custom function to be
Disabled
customized so as to associate the activation event with up to
eight statuses in AND or OR configuration
Protection activation delay calculated from the presence of the
activation event onwards.
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0 s to 100 s, in 0.1 s steps
0 s
NOTE: the protection trips if the event is present for longer than
the set time lag
RELT - Ekip signalling 2K-3 If the RELT module is present a dedicated command (RELT Wizard) will be displayed. This will program the 2I protection and other related parameters; for details see page 220. Commands by remote control Two further temporary protection activation/deactivation commands are available when the unit is connected to one or more Ekip Com modules: · 2I ON Mode: activates the protection · 2I OFF Mode: deactivates the protection For further details consult the document 1SDH001140R0001.
NOTE: if the protection has been activated by command 2I ON Mode, it is deactivated by command 2I OFF Mode or when the unit shuts down
Signallings When protection 2I is activated, the message "2I active" appears in the diagnostic bar and in the Alarm List page, and the alarm led will be on steady.
59 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
IU Protection Function
t I6
The protection trips if the current readings are unbalanced; the protection sends a TRIP command if the
detected unbalance exceeds threshold I6 for longer than t6.
IU
The protection is automatically self-excluding in two cases:
· the measurement of at least one current exceeds 6 In
t6
· the maximum current among all the phases is less than 0.3 In
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
I · summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 92) · the graph with trip curve (page 102)
Parameters
Parameter Enable Trip Enable
Version
Threshold I6 Time t6
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu OFF
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
OFF
Allows the unbalance calculation mode to be selected:
· Old: % Sbil = 100 x (I max - I min) / I max · New: % Sbil = 100 x (max I mi) / I mi
NOTE:max I mi: maximum deviation among the measured currents, calculated by comparing each current with the mean value;
I mi: mean value of the current readings
Establishes the unbalance value that trips the protection.
Unbalance is given in percentage value within the range: 2% to 90% with 1%
steps.
Old 50 %
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0.5 s to 60 s, in 0.5 s steps
5 s
Neutral Protection Function
Neutral protection characterizes protections L, S and I differently on the neutral phase by introducing a different control factor from the other phases.
The protection is available with the 4P and 3P + N configuration; the configuration parameters can be accessed via the Settings menu (page 46).
Parameters
Parameter Enable
Neutral threshold
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection
OFF
Defines the multiplicative factor applied to the trip thresholds and curves of the protections for the current read on phase Ne:
· 50 %: lowest trip thresholds for the neutral current · 100 %: same trip thresholds for all phases · 150 %: highest trip thresholds for the neutral current · 200 %: highest trip thresholds for the neutral current
50 %
Limitations and additional functions
Ekip Touch rejects modification of thresholds I1 and InN in the absence of the following limitation: (I1 x InN) Iu · I1 is the threshold of L protection in Amperes (example: In= 400 A and I1= 0.6 becomes I1= 240 A) · InN is the neutral threshold expressed as multiplicative factor (example: InN= 200% becomes InN= 2) · Iu is the size of the CB
WARNING! With 150% and 200% threshold; if the measured neutral current exceeds 16In, the Trip unit resets the protection to 100% by itself
60 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Harmonic Distortion Protection Allows an alarm to be activated in the case of distorted wavefoms. The protection can be enabled in the Measurements menu; if enabled an alarm is activated (page 45). IMPORTANT: the protection does not handle the trip, just the signal
T Protection T protection protects against abnormal temperatures measured and transmitted to the sensor inside the unit; temperature verification is always active and includes three operating states:
State Standard Warnings
Alarm
Temperature range [°C] -25 < t < 70 -40 < t < -25 or 70 < t < 85
t < -40 or t > 85
Ekip Touch actions Normal operation; display state depending on type (1) Warning led @ 0.5 Hz; display state depending on type (1)
Display off; Alarm and Warning leds @ 2 Hz; TRIP if Trip enable is activated
(1) with Ekip Touch, the display remains on within range: -20°C / +70°C; with Ekip LCD, the display remains on within range: -30°C / +80°C All protections enabled in the unit are active in all operating states.
The Trip Enabling parameter can be enabled in the Settings - Circuit breaker menu in order to handle an open command if an alarm occurs (page 46).
Hardware Trip Protection Hardware Trip protects against connection errors in Ekip Touch and is available in the Settings - Circuit breaker - Hardware Trip menu (page 45).
If enabled, with the CB closed, if one or more of these events are detected: · current sensors disconnected (phase or external if enabled) · Rating Plug disconnected. · Trip Coil disconnected · faults inside the unit the alarm is signaled and a TRIP command is transmitted.
IMPORTANT:
· the protection trips if the error statuses persist for more than one second · the signal is activated in the case of an alarm due to Trip coil disconnection and, in the presence
of Vaux, output YO is commanded until the Trip unit detects the CB Open state (make sure that YO, Ekip Actuator, YO coil supply are present)
61 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
3 - Voltage protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
List The Voltage protections, available by default for Ekip Hi-Touch, Ekip G Touch, Ekip G-Hi Touch models and configurable in the remaining models as additional SW package, are:
Name UV OV UV2 (1) OV2 (1) Phase Sequence VU
Type of protection Minimum voltage Maximum voltage Minimum voltage Maximum voltage Phase sequence error Voltage unbalance
Page 62 63 63 64 64 64
(1) protections UV2 and OV2 are not available by default with Ekip G Touch. However, they can be integrated by requesting the relative SW package
UV Protection Function
t U8
t8
The protection sends a TRIP command if one or more line-to-line voltages detected by the unit drop below threshold U8 for longer than t8. UV To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
· summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93) · the graph with trip curve (page 102)
Parameters
v Parameter Description
Enable
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
Default OFF
Trip Enable
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
OFF
Establishes the value that activates the protection. Threshold U8 The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) and 0,9 Un
can be set within the range: 0.05 Un to 1 Un in 0.001 Un steps
Time t8
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0.05 s to 120 s, in 0.01 s steps
5 s
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by connection to the system bus (page 83).
62 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 3 - Voltage protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
OV Protection Function
The protection sends a TRIP command if one or more line-to-line voltages detected by the unit exceed
t
threshold U9 for longer than t9.
U9
OV To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
· summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
t9
· the graph with trip curve (page 103)
Parameters
V Parameter Description
Enable
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
Default OFF
Trip Enable
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
OFF
Establishes the value that activates the protection. Threshold U9 The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) and 1,05 Un
can be set within the range: 1 Un to 1.5 Un in 0.001 Un steps
Time t9
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0.05 s to 120 s, in 0.01 s steps
5 s
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by connection to the system bus (page 80).
UV2 Protection Function
t U15
t15
UV2
v
UV2 protection functions in the same way as UV protection: the protection sends a TRIP command if one or more line-to-line voltages detected by the unit drop below threshold U15 for longer than t15.
It is independent of UV protection, thus thresholds and functions of the two protections can be programmed so as to take advantage of different plant solutions (example: signaling with UV and open command with UV2 or vice versa, or both for signaling or tripping).
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult: · summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93) · the graph with trip curve (page 102) Parameters
Parameter Enable
Trip Enable
Threshold U15
Time t15
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
OFF
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
OFF
Establishes the value that activates the protection. The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) and 0,9 Un can be set within the range: 0.05 Un to 1 Un in 0.001 Un steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0.05 s to 120 s, in 0.01 s steps
5 s
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by connection to the system bus (page 80).
63 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 3 - Voltage protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
OV2 Protection Function
OV2 protection functions in the same way as OV protection: the protection sends a TRIP command if one or
t
more line-to-line voltages detected by the unit exceed threshold U16 for longer than t16.
U16 OV2 To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
· summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
t16
· the graph with trip curve (page 103)
Parameters
V Parameter Description
Default
Enable
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
OFF
Trip Enable
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
OFF
Threshold U16
Establishes the value that activates the protection. The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) and 1,05 Un can be set within the range: 1 Un to 1.5 Un in 0.001 Un steps
Time t16
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0.05 s to 120 s, in 0.01 s steps
5 s
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by connection to the system bus (page 83).
Phase sequence protection The Phase Sequence protection enables an alarm to be activated when the sequence of line-to-line voltages is not aligned with the sequence set by the user.
The required sequence can be set in the Settings menu and the protection activated in the Advanced menu (page 46 and page 44).
VU Protection Function
The protection trips if the line-to-line voltages read by the unit are unbalanced; the protection sends a TRIP
t
command if the detected unbalance exceeds threshold U14 for longer than t14.
U14 VU
The protection excludes itself if the maximum value of the line-to-line voltage is less than 0.3 Un
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
t14
· summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
· the graph with trip curve (page 103)
V Parameters
Parameter Enable Trip Enable
Threshold U14
Time t14
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
OFF
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
OFF
Establishes the unbalance value that trips the protection.
Unbalance is expressed in percentage value and is calculated in the
following way: % Unba = 100 x (max U mi) / U mi in range: 2% to 90% in 1%
steps.
50 %
NOTE: max U mi : maximum deviation among the three voltages calculated by comparing each line-to-line voltage with the mean value;
U mi : mean value of the line-to-line voltages
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0.5 s to 60 s, in 0.5 s steps
5 s
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by connection to the system bus (page 83).
64 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 3 - Voltage protections
4 - Voltage Advanced protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
List The Advanced Voltage protections, available by default for the Ekip G Touch and Ekip G Hi-Touch models and configurable in the remaining models as additional SW package, are:
Name S(V) S2(V) (1) RV
Type of protection Short-circuit with voltammetric control Short-circuit with voltammetric control Residual voltage
Page 65 66 68
(1) S2(V) protection is not available by default with Ekip G Touch. However, it can be integrated by requesting the relative SW package
S(V) Protection Function
S(V) protection protects against short circuits, with a threshold sensitive to the value of the voltage.
t
If the current of one or more phases exceeds threshold I20 for longer than time t20, the protection activates
I20
S(V)
and sends a TRIP command.
Threshold I20, after a voltage drop, varies in two different modes:
t20
· Step provides for a stepped variation, depending on parameters Ul and Ks.
· Lin (linear) provides for a dynamic variation, depending on parameters Ul, Uh and Ks.
I
I
I
I20
I20
Ks x I20
Ks x I20
Figure 22
Ul
V
UI
Uh V
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult: · the summary table of the protections with the calculation formulas (page 93) · the graph with trip curve (page 104) Parameters
Parameter Enable
Trip Enable Curve
Threshold I20
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
OFF
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF information
Allows the operating mode, Step or Lin, to be selected
Scal
Establishes the value that activates the protection and contributes
towards calculating the trip time. The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value
1 In
(In) and can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
Continued on the next page
65 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 4 - Voltage Advanced protections
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Parameter Threshold Ul
Threshold Uh
Threshold Ks Time t20
Description
Default
This is the voltage that determines the change in trip threshold I20;
the behavior differs, depending on the mode selected (1) The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un)
1 Un
and can be set within the range: 0.2 Un to 1 Un in 0.01 Un steps
The parameter is shown by the Lin curve and contributes towards I20
trip threshold calculation:
· with voltage reading < Uh (and Ul), the threshold changes
gradually (1)
1 Un
· with voltage reading Uh, the threshold is I20
The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un)
and can be set within the range: 0.2 Un to 1 Un in 0.01 Un steps
I20 threshold calculation constant. The value is given as percentage of threshold I20 and can be set within the range: 0.1 I20 to 1 I20, in 0.01 steps
0,6 I20
This is the trip time of the protection. The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.05 s 0.1 s to 30 s, in 0.01 s steps
(1) Trip threshold (depending on the operating curve)
Mode Scal
Voltage reading < UI UI
Trip threshold Ks x I20 I20
< UI Lin
Ul (e < Uh)
Ks x I20 ((I20 x ( 1 - Ks ) x ( U mis - Uh ) ) / (Uh - Ul) ) + I20
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by connection to the system bus (page 83).
S(V) Protection Function
S2(V) protection functions in the same way as S(V) protection and protects against short-circuits, with
t
threshold sensitive to the voltage value.
I21
S2(V)
It is independent of S(V) protection, thus thresholds and functions of the two protections can be programmed
so as to take advantage of different plant solutions (example: signaling with S(V) and open command with
t21
S2(V) or vice versa, or both S(V) and S2(V) for signaling or tripping).
If the current of one or more phases exceeds threshold I21 for longer than time t21, the protection activates
I and sends a TRIP command.
Threshold I21, after a voltage drop, varies in two different modes:
· Step provides for a stepped variation, depending on parameters Ul2 and Ks2. · Lin (linear) provides for a dynamic variation, depending on parameters Ul2, Uh2 and Ks2.
I
I
I21
I21
Ks2 x I21
Ks2 x I21
Ul2 V
Ul2
Uh2 V
Figure 23
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
· the summary table of the protections with the calculation formulas (page 93) · the graph with trip curve (page 104)
Continued on the next page
66 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 4 - Voltage Advanced protections
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Parameters
Parameter Enable Trip Enable Curve Threshold I21
Threshold Ul2
Threshold Uh2
Threshold Ks2 Time t20
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
OFF
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF information
Allows the operating mode, Step or Lin, to be selected
Scal
Establishes the value that activates the protection and contributes
towards calculating the trip time. The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value
1 In
(In) and can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
It is the voltage that determines the change in trip threshold I21; the
behavior differs, depending on the mode selected (1) The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un)
1 Un
and can be set within the range: 0.2 Un to 1 Un in 0.01 Un steps
The parameter is shown by the Lin curve and contributes towards I21
trip threshold calculation:
· with voltage reading < Uh2 (and Ul2), the threshold changes
gradually (1)
1 Un
· with voltage reading Uh2, the threshold is I21
The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un)
and can be set within the range: 0.2 Un to 1 Un in 0.01 Un steps
I21 threshold calculation constant. The value is given as percentage of threshold I21 and can be set within the range: 0.1 I21 to 1 I21, in 0.01 steps
0,6 I21
This is the trip time of the protection. The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.05 s 0.1 s to 30 s, in 0.01 s steps
(1) Trip threshold (depending on the operating curve)
Mode Scal
Lin
Voltage reading < UI2 UI2 < UIs Ul2 (e < Uh2)
Trip threshold Ks2 x I21 I21 Ks2 x I21 ((I21 x ( 1 - Ks2 ) x ( U mis - Uh2 ) ) / (Uh2 - Ul2) ) + I21
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by connection to the system bus (page 83).
67 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 4 - Voltage Advanced protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
RV Protection Function
The protection trips if loss of insulation occurs (verification of residual voltage U0); the protection sends a
t
TRIP command if voltage U0 exceeds threshold U22 for longer than t2.
U22 RV
The protection is always available in the 4P configuration.
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
t22
· summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
· the graph with trip curve (page 104)
V Parameters
Parameter Enable Trip Enable Threshold U22 Time t22
Reset Time
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
OFF
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF information
Establishes the value that activates the protection. The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) 0,15 Un and can be set within the range: 0.05 Un to 0.5 Un in 0.001 Un steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0.05 s to 120 s, in 0.01 s steps
15 s
This is the time the alarm is retained after the protection has quit the
alarm condition; it can be useful for keeping the timing activated when
the protection is temporarily deactivated.
0 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0 s to
0.2 s, in 0.02 s steps
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by connection to the system bus (page 83).
68 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 4 - Voltage Advanced protections
5 - Frequency protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
List The Frequency protections, available by default for Ekip Hi-Touch, Ekip G Touch, Ekip G-Hi Touch models and configurable in the remaining models as additional SW package, are:
Name UF OF UF2 (1) OF2 (1)
Type of protection Minimum frequency Maximum frequency Minimum frequency Maximum frequency
Page 69 70 70 71
(1) protections UF2 and OF2 are not available by default with Ekip G Touch. However, they can be integrated by requesting the relative SW package
UF Protection Function
t f12
t12
The protection sends a TRIP command if the grid frequency read by the unit drops below threshold f12 for longer than t12. UF The protection excludes itself if the maximum value of the line-to-line voltage is less than 30 V.
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult: · summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93) · the graph with trip curve (page 105)
f Parameters
Parameter Enable Trip Enable
Threshold f12 Time t12
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
OFF
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF information
Establishes the value that activates the protection. The value is given as both absolute value (Hertz) and relative value (Fn) 0,9 Fn and can be set within the range: 0.9 Fn to 1 Fn in 0.001 Fn steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0.06 s to 300 s, in 0.01 s steps
3 s
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by connection to the system bus (page 83).
69 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 5 - Frequency protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
OF Protection Function
The protection sends a TRIP command if the grid frequency read by the unit exceeds threshold f13 for longer
t
than t13.
f13 OF The protection excludes itself if the maximum value of the line-to-line voltage is less than 30 V.
t13 f
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult: · summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93) · the graph with trip curve (page 105) Parameters
Parameter Enable Trip Enable
Threshold f13 Time t13
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
OFF
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF information
Establishes the value that activates the protection. The value is given as both absolute value (Hertz) and relative value (Fn) 1,1 Fn and can be set within the range: 1 Fn to 1.1 Fn in 0.001 Fn steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0.06 s to 300 s, in 0.01 s steps
3 s
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by connection to the system bus (page 83).
UF2 Protection Function
t f17
t17
UF2 protection functions in the same way as UF protection: the protection sends a TRIP command if the grid frequency read by the unit drops below threshold f17 for longer than t17.
UF2
It is independent of UF protection, thus thresholds and functions of the two protections can be programmed so as to take advantage of different plant solutions (example: signaling with UF and open command with UF2 or vice versa, or both for signaling or tripping).
The protection excludes itself if the maximum value of the line-to-line voltage is less than 30 V.
f To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
· summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93) · the graph with trip curve (page 105)
Parameters
Parameter Enable Trip Enable
Threshold f17 Time t17
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
OFF
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF information
Establishes the value that activates the protection. The value is given as both absolute value (Hertz) and relative value (Fn) 0,9 Fn and can be set within the range: 0.9 Fn to 1 Fn in 0.001 Fn steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0.06 s to 300 s, in 0.01 s steps
3 s
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by connection to the system bus (page 83).
70 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 5 - Frequency protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
OF2 Protection Function
OF2 protection functions in the same way as OF protection: the protection sends a TRIP command if the grid
t
frequency read by the unit exceeds threshold f18 for longer than t18.
f18 OF2 It is independent of OF protection, thus thresholds and functions of the two protections can be programmed
so as to take advantage of different plant solutions (example: signaling with OF and open command with OF2
t18
or vice versa, or both for signaling or tripping).
The protection excludes itself if the maximum value of the line-to-line voltage is less than 30 V.
f To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult: · summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93) · the graph with trip curve (page 105) Parameters
Parameter Enable Trip Enable
Threshold f18 Time t18
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
OFF
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF information
Establishes the value that activates the protection. The value is given as both absolute value (Hertz) and relative value (Fn) 1,1 Fn and can be set within the range: 1 Fn to 1.1 Fn in 0.001 Fn steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0.06 s to 300 s, in 0.01 s steps
3 s
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by connection to the system bus (page 83).
71 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 5 - Frequency protections
6 - Power protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
List The Power protections, available by default for Ekip Hi-Touch, Ekip G Touch, Ekip G-Hi Touch models and configurable in Ekip Touch as additional SW package, are:
Name RP D (2) OQ (1) OP (1) UP (1) RQ (1)(2) Cos
Type of protection Reverse active power Directional short-circuit with adjustable delay Maximum reactive power Active overpower Active underpower Reverse reactive power Minimum Cos
Page 72 75 75 75 76 76 77
(1) the protection is not available by default with Ekip Hi-Touch. However, it can be integrated by requesting the relative SW package (2) the protection is not available by default with Ekip G Touch. However, it can be integrated by requesting the relative SW package
WARNING! The Power flow parameters effect the sign of the power and power factor values measured by the unit. Power flow must be configured and verified on the
basis of your installation to ensure that all the protections of the Power Protections package function correctly
RP Protection Function
RP P11
t11
The protection sends a TRIP command if the reverse total active power exceeds threshold P11 for longer t than t1.
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult: · summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93) · the graph with trip curve (page 106) Parameters
P Parameter Enable Trip Enable
Threshold f11
Time t11
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
OFF
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled,
the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as
OFF
information
Establishes the value that activates the protection. The value is given as both absolute value (kW) and relative value (Sn) and can be set within the range: -0.05 Sn to -1 Sn in 0.001 Sn steps
NOTE: the threshold expressed in Sn is preceded by the "-" sign to indicate that inverse power is involved
0,1 Sn
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0.05 s to 120 s, in 0.01 s steps
10 s
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by connection to the system bus (page 83).
72 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 6 - Power protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
D Protection Function
D protection is very similar to S protection, with the additional capability of recognizing the direction of the
t
current during a fault.
I7
D
The current direction allows the user to find out whether the fault is on the supply side or load side of the
t7bw
device controlled by Ekip Touch.
t7fw
In ring type distribution systems, D protection allows the distribution section in which the fault has occurred
to be identified and disconnected without affecting the rest of the installation (using zone selectivity).
I Depending on the direction of the fault, if the current of one or more phases exceeds threshold I7 (I7fw or I7bw) for longer than time t7 (t7fw or t7bw), the protection activates and sends a TRIP command.
The fault direction is established by comparing the detected fault current with the reference direction.
NOTE: the reference direction is calculated considering the set value of the power flow direction and the phase sequence (cyclic direction of the phases):
Phase sequence (set) Power flow (set)
123
High-->Low
123
Bottom --> Top
123
High-->Low
123
Bottom --> Top
321
High-->Low
321
Bottom --> Top
321
High-->Low
321
Bottom --> Top
Phase sequence (detected) 123 123 321 321 123 123 321 321
Reference direction (forward direction) High-->Low Bottom --> Top Bottom --> Top High-->Low Bottom --> Top High-->Low High-->Low Bottom --> Top
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
· the summary table of the protections with the calculation formulas (page 93) · the graph with trip curve (page 106)
Parameter Description
Enable
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
Trip Enable
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
Establishes the value that activates the protection with forward direction. Threshold I7 Fw The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value (In)
and can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
Threshold i7 Bw
Establishes the value that activates the protection with backward direction. The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value (In) and can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
Default OFF ON 4 In
4 In
Time t7 Fw
This is the trip time in the case of forward direction. The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to 0.8 s, in 0.01 s steps
Time t7 Bw
This is the trip time in the case of backward direction. The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to 0.8 s, in 0.01 s steps
ZoneSelectivity
(1)
Activates/deactivates the function and selectivity time availability on the display.
NOTE: configure selectivities S, S2 OFF to ensure that selectivity D functions correctly, G, Gext and MDGF
Selectivity time Fw (1)
This is the trip time of the protection with the zone selectivity function activated, forward direction and selectivity input Fw not present. The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to 0.8 s, in 0.01 s steps
Selectivity time Bw (1)
This is the trip time of the protection with the zone selectivity function activated, backward direction and selectivity input Bw not present. The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to 0.8 s, in 0.01 s steps
0,2 s 0,2 s OFF 0,13 s 0,13 s
Continued on the next page
73 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 6 - Power protections
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Parameter Description
Default
StartUp enable
Activates/deactivates the function and availability of the associated parameters on the display
OFF
Protection threshold valid during Startup time, in the conditions in which the
StartUp
function is activated and with forward current direction (2).
Threshold Fw (2) The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value (In)
4 In
and can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
Protection threshold valid during Startup time, in the conditions in which the
StartUp
function is activated and with backward current direction.
Threshold Bw (2) The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value (In)
4 In
and can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
StartUp Time (2)
This is the time for which the StartUp threshold remains activated and is
calculated from the moment the activation Threshold is exceeded The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to 30 s,
0.1 s
in 0.01 s steps
Direction Min Angle
Ekip Touch calculates the phase displacement angle between active and apparent power measured: when phase displacement exceeds the set Direction Min Angle parameter, the unit considers the fault direction to have 3,6 ° been identified. The value is given in degrees and can be set within a range of 15 values from 3.6° to 69.6°
(1) details on page 81 (2) details on page 83
Limitations and additional functions
the functions blocking the type of selectivity and the Trip only Forward and Trip Only Backward parameters can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or communication via system bus (page 83).
Notes
· activation of D directional protection automatically activates the alarm that monitors phase sequence (which can also be excluded and activated in the manual mode): note how, in the case of a cyclic sequence of phases that differs from the set value, in the event of a fault the directional protection inverts the reference direction with respect to the expected direction; details of the phase sequence protection are available on page 64
· in the case of small overcurrents, the behavior of the directional protection is influenced by the type of load: to prevent the direction of the fault current from being incorrectly interpreted in the case of capacitive loads, it is advisable for the setting of that protection to be made on the basis of real fault conditions and not overloads
74 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 6 - Power protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
OQ Protection Function
The protection sends a TRIP command if one or more of the reactive power values detected by the unit
t
exceed threshold Q27 for longer than t27.
Q27 OQ To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
· summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
t27
· the graph with trip curve (page 107)
Parameters
Q Parameter Enable
Trip Enable
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
OFF
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF information
Threshold Q27 Time t27
Establishes the value that activates the protection. The value is given as both absolute value (kVAR) and relative value 1 Sn (Sn) and can be set within the range: 0.4 Sn to 2 Sn in 0.001 Sn steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0.5 s to 100 s, in 0.5 s steps
1 s
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by connection to the system bus (page 83).
OP Protection Function
The protection sends a TRIP command if one or more of the active power values detected by the unit exceed
t
threshold P26 for longer than t26.
P26 OP To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
· summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
t26
· the graph with trip curve (page 107)
Parameters
P Parameter Description
Default
Enable
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
OFF
Trip Enable
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF information
Establishes the value that activates the protection. Threshold P26 The value is given as both absolute value (kW) and relative value (Sn) 1 Un
and can be set within the range: 0.4 Sn to 2 Sn in 0.001 Sn steps
Time t26
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0.5 s to 100 s, in 0.5 s steps
1 s
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by connection to the system bus (page 83).
75 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 6 - Power protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
UP Protection Function
The protection sends a TRIP command if one or more of the active power values detected by the unit drop
t
below threshold P23 for longer than t23.
UP
P23
The protection is active also for negative (reverse) active power, but is independent from the RP protection
(Reverse active power protection).
t23
The protection excludes itself if the maximum value of the line-to-line voltage is less than 30 V.
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult: P · summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
· the graph with trip curve (page 108)
Parameter Enable
Description
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
Default OFF
Trip Enable
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF information
Establishes the value that activates the protection. Threshold P23 The value is given as both absolute value (kW) and relative value (Sn) 1 Sn
and can be set within the range: 0.1 Sn to 1 Sn in 0.001 Sn steps
Time t23
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0.5 s to 100 s, in 0.5 s steps
1 s
StartUp enable
Activates/deactivates the function and availability of the StartUp Time parameter in the menu
OFF
StartUp Time
This is the time for which the threshold remains disabled and is
calculated from the moment the activation Threshold is exceeded The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to
0.1 s
30 s, in 0.01 s steps
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by connection to the system bus (page 83).
RQ Protection Function
RQ protection protects against reactive power reversal; the threshold can be adjusted on the basis of the active power.
The protection sends a TRIP command when inverse reactive power enters the TRIP area, determined by the protection parameters and power value readings, for longer than t24.
Adjustment of constants Kq and Kq2 allows the trip threshold of the protection (determined by the intersection of the two TRIP areas, whose limits depend on the parameters configured in the unit) to be changed.
Q
Kq2
Kq
P
Q24
TRIP
Q25
Figure 24
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult: · summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93) · the graph with trip curve (page 108)
Continued on the next page
76 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 6 - Power protections
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Parameters
Parameter Description
Default
Enable
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
OFF
Trip Enable
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
OFF
Defines the gradient of the line relating to threshold Q24. Threshold Kq The value is given as absolute value (slope of the line) and can be set within -2
the range: -2 to 2 in 0.01 steps
Threshold -Q24
This is the reactive power required to define the trip line and relative TRIP
area
The value is given as both absolute value (kVAR) and relative value (Sn) and can be set within the range: 0.1 Sn to 1 Sn in 0.001 Sn steps
0,1 Sn
NOTE: the threshold expressed in Sn is not preceded by the "-" sign,
but should still be understood as inverse reactive power
Threshold Kq2
Defines the gradient of the line relating to threshold Q24. The value is given as absolute value (slope of the line) and can be set within 2 the range: -2 to 2 in 0.01 steps
Threshold -Q25
Defines the reactive power value at which the protection trips and is
required for the purpose of defining the relative TRIP area
The value is given as both absolute value (kVAR) and relative value (Sn) and can be set within the range: 0.1 Sn to 1 Sn in 0.001 Sn steps
0,11 Sn
NOTE: the threshold expressed in Sn is not preceded by the "-" sign,
but should still be understood as inverse reactive power
Time t24
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0.5 s to 100 s, in 0.1 s steps
100 s
Threshold Vmin
This is the minimum activation voltage of the protection. The protection is not activated if at least one line-to-line voltage value is less than threshold Vmin. The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) and can be set within the range: 0.5 Un to 1.2 Un in 0.01 Un steps
0.5 Un
Limitations and additional functions
· Ekip Touch accepts parameters in accordance with the following limitations: Q24 < Q25 and Kq < Kq2 · the block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 83).
Cos Protection The protection activates an alarm when the total Cos value drops below the set threshold. Total cos is calculated as ratio between total active Power and total apparent Power. Parameters The parameters are available in the Advanced - Signaling menu (page 44)
Parameter Enable
Threshold
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and availability of the threshold in the menu
OFF
Defines the value that activates the protection; can be set within the range: 0.5 to 0.95 in 0.01 steps
0,95
77 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 6 - Power protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
7 - ROCOF protections
The ROCOF Protection package is available by default for Ekip G Hi-Touch and configurable in the remaining models as additional SW package The protection is described below:
ROCOF Protection Function
ROCOF protection protects against rapid frequency variations: the protection sends a TRIP command if the
t
frequency changes faster than control variation f28 set in the unit for longer than t28.
f28
ROCOF
t28 Hz/s
f(Hz)
Frequency variation after failure(1)
Frequency fluctuation (after a failure)
f28
fmis
Figure 25
t28
t(s)
(1) example with positive linear variation of the higher frequency of the set f28 value; the protection also manages negative variations
The protection excludes itself if the maximum value of the line-to-line voltage is less than 30 V.
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult: · summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93) · the graph with trip curve (page 109) Parameters
Parameter Description
Default
Enable
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
OFF
Trip Enable
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
OFF
establishes the maximum admissible frequency variation rate over time; the
Threshold f28
protection trips if this rate is exceeded. The value is given as absolute value (Hz/s) Fn) and can be set within the
0,6 Hz/s
range: 0.4 Hz/s to 10 Hz/s in 0.2 Hz/s steps
Trip Direction
Establishes whether the protection monitors an increase (Up), a decrease (Down) or both variations (Up and Down)
Up or Down
Time f28
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0.06 s to 300 s, in 0.01 s steps
0,5 s
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by connection to the system bus (page 83).
78 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 7 - ROCOF protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
8 - Protection Adaptive
The Adaptive Protection package is available by default for Ekip Hi-Touch and Ekip G Hi-Touch and configurable in the remaining models as additional SW package. The protection is described below:
Dual Set The function enables two different protection configurations to be made, one as an alternative to the other, by means of a set change with programmable events.
The function can be activated in the Settings-Dual Set menu (page 46)
Parameter Enable
Default Set
Description Activates/deactivates the function
Defines the sets of main and secondary protections (which activate in the presence of the programmed event)
Default OFF
Set A
The event that determines set change (from default to secondary) can be programmed in the Advanced Functions menu, see the paragraph Programmable Functions and Commands (page 89).
79 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 8 - Protection Adaptive
9 - Additional protections and functions
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Introduction Some protections have additional functions which extend their characteristics and performance:
Name Thermal Memory Zone selectivity Blocks Startup Current thresholds Programmable Commands
Type of protection
Page
overheating of the cables
80
management of trip commands in a network of circuit-breakers 80
blocking of protection on the basis of programmable events 83
different thresholds on the basis of monitoring thresholds
83
Current control with programmable thresholds
88
Programmable commands with trip unit events or statuses 89
Installation of accessory modules allows the respective functions to be activated:
Name Gext Rc Synchrocheck MDGF
Type of protection External earth fault with adjustable delay Residual current Synchronism between two independent voltage sources Modified differential ground fault
Page 84 87 89 85
Thermal Memory Protection The function, which is available for L and S protections, allows overheating in the cables connected to the circuit-breaker to be prevented: in the case of trips within brief intervals, the unit considers the time between commands and the entity of the faults so as to reduce opening time.
IMPORTANT: for the S protection the function can be activated if the selected curve is time-dependent.
NOTE: the function also reduces the trip time in the case of overloads which have not led to the open command (longer than 100ms)
S, S2, I, G zone selectivity The function, which can be activated for S, S2, I, G, Gext and MDGF protections (if available and enabled), Protection, Gext, MDGF allows several devices belonging to the same installation (including Ekip Touch) to be interconnected, so as to handle trip commands in the best possible way in the case of S, S2, I, G, Gext and MDGF protections.
The function allows the devices to be coordinated so that, if a fault occurs: · the device nearest to the fault trips · the other devices are blocked for a programmable time
NOTE: connection can be made between ABB devices that have the zone selectivity function
Characteristics Ekip Touch has five selectivity connections, located on the rear connectors of the CB:
Name Szi Szo Gzi
Gzo Szc
Type Input Output Input
Output Common
Description
Connection
S, S2 and I protection selecitivity input
From devices on the load side
S, S2 and I protection selecitivity output To devices on the supply side
G, Gext and MDGF protection selectivity input
From devices on the load side
G, Gext and MDGF protection selectivity output
To devices on the supply side
Common connection of selectivity network The entire selectivity network
Continued on the next page
80 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Configuration To correctly configure the selectivity network of one or more protections:
1. Connect zone selectivity outputs of the same type (example: Szo) of devices belonging to the same zone, to the zone selectivity input of the device immediately upstream (example: Szi).
2. Connect all the Szc of devices in the same network together.
3. Time t2 must be configured at t2 sel + 50 ms or more, with the exclusion of the device further along its network.
Logic table The table includes all cases in which, with zone selectivity enabled in the device, an alarm condition occurs or a zone selectivity signal is received from another device.
NOTES:
· the table gives the S protection cases, but is also valid for the other protections: G, S2, I, Gext and MDGF, each with its respective connections
· if the selectivities of protections that share the same connections are active at the same time (example: S, S2 and I), the inputs/outputs are managed with OR logic
Condition If < I2 If < I2
If > I2
If > I2
Szi Szo Tripping time Remarks
0
0
No TRIP
TRIP Il device not in alarm status
1
1
No TRIP
The device is not in the alarm status, but sends the selecitivity signal received from the device upstream
0
1
t2 sel (1)
The device is in the alarm status and is the first to detect the fault: trips within time t2 sel (1)
1
1
t2 (2)
The device is in the alarm status but is not the first to detect the fault: trips within time t2 (2)
(1) the trip time of protection I is that of protection (2) for I protection tripping time is 100ms
D zone selectivity Protection Foreword
This function, which can be activated for D protection (if available and enabled), enables devices belonging to the same installation (including Ekip Touch) to be connected together so as to handle the trip commands in a better way in the case of D protection.
It is especially useful in ring and grid type systems where, besides the zone, it is essential to also define the direction of the power flow that supplies the fault.
The function allows the devices to be coordinated so that, if a fault occurs: · The device nearest to the fault trips · The other devices are blocked for a programmable time
NOTES:
· connection can be made between ABB devices that have the zone selectivity function · disable the zone selectivities of protections S, S2, I, G, Gext and MDGF to correctly use the
selectivity D function Characteristics
Ekip Touch has five selectivity connections, located on the upper terminal box of the CB:
Name Szi Szo Gzi Gzo Szc
Type Input Output Input Output Common
Description Forward direction selectivity input Forward direction selectivity output Backward direction selectivity input Backward direction selectivity output Common connection of selectivity network
Denomintion for D DFin DFout Dbin Dbout SZc
Continued on the next page
81 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Configuration To correctly configure selectivity D in a ring system:
1. Connect the zone selectivity outputs of each device (example: DFin) to the selectivity input of the same direction as the device immediately after (example: DFout).
2. Connect all the Szc of devices in the same network together.
Logic table The table includes all cases in which, with zone selectivity enabled in the device, an alarm condition occurs or a zone selectivity signal is received from another device.
The Forward output is activated if the fault direction coincides with the reference direction otherwise, if it is in the opposite direction, the Backward output is activated (page 73)
Fault direction
Condition
Forward
If < I7 Fw
Backward If < I7 Bw
Forward
If < I7 Fw
Backward If < I7 Bw
DFin Dbin Dfout Dbout
Tripping time
0x0x No TRIP
x0x0
1x1x No TRIP
x1x1
Forward
If > I7 Fw 0 x 1 x t7 Fw sel
Backward If > I7 Bw x 0 x 1 t7 Bw sel
Forward
If > I7 Fw 1 x 1 x t7 Fw
Backward If > I7 Bw x 1 x 1 t7 Bw
Remarks
Device not in alarm status
The device is not in the alarm status, but sends the selecitivity signal received to the output of the reference direction The device is in the alarm status and is the first to detect the fault: trips within time t7 Fw sel or t7 Bw sel The device is in the alarm status but is not the first to detect the fault: trips within time t7 Fw (or t7 Bw)
NOTE: when zone selectivity is active and the direction of the fault cannot be established, the unit trips by considering the first threshold to be exceeded between I7 Fw and I7
Bw, without activating any output (DFout or Dbout).; if both the thresholds have been exceeded (for example, if they have been set with the same value), the unit trips after the shortest time
between t7 Fw and t7 Bw.
Trip Only Forward and Backward
D protection can be configured (if available and enabled) with 2 additional parameters via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via system bus communication:
· Trip only Forward: if activated, D protection only controls open commands if forward direction is detected · Trip only Backward: if activated, D protection only controls open commands if backward direction is detected
faults in the opposite direction are only handled as alarm information.
Type of selectivity
The zone selectivity inputs and certain of the outputs can be configured via service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via system bus communication for protections S, S2, I, G, Gext, MDGF and D (if available and enabled):
· Standard: operation as by zone selectivity standard logic (default configuration) · Customized: the event that activates the zone selectivity input or output can be selected in this mode.
IMPORTANT: in the Customized configuration, the only zone selectivity activation event is the one set and standard selectivity operation is therefore not active
(changes should only be made by expert technical personnel).
82 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Startup Protection The function, which can be activated for protections S, I, G, Gext, MDGF, S2, D and UP (if available and enabled), allow the protection threshold (StartUp threshold) to be changed for a period that can be set by the user (Startup time).
NOTE: for UP protection, startup means the time for which the protection is disabled
The period begins after a threshold has been exceeded (activation threshold), user-programmable via Ekip Connect or system bus, valid and verified for all phase currents. The Startup condition elapses after Startup time and re-activates the next time the activation threshold is exceeded
NOTE: startup does not occur again until at least one current remains above activation threshold level
A graphic representation with S protection follows:
Figure 26
Block functions Six blocks can be configured for certain protections by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or communication via system bus. These blocks are useful for deactivating the protections relating to programmable events:
Block name BlockOnProgStatusA BlockOnProgStatusB BlockOnProgStatusC BlockOnProgStatusD
BlockOnStartUp
BlockOnOutOfFrequency
Description Block active if programmable status A is true Block active if programmable status B is true Block active if programmable status C is true Block active if programmable status D is true Block active during StartUp time (if StartUp for the specific protection is available and activated) Block active if frequency measured is not within 30 Hz to 80 Hz range
Each block is independent and has its own activation command (Block On); however, each protection can be configured with several block conditions (operation in OR logic condition).
The protections which have blocks are: S, I, G, Gext, MDGF, MCR, S2, D, S(V), S2(V), UV, OV, VU, UV2, OV2, UP, OP, RP, RQ, OQ, RV, UF, OF, UF2, OF2, ROCOF, UC, U, R Jam, R Stall.
IMPORTANT: the blocks can cause:
· increase of protection trip times (max: + 30 ms), owing to verification of the event itself (example: (frequency check)
· undesired deactivation of the protection, if the block is associated with statuses or signals to modules via local bus and auxiliary power supply is absent. In this case, it may be useful to also consider the status of the auxiliary power supply (Supply from Vaux) when programming the event
· undesired deactivation of the protection, if the block is associated with frequency measurements and the voltage is less than the minimum calculation threshold
IMPORTANT: if the function is activated, the blocks are deactivated during startup (except for BlockOnStartup, which functions during this period)
83 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Gext Protection Function
Gext protection protects against earth faults and detects the fault current with a dedicated external toroid
t
S.G.R.
I41
Gext if S.G.R. toroid current exceeds threshold I41, the protection trips and, after a time established by the value
read and by the parameter settings, transmits the TRIP command.
t41
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
· summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 92)
I · the graph with trip curve (page 100)
Parameters
Sensor configuration is available in the Settings menu (page 46)
Parameter External Toroid
Toroid size
Description It allows the presence of external toroid S.G.R. to be activated
Allows the reference current of the protection to be selected from among four available quantities, from 100 A to 800 A
IMPORTANT: the current selected from the menu must be consistent with the size of the external toroid S.G.R. connected to the unit
Default OFF
100 A
Protection configuration is available in the Advanced menu (page 44)
Parameter Enable Trip Enable Curve Threshold I41 Time t41
Threshold I41
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
OFF
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as ON information
Establishes curve dynamics and the threshold or trip time calculation:
· t= k: fixed time trip
t = k
· t= k/I 2: inverse time-delay dynamic trip
Establishes the value that activates the protection and contributes
towards calculating the trip time. The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value
0,2 In
(In) and can be set within the range: 0.1 In to 1 In, in 0.001 In steps
It is the trip time or contributes towards timing calculation, depending
on the type of curve selected. The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to
0,4 s
1 s, in 0.05 s steps
Warns that the measured current is near to the protection activation threshold. The value is given in percentage of threshold I1 and can be set within the range 50% I41 to 90% I41, in 1% steps. The prealarm condition deactivates in two cases:
· current lower than prealarm threshold I41 · current higher than threshold I41
90 % I41
Continued on the next page
84 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Parameter
ZoneSelectivity
Selectivity time StartUp enable StartUp Threshold StartUp Time
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the function and selectivity time availability on
the display (1)
NOTES :
· the function is only available with curve t = k · if both selectivities G and Gext are activated, the input and
OFF
output are shared with the OR function: it is sufficient for even
only one of the two to be activated to stimulate the inputs and
outputs
This is the trip time of the protection with the zone selectivity function activated and selectivity input not present (1) The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.04 s to 0.2 s, in 0.01 s steps
0,04 s
Activates/deactivates the function and availability of the associated parameters on the display (2)
OFF
Protection threshold valid during Startup time, in the conditions in which the function is activated (2) The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value (In) and can be set within the range: 0.2 In to 1 In, in 0.1 In steps
0,2 In
This is the time for which the StartUp threshold remains activated and
is calculated from the moment the activation Threshold is exceeded (2) The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to
0.1 s
30 s, in 0.01 s steps
(1) details on page 80 (2) details on page83
Limitations and additional functions
· in the presence of curve t= k/I2, the protection trip time is forced to t41 if the calculation results give a theoretical value lower than t41 itself
· Ekip Touch activates and displays Gext protection parameters if the presence of toroid S.G.R has been enabled in the Settings menu (page 46);protection activation includes checking for the presence of toroide S.G.R and signaling on the diagnosis bar in the event of alarm/absence
· the protection is automatically inhibited by the unit if absence of toroid S.G.R is detected · the block functions and type of selectivity can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via
Ekip Connect) or communication via system bus (page 82) · with CB in UL standard configuration, some parameters have different maximum values: I41 maximum =
1200A, Startup maximum = 1200A, t41 maximum = 400ms
MDGF Protection Function
MDGF protection protects against earth faults and detects the fault current with a dedicated toroid MDGF.
t
I41
if MDGF toroid current exceeds threshold I41, the protection trips and, after a time established by the value MDGF read and by the parameter settings, transmits the TRIP command.
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
t41
· summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 92)
· the graph with trip curve (page 101)
I Parameters
Sensor configuration is available in the Settings menu (page 46)
Parameter Description External Toroid It allows the presence of toroid MDGF to be activated
Default OFF
Continued on the next page
85 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection configuration is available in the Advanced menu (page 44)
Parameter Enable Trip Enable Curve Threshold I41
Time t41
Threshold I41
ZoneSelectivity
Selectivity time StartUp enable StartUp Threshold StartUp Time
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
OFF
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as ON information
Establishes curve dynamics and the threshold or trip time calculation:
· t= k: fixed time trip
t = k
· t= k/I 2: inverse time-delay dynamic trip
Establishes the value that activates the protection and contributes
towards calculating the trip time. The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value
0,2 In
(In) and can be set within the range: 0.1 In to 1 In, in 0.001 In steps
It is the trip time or contributes towards timing calculation, depending on the type of curve selected. The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: · 0.05 s to 1 s, in 0.05 s steps for t=k · 0.1 s to 1 s, in 0.05 s steps for t=k/I 2
with CB in UL configuration, the maximum settable value of t41 is 0.4 s
0,4 s
Warns that the measured current is near to the protection activation threshold. The value is given in percentage of threshold I1 and can be set within the range 50% I41 to 90% I41, in 1% steps. The prealarm condition deactivates in two cases:
· current lower than prealarm threshold I41 · current higher than threshold I41
90 % I41
Activates/deactivates the function and selectivity time availability on
the display (1)
NOTES :
· the function is only available with curve t = k · if both selectivities G and MDGF are activated, the input and
OFF
output are shared with the OR function: it is sufficient for even
only one of the two to be activated to stimulate the inputs and
outputs
This is the trip time of the protection with the zone selectivity function activated and selectivity input not present (1) The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.04 s to 0.2 s, in 0.01 s steps
0,04 s
Activates/deactivates the function and availability of the associated parameters on the display (2)
OFF
Protection threshold valid during Startup time, in the conditions in which the function is activated (2) The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value (In) and can be set within the range: 0.2 In to 1 In, in 0.1 In steps
0,2 In
This is the time for which the StartUp threshold remains activated and
is calculated from the moment the activation Threshold is exceeded (2) The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to
0.1 s
30 s, in 0.01 s steps
(1) details on page 80 (2) details on page 83
Limitations and additional functions
· in the presence of curve t= k/I 2, the protection trip time is forced to t41 if the calculation results give a theoretical value lower than t41 itself
· Ekip Touch activates and displays MDGF protection parameters if the presence of toroid MDGF has been enabled in the Settings menu (page 46);
· the block functions and type of selectivity can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or communication via system bus (page 82)
· with CB in UL standard configuration, some parameters have different maximum values: I41 maximum = 1200A, Startup maximum = 1200A, t41 maximum = 400ms
86 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
ABB | SACE Emax 2
RC Protection Function
Rc protection protects against the residual current earth faults by detecting the fault current with the
t
appropriate external Rc toroid.
Idn
Rc The protection sends a TRIP command if the current from toroid Rc exceeds threshold Idn for longer than
Tdn.
tdn
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
· summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 92)
I · the graph with trip curve (page 100)
Parameters
Parameter Threshold Idn
Time Tdn
Description
Default
Defines the value that activates the protection; the value is given in Amperes and can be set within a range of values from 3 A to 30 A
5 A
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range of values from 0.05 s to 0.8 s
0,06 s
Limitations and additional functions
Ekip Touch activates and displays the Rc protection parameters if the following conditions are observed: · Rating Plug Rc model assembled and installed · Measurement enabler with voltage socket module assembled and installed protection activation includes checking for the presence of toroid Rc and signaling on the diagnosis bar in the event of alarm/absence
87 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Current thresholds Function
The Current thresholds allow checks to be set along the current lines, to be associated with the programmable contacts of the Ekip Signalling modules (in all versions).
Two pairs of programmable contacts are available: · Threshold 1 I1 and Threshold 2 I1, with control relating to I1 · Threshold Iw1 and Threshold Iw2, with control relating to In The thresholds can be enabled and set in the Advanced - Signaling menu (page 44).
IMPORTANT:
· the current thresholds do not handle the trip, just the signal · the function is activated if the trip unit is powered by auxiliary voltage Parameters
Threshold Threshold 1 I1 Threshold 2 I1 Threshold Iw1
Threshold Iw2
Available parameters
Default
Enable: Activates the protection and availability of the threshold in the menu OFF
Threshold: The value is given in percentage of threshold I1 and can be set within the range: 50% I1 to 100% I1, in 1% steps.
50 % I1
Enable: Activates the protection and availability of the threshold in the menu OFF
Threshold: The value is given in percentage of threshold I1 and can be set within the range: 50% I1 to 100% I1, in 1% steps.
75 % I1
Enable: Activates the protection and availability of the threshold in the menu OFF
Direction: allows the user to choose whether to have the signal when the current is higher (Up) or lower (Down) than the threshold.
Down
Threshold: The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value (In) and can be set within the range: 0.1 In to 10 In, in 0.01 In steps
3 In
Enable: Activates the protection and availability of the threshold in the menu OFF
Direction: allows the user to choose whether to have the signal when the current is higher (Up) or lower (Down) than the threshold.
Up
Threshold: The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value (In) and can be set within the range: 0.1 In to 10 In, in 0.01 In steps
3 In
Figure 27 88 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Synchrocheck With regard to closing the interconnection switch, the Ekip Synchrocheck module recognizes and reports whether there are synchronism conditions between two independent voltage sources (example: generator + grid). A description of the module, the protection function and performance is given in the chapter dedicated to the modules (page 223).
Programmable Functions and Eight commands are available, with activation that can be programmed on the basis of signals or events. Commands Distributed among different Ekip Touch menus, the commands are:
Name External Trip Trip RESET Turn on SET B
2I Mode
RESET Energy
YO Command YC Command LOCAL Switch On Signaling RESET
Description Sends a TRIP command Reset of the trip signal Changes the protections set, from Set A to Set B It activates 2I protection, if configured for this function
Resets the energy meters
Sends an open command to YO Sends a close command to YC (1) Changes the configuration, from Remote to Local Reset the contacts of the signalling modules
Path (page)
Advanced - Functions (44)
Advanced - Functions 2I Menu (59) Measurements - Energy (45)
Settings - Functions (46)
Settings - Modules -Functions (46)
(1) the MOE-E storage command must be present Parameters Each command provides two programming parameters:
Parameter Function
Delay
Description
Default
Event or several command activation events (up to eight, in AND or OR logic configuration). The Custom configuration can be programmed via Ekip Connect.
Deactivated
This is the minimum time the expected event must be present in order to activate the command; the value is given in seconds and can be set 0 s within a range: 0 s to 100 s, in 0.1 s steps
IMPORTANT: the commands are sent if all the operating conditions expected by the unit are present (connections, power supplies, alarms, etc.)
89 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
10 - Logic selectivity
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Presentation Zone Selectivity via Link Bus is indicated as Logic Selectivity. Logic Selectivity can be actuated for up to 12 of 15 actors that can be associated with Ekip Touch via Link Bus (see Ekip Link module, page 212). Parameters The function enabling parameter, available from among the parameters that can be set for the protection, must be set for each protection for which Zone Selectivity must be activated. In this case, in addition to these parameters, Selectivity time is also activated for the setting. Otherwise, Zone Selectivity can only be set by means of Ekip Connect software.
NOTE: all the following parameters and configurations are available via Ekip Connect, with Ekip Link connected and on
Setting
Certain parameters can be configured in the Ekip Link configuration page:
· selection of selectivity type: hardware or mixed (hardware and logic) · entry of the IP address of each actor present; entry of the address enables the configuration parameters
and status indicators to be displayed in the various pages · the function must be enabled for each actor associated with Ekip Touch via Link Bus and for which logic
selectivity must be actuated (the Actor Selectivity parameter must be given value: True)
selectivity masks are available in the Ekip Link advanced selectivity page for each actor present: the mask allows the protections of the actors (S, I, G, D-Forward, D-Backward, S2, Gext, MDGF) that activate the selectivity input of Ekip Touch to be selected (example: actor 1, protection mask S= S2: selectivity S of Ekip Touch will be active in the presence of signals S2 of actor 1).
In this configuration, if the function is enabled for S protection and is in the alarm status, the S/D-Forward hardware block signal and the logic selectivity S bit are activated on the output; depending on the block signals:
· if, on the input, the S/D-Forward hardware block signal and the logic selectivity S2 and Gext/MDGF bits of actor 1 are not activated, the opening command is sent in accordance with the selectivity time set for S protection
· a time equal to the trip time of S protection is waited if, on the input, the S/D-Forward hardware block signal is activated or mixed selectivity has been selected and the S2 or Gext/MDGF logic selectivity bits of actor 1 are activated (and the opening command is only sent if S protection is still in the alarm status once this time has elapsed)
NOTES:
· the logic selectivity bits on the output and on the input are those in the data packages shared by the releases via Link Bus
· the S/D-Forward (G/D-Backward) hardware output is only activated if the S or D-Forward (G or D-Backward) protections are in the alarm status, and the S/DForward (G/D-Backward) hardware input only acts as a block for the S and D-Forward (G and D-Backward) protections, regardless of whether solely hardware or mixed selectivity has been selected
IMPORTANT: if solely hardware selectivity has been selected, the logic selectivity bits are ignored on the input, but are still activated on the output
Selectivity masks
Remote Programmable States A and B are also included in the selectivity masks: these 2 parameters, which are available in the Ekip Link configuration page, enable the event (or combination of several events) and reference actor that activates the selectivity input to be selected.
2 further states are available, C and D, but they cannot be configured for Zone Selectivity. All 4 programmable states are used for the Programmable Logic function (see Ekip Link module on page 212).
NOTE: the Programmable Logic function is independent from that of Zone Selectivity
90 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 10 - Logic selectivity
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Repetition The Repeat Configuration mask parameter is available in the Ekip Link advanced selectivity page. It enables the selection of protections whose logic selectivity bit, if present on the input, must be propagated regardless of the status of the protection on the current unit.
NOTE: the parameter only acts on the selectivity bits. It does not involve the outputs
Diagnostic In the presence of both hardware and logic Selectivity, the diagnosis highlights any errors in the hardware Selectivity cabling by checking its continuity. The Ekip Link diagnosis configuration page allows you to: enable diagnosis, configure the interval of time between one inspection and the next, select the inputs to be checked for each active actor (S/D_Forward, G/D_Backward). Then: · the hardware inputs are checked at regular intervals · if, in Ekip Touch, the input of an actor is configured for diagnosis (e.g. input S of actor 3) and this input is not active when the test is performed, the actor stimulates its output (e.g. actor 3 activates output S) for a short time: Ekip Touch considers the test result to be positive if it receives the signal correctly at its input, otherwise it will signal error · the diagnosis check will not be performed if the hw input is active: if the input configured for diagnosis is active when the test is performed, diagnosis check will not be performed and the Detection state parameter in the Ekip Link state page will indicate: Unknown
Errors and inconsistencies Regardless of the diagnosis, if a hardware input is active and none of the logic selectivity bits of the associated actors is active, a line inconsistency for this input is reported in the Ekip Link state page.
NOTE: line inconsistency is ascertained by checking all the actors associated with the unit, even those for which the function has not been enabled (the Selectivity Actor parameter
has not been assigned value: True)
A line inconsistency (regardless of the diagnosis) is indicative of a possible configuration error (example: a hardware input of the release is connected to the hardware output of a device not associated via Link Bus, or of an actor for which the function has not been enabled). · to prevent a line inconsistency from being signaled, devices whose hardware outputs are connected to the
hardware inputs of Ekip Touch must also be connected to the Link Bus and associated with Ekip Touch, while the function need not be enabled for them (the Selectivity Actor parameter need not be assigned value: True)
91 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 10 - Logic selectivity
11 - Performance table
ABB | SACE Emax 2
General notes:
· The performance values given in the next table are valid with 100 ms trip time, temperature and signals within the operating limits; failure to comply with these limitations could lead to an increase in the tolerances.
· Ekip Touch sends the TRIP command if the signal read exceeds the threshold for longer than the set time (or the time resulting from the calculation formula)
· With an inverse time-delay trip curve, the calculation refers to a signal with a constant value throughout the timing: variation of the alarm signal causes a different trip time
· The additional notes are given after all the tables
Standard Protections Protection [ANSI code]
Trip time t t (1)
Trip threshold tolerance (3) Trip time tolerance
L [49]
(with curve t = k / I 2)
Activation for If within range: with If 6 In: ± 10 % / with
(1.05 to 1.2) x I1
If > 6 In: ± 20 %
S [50TD / 51]
S2 [50TD] I [50]
(with curves 60255-151) t t = t2 ( with curve t = k )
(with curve t = k / I 2) t t = t5 t t 30 ms t t = t4 ( with curve t = k )
with If 6 In: ± 7 % / with If > 6 In: ± 10 %
with If 6 In: ± 7 % / with If > 6 In: ± 10 % ± 10 %
The best between ± 10% and 40 ms
with If 6 In: ± 15 % / with If > 6 In: ± 20 %
The best between ± 10% and 40 ms -The best between ± 10% and 40 ms (2)
G [50N TD / 51N]
MCR 2I [50]
(with curve t = k / I 2)
t t 30 ms
(10)
IU [46]
t t = t6
± 7 %
± 10 % ± 10 % ± 10 %
± 15 %
--with t6 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t6 < 5 s the best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms
Startup Protection [ANSI code] S StartUp I StartUp G StartUp
Trip time t t
t t = t2 startup t t 30 ms t t = t4 startup
S2 StartUp
t t = t5 startup
Trip threshold tolerance (3) Trip time tolerance
with If 6 In: ± 7 % / with If > 6 In: ± 10 % ± 10 %
± 7 %
with If 6 In: ± 7 % / with If > 6 In: ± 10 %
The best between ± 10% and 40 ms
--
The best between ± 10% and 40 ms
The best between ± 10% and 40 ms
92 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 11 - Performance table
Voltage protections Protection [ANSI code]
Trip time t t
UV [27] / UV2 [27] t t = t8 (t15)
OV [59] / OV2 [59] t t = t9 (t16)
VU [47]
t t = t14
Trip threshold tolerance (3) ± 2 % (4)
± 2 % (4)
± 5 % (11)
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Trip time tolerance
with t8 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t8 < 5 s: the best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms with t9 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t9 < 5 s: the best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms with t14 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t14 < 5 s: the best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms
Voltage Advanced protections
Protection
[ANSI code] S(V) [51V] / S2(V) [51V]
Trip time t t t t = t20 (t21)
RV [59N]
t t = t22
Trip threshold tolerance (3) ± 10 %
± 10 %
Trip time tolerance
with t20 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t20 < 5 s: the best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms with t22 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t22 < 5 s: the best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms
Frequency protections Protection [ANSI code]
UF [81L] / UF2 [87L]
OF [81H] / OF2 [87H]
Trip time t t t t = t12 (t17) t t = t13 (t18)
Trip threshold tolerance (3) ± 1 % (5)
± 1 % (5)
Trip time tolerance
with t12 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t12 < 5 s: the best between ± 10 % (min = 30 ms) and ± 40 ms with t13 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t13 < 5 s: the best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms
Power protections Protection [ANSI code] UP [32LF] OP [320F] RQ [40 o 32R] OQ [320F] D [67] RP [32R]
Trip time t t t t = t23 t t = t26 t t = t24 t t = t27 t t = t7 t t = t11
Trip threshold tolerance (3)
Trip time tolerance
± 10 %
with t23 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t23 < 5 s: the best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms
± 10 %
with t26 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t26 < 5 s: the best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms
± 10 %
with t24 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t24 < 5 s: the best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms
± 10 %
with t27 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t27 < 5 s: the best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms
with If 6 In: ± 7 % / with t7 400 ms: ± 40 ms / with t7 < 400 ms: with If > 6 In: ± 10 % ± 20 ms and ± 10%, whichever is the highest
± 10 %
with t11 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t11 < 5 s: the best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms
Startup Protection [ANSI code] D StartUp
UP StartUp
Trip time t t
Trip threshold tolerance (3)
t t = t7 startup ± 10 %
t t = t23 startup ± 10 %
Trip time tolerance
con t11 5 s: ± 100 ms / con t11 < 5 s: il migliore tra ± 10 % e ± 40 ms with t23 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t23 < 5 s: the best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms
ROCOF Protection
Protection [ANSI code] ROCOF [81R]
Trip time t t t t = t28
Trip threshold tolerance (3)
± 10 % (6)
Trip time tolerance the best between ± 20% and 200 ms
93 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 11 - Performance table
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Additional protections
Protection [ANSI code]
Gext [50GTD / 51G]
Rc [64 50N TD 87N] MDGF
Trip
time
t
(1) t
Trip threshold tolerance (3)
t t = t41 ( with curve t = k )
Trip time tolerance The best between ± 10% and 40 ms
(with curve t = k / I 2)
t t = tdn t = k t = k / l2
± 7 %
-20 % ÷ 0 ± 7 %
± 15 %
140 ms @ 0,06 s (9) 950 ms @ 0,8 s (9) The best between ± 10% and 40 ms ± 15 %
Startup
Protection [ANSI code] Gext StartUp
Trip
time
t
(1) t
t t = t41 startup
Trip threshold tolerance (3)
± 7 %
Trip time tolerance the best between: ± 10 % and ± 40 ms
Note on protections
(1) use trip and threshold current values expressed in In for calculating t t (example: If = 0.8 In, I1= 0.6 In) (2) with t4 = instantaneous, the maximum tolerance is 50 ms (3) Tolerance values valid with Trip unit at steady state or on with auxiliary power supply, trip time 100 ms,
temperature and signals within operating limits; the tolerances in the table after the notes are applicable if the
conditions are not guaranteed (4) the trip unit considers a 3% hysteresis for clearing from the alarm condition (5) tolerance valid for frequencies within range: fn ± 2 %. A ± 5% tolerance is applicable for off range
frequencies (6) ± 20% for threshold 0.4 Hz / s (9) maximum trip time (10) with If 18 kA, t t 3 ms;
with 18 kA > If I31 * 3, t t 7 ms (If three-phase) or t t 9 ms (If single-phase); with If < 18 kA and If < I31 * 3, t t 15 ms. (operating parameters guaranteed with Vaux auxiliary power supply) (11) tolerance valid with threshold U14 > 10%; with U14 10% (and >6%), the tolerance is 10%; with U14 <
5%, the tolerance is 15%
Performance guaranteed in all operating conditions
Protection L S I / 2I G Gext MDGF UF / UF2 / OF / OF2
RV
Other
Trip threshold tolerance Activation within range: (1.05 to 1.2) x I1 ± 10 % ± 15 % ± 15 % ± 15 % ± 15 %
± 2 %
± 10 %
--
Trip time tolerance ± 20 % ± 20 % 60 ms ± 20 % (60 ms with t4 = instantaneous) ± 20 % ± 20 %
± 20 %
± 20 %; in the case of single-phase self-supply: the highest between ± 20 % and 30 ms ± 20 %
94 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 11 - Performance table
12 - Functions
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Introduction
This chapter includes the trip curves of the protections, which are shown in different point charts:
· The curves are illustrated considering the minimum and maximum values and of the parameters of each protection.
· Protections with several curves (example: S protection), are shown in several graphs. · The curves do not take account of the effects of special parameters, such as thermal memory and startups.
NOTE: it is advisable to always use the mathematical function in the summary table of the protections to calculate the trip time (page 92)
This chapter illustrates the electronic trip curves of the available protections with all the protection trip units for SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers, represented in various dot diagrams. Some notes for reading the diagrams: · The curves are illustrated considering the minimum and maximum values and of the parameters of each
protection. · The curves do not take account of the effects of special parameters such as thermal memory, startup, etc. · Where version is not present, the curves are valid for both the IEC version and the UL version
NOTE: trip curve modeling software should be consulted when conducting a coordination or arc flash study as these are simplified representations of the protection curves.
Function L (t = k/I 2)
95 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
Function L (IEC 60255-151 SI)
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Function L (IEC 60255-151 VI)
96 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
Function L (IEC 60255-151 EI)
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Function L (t = k/I 4)
97 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
Function S (t = k/I 2)
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Function S (t = k) \ Function S2
98 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
Function I \ Function MCR
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Function 2I
18kA
99 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
Function G (t = k/I 2) \ Function Gext (t = k/I 2)
Function G (t = k) \Function Gext (t = k)
ABB | SACE Emax 2
100 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
Function MDGF (t = k/I 2)
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Function MDGF (t = k)
101 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
UL MAX SETTING 1200A 0,05 .. 1 IEC 0,05 .. 0,4 UL
Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
Function IU
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Function UV \ Function UV2
102 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
Function OV \ Function OV2
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Function VU
103 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
Function S(V) \ Function S2(V)
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Function RV
104 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
Function UF \ Function UF2
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Function OF \ Function OF2
105 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
Function RP
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Function D
106 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
Function OQ
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Function OP
107 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
Function UP
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Function RQ
108 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
Function ROCOF
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Function RC
109 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
Ekip Touch - Measurements
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - Standard Measurements
List The Standard measurements are:
Parameter Instantaneous currents Events Trip
Min-Max measurements
Maintenance Operation counters
Description Phase current and earth fault measurements in real time List of events, status changes, alarms, recorded by the Trip unit List of current protection trips (TRIP) History of minimum and maximum currents, recorded at a settable interval CB status: contact wear and last maintenance Number of mechanical and electrical operations
Page 110 110 110
112
113 113
Instantaneous currents The instantaneous currents, available in the Measurements pages, are real time measurements of the phase and earth fault currents expressed in root mean square value; the monitor time and performance depend on the rated current defined by the Rating plug (In):
Measurement
Phase currents (4) Internal earth fault current (2) External earth fault current (2) (5) Residual current (2) (5)
Monitor time (min-max) 0,004 ÷ 64 In 0,08 ÷ 64 In 0,08 ÷ 4 In 2 ÷ 32 A
Normal operating range 0,2 ÷ 1,2 In 0,2 ÷ 1,2 In 0,2 ÷ 1,2 In
Accuracy of value read (1) 1% (3) 2 % (3) 2 % 5 %
(1) the accuracies refer to normal operating ranges, as established by IEC 61557-12 (2) available with LSIG versions (3) accuracies based on Ekip Touch without Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package; if the Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package is present and for all other trip unit models, check the indicated performance values from page 117 (4) the higher phase currents are also available in the Histograms, Measuring instruments and Measurement summary pages (5) available by activating the presence of toroid S.G.R or Rc
Special representations
Type of measurement
Measurement < min value
Internal earth fault and phase currents
. . . .
External earth fault current
. . . .
Residual current
. . . .
Measurement < max value > [64 In]
> [4 In sensor]
> 32 A
"_ _ _" displayed: (not available) due to
Sensors disconnected
Sensor not activated and/or disconnected Sensor not activated and/or disconnected
110 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Measurements | 1 - Standard Measurements
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Events
Ekip Touch can record the last 200 events, mainly concerning variations in the status and operation of the unit; in particular:
· configuration status of the bus, operating mode, active set, auxiliary supply · connection statuses or alarms: current sensors, Trip Coil · connection statuses or alarms: current sensors, Rating Plug, Trip unit, Trip Coil · protections: timing in progress or alarm · trip: status of open command, signaling of trips due to protection
NOTE: the first event available in the list is the most recent one; having reached the 200-events threshold, the oldest events will be progressively overwritten
The complete list is available in the Measurements - Historicals - Events menu, where a set of information is given for each event: icon of the type of event, name of event, date and time recorded.
There are 4 icons that identify the type of event:
Icon
Description
Event reported for information purposes
Timing of a protection in progress, trip expected
Alarm referring to a non-dangerous condition
Alarm concerning operation, a fault or connection failure
Tripping Ekip Touch is able to record the last 30 TRIPs.
The complete list is available in the Measurements - Historicals - Trips menu, where useful information is given for each trip: · the protection that caused the trip · the consecutive number of the trip · the date and time of the trip (with reference to the internal clock) · the measurements associated with the tripped protection
NOTE: once the 30-TRIP threshold has been exceeded, the oldest trips are progressively overwritten
Correlated measurements The type of protection involved determines the measurements recorded at the moment of tripping:
Protection Current Temperature
Measurements recorded L1, L2, L3, Ne, Ig Currents L1, L2, L3, Ne Currents
Notes Ne is available with CBs type 4P and 3P + N; Ig is available in the case of trips due to G protection
The temperature cannot be displayed
Access to most recent trips
Besides being available in the Historicals menu, information about the most recent trips can be accessed in three different ways, depending on the conditions of Ekip Touch:
Condition
Trips that have just occurred with Ekip Touch on
Trips that have just occurred with Ekip Touch off Rapid consultation in all the other conditions
Access The main page is temporarily replaced by a trip information page; press the iTEST button to reset and go back to the normal screen page
Press the iTEST button to display the trip information page for a few seconds
Press the iTEST button four times from any page other than a menu, or a page accessed via a menu
111 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Measurements | 1 - Standard Measurements
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Min-Max measurements Ekip Touch records the maximum and minimum phase currents in the Measurements - Historicals Measurements menu The recording interval between one measurement and the next can be set via the Monitor time parameter, available in the Settings menu (page 46). Representation Select one of the measurements to access the graph page containing the records
Each measurement allows up to 25 recordings, each shown in a bar chart (graphic full scale equal to 125% of the rated value). The selected recording flashes, to distinguish it from the others. Touch the sides of the display to select the recordings after (1) and before (2) the selected recording. The command for quitting the page (3) is in the top left corner. The selected recording flashes, to distinguish it from the others. · time elapsed from previous measurement · phase and value of measurement · date and time of recording
NOTES: · if the value is less than the minimum viewable threshold, "..." is indicated instead of the value · graphic representation is in relation to 1 In, with 1.25 In as maximum value · the trip unit immediately makes a recording when the "Monitor time" parameter is changed Reset measurements The Reset measurements command is available in the Measurements - Historicals - Measurements menu, for the purpose of resetting all the recordings
112 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Measurements | 1 - Standard Measurements
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Maintenance Certain information about the status of the CB is available in the Measurements-Maintenance menu. Contact Wear Contact wear provides an estimation of the state of wear of the main contacts of the circuit-breaker. The value is given in percentage form and is 0% if there is no wear and 100% if the contacts are completely worn It is calculated automatically by the Trip unit whenever a trip is caused by a protection or, in the presence of auxiliary power supply, whenever the circuit-breaker is opened in the manual mode.
NOTES:
· the percentage is no longer increased once 100% has been reached · 80% wear is signaled by a prealarm, while 100% is signaled by an alarm IMPORTANT: 100% wear does not impose any functional limit on the Trip unit; however,
the state of the circuit-breaker must be checked as soon as possible
Maintenance The Maintenance function allows the user to be alerted by a Warning that: one year has elapsed since maintenance was last performed contact wear has increased by over 10% with respect to the last maintenance value Two areas are available in the Trip unit menu: · Activation area (Settings - Maintenance menu): allows the Maintenance function to be activated · Measurement and reset area (Measurements - Maintenance menu): only appears if the Maintenance
function is activated; provides information about maintenance (contact wear and dates) and the command for confirming that maintenance has been performed (confirming records the actual date and contact wear values, and resets the alarm signal). The reference date is that of the internal clock and the time elapsed is calculated with the trip unit both on and off (so long as the internal battery functions).
NOTE: manual modification of the date may cause variations to the elapsed time calculation, thus to the next maintenance date
NOTE: the maintenance signal due to increased contact wear is given for values exceeding 20%
Operation counters The CB operations (total manual operations and TRIPs) are recorded by the Trip unit in the presence of auxiliary power supply and are available in the About-Circuit breaker menu. The following counters are also available when communication with the Trip unit is activated: · number of mechanical operations · number of trips due to protection trips (TRIP) · number of trips due to failed protection trips (TRIP) · number of trip tests performed
113 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Measurements | 1 - Standard Measurements
2 - Ekip Measuring Measurements
ABB | SACE Emax 2
List The Measuring measurements are
Condition
Access
Instantaneous voltages
Phase and line-to-line voltage measurements in real time
Instantaneous powers
Real time measurements of the active, reactive, apparent phase and total powers
Instantaneous frequency Measurement of the line frequency
Trip
List of trips (TRIP) due to voltage, frequency, power protections
Min-Max-Med measurements
History of minimum, maximum and mean voltages and powers recorded within a settable range
Peak factor
Real time measurement of the peak factor of the currents
Power factor
Real time measurement of the power factor
Energy counters
Measurement of active, reactive, apparent energy
Page 114 114 114 115
115 115 115 115
The relative associated measurements are activated by means of the Ekip Synchrocheck module (page 223).
Instantaneous measurements Instantaneous currents, available in the Summary pages, are real time measurements of the line-to-line and phase voltages expressed in root-mean-square value.
Representation, measuring range and performance depend on the set rated voltage (Un).
Available in the Summary pages, the instantaneous powers are real time measurements of the phase and total active powers.
Representation, measuring range and performance depend on the set rated voltage (Un) and on the rated current defined by the rated size of the Trip unit (In); in addition, the reference changes on the basis of the type of measurement: · Sn for total powers (Sn = In * Un * 3). · Pn for phase powers (Pn = In * Un / 3).
NOTE: the phase powers and voltages are available with 4P and 3P + N CBs
Measurement
Monitor time (min-max)
Line-to-line voltages (6) 5 V ÷ 900 V (9)
Phase voltages
5 V ÷ 900 V (9)
Line frequency
30 ÷ 80 Hz (2)
Total active, reactive and apparent power (7)
|Pmin ÷ Pmax| (5)
Active, reactive and apparent phase power
|Pmin ÷ Pmax| (5)
Normal operating range 100 ÷ 690 V 50 ÷ 400 V f -10 % ÷ f +10 % (4)
|0,3 ÷ 1,2 Sn|
|0,3 ÷ 1,2 Pn|
Accuracy of value read (1) 0.5 % (8) 0.5 % (8) 0,1 % (3)
2 % (3)
2 % (3)
(1) the accuracies refer to normal operating ranges, as established by IEC 61557-12 (2) available for voltage values of over 30 V (with Un < 277 V) or 60 V (with Un > 277 V) (3) accuracies based on Ekip Touch without Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package; if the Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package is present and for all other trip unit models, check the indicated performance values from page 117 (4) 45 to 55 Hz with set frequency = 50 Hz; 54 to 66 Hz with f = 60 Hz (5) Pmin = 0,5 In x 5 V; Pmax= 3 x 16 In x 900 V (6) the higher line-to-line voltages are also available in the Histograms, Measuring instruments and Measurement summary pages (7) the higher total powers are also available in the Measuring instruments and Measurement summary pages (8) without transformers; 0.7 % with class 0.2 external transformers (9) without transformers; with transformers, multiply the min and max values for the transformer ratio between primary and secondary voltages
Continued on the next page
114 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Measurements | 2 - Ekip Measuring Measurements
Continued from the previous page
Special representations
Type of measure- Measurement <
ment
min value
Line-to-line and phase voltages
. . . .
Line frequency
30 Hz
Active, reactive and apparent total and . . . . phase power
Measurement < max value > [Un x 1,25]
80 Hz
> [Pn x 1,25]
ABB | SACE Emax 2
"_ _ _" displayed: (not available) due to Measurement module not detected Measurement module not present, V < 5 V Sensors disconnected, Measurement module not present, V < 5 V, I < 0.03 In
Tripping The Measuring Measurements page adds to the range of TRIPs that Ekip Touch is able to record (page 115).
The voltage, frequency or power protection that trips determines the measurements recorded the moment the trip occurs
Protection Voltage Frequency Power
Measurements recorded Currents L1, L2, L3, Ne, voltages U12, U23, U31, U0
Currents L1, L2, L3, Ne and grid frequency
Currents L1, L2, L3, Ne and total power
Notes
Ne is available with CBs type 4P and 3P + N; U0 is available in the case of trips due to RV protection
Ne is available with CBs type 4P and 3P + N
Ne is available with CBs type 4P and 3P + N; Active or apparent total power depending on which protection tripped
Min-Max-Med measurements
The Measuring Measurements package adds to the range of measurements that Ekip Touch is able to record (page 111):
· Maximum and medium voltage · Active, reactive and apparent maximum and medium powers
The type of information given, the available commands and notes are the same as those described for the current measurements.
NOTES:
· compared to the current measurements, graphic representation is with respect to 1 Un (with maximum value 1.25 Un) for the voltage recordings and with respect to 1 Sn (with maximum value 1.25 Sn) for the power recordings
· and the power measurement is negative, the color of the corresponding bar is different from those with a positive value
Peak factor The peak factors are real time measurements of the ratio between the peak and RMS values of the phase current; the measurement is supported by the Harmonic distortion protection function (page 61).
Measurement Peak factor
Monitor time 0,3 ÷ 6In
Accuracy 1,5%
Notes
"_ _ _" (not available) is indicated for currents outside the range and disconnected sensors
115 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Measurements | 2 - Ekip Measuring Measurements
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Power factor The power factor is the real time measurement of the ratio between total active power and total apparent power, expressed as cos .
Measurement Power factor
Monitor time 0,5 ÷ 1
Accuracy 2,5% (1)
Notes
"_ _ _" (not available) is indicated for: active and/or reactive power not available or outside the admissible ranges
(1) accuracy based on Ekip Touch without Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package; if the Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package is present and for all other Trip unit models, check the indicated performance values from page 117
Energy counters The energy counters are the measurements of the total reactive and apparent active energy, updated every minute.
Measurement
Total active, reactive and apparent energy
Monitor time 1 kWh ÷ 2 TWh; 1 kVARh ÷ 2 TVARh; 1 kVAh ÷ 2 TVAh
Accuracy 2 % (1)
(1) accuracy based on Ekip Touch without Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package; if the Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package is present and for all other Trip unit models, check the indicated performance values from page 117 Reset measurements
The Energy RESET command is available in the Energy menu for the purpose of resetting the energy counters (page 45).
116 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Measurements | 2 - Ekip Measuring Measurements
3 - Class 1 Power & Energy Metering
ABB | SACE Emax 2
List and performance Presence of the Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package allows higher measuring accuracy to be obtained for the following quantities:
Measurement
Phase currents (6)(8)
Internal earth fault current (2)
Line frequency Total active and apparent power (7) Active and apparent phase power Total active and apparent energy
Power factor
Monitor time (min-max)
0,004 ÷ 64 In
0,08 ÷ 64 In 30 ÷ 80 Hz (3) |Pmin ÷ Pmax| (5)
|Pmin ÷ Pmax| (5) 1 kWh ÷ 2 TWh; 1 kVARh ÷ 2 TVARh; 1 kVAh ÷ 2 TVAh 0,5 ÷ 1
Normal operating range
Standard IEC61557-12, tables 20-22
Standard IEC61557-12, table 20 fn ± 10 % (4)
Standard IEC61557-12, tables 8-11-14
Standard IEC61557-12, tables 8-11-14
Standard IEC61557-12, tables 8-11-14
Standard IEC61557-12, table 27
Accuracy of read value 0,5 % (1)
0,5 % (1) ± 0,02 Hz 1 % (1)
1 % (1)
1 % (1)
1% (1)
(1) the accuracy values refer to the normal operating intervals and conditions established by IEC 61557-12, for
each quantity and class declared (2) available with LSIG versions (3) available for voltage values of over 30 V (with Un < 277 V) or 60 V (with Un 277 V) (4) 47 ÷ 55 Hz with fn = 50 Hz; 54 ÷ 66 Hz with fn = 60 Hz (5) Pmin = 0,5 In x 5 V; Pmax= 3 x 16 In x 900 V (6) the higher phase currents are also available in the Histograms, Measuring instruments and Measurement
summary pages (7) the higher total powers are also available in the Measuring instruments and Measurement summary pages (8) internal phase current; in the presence of an external Neutral, the accuracy of current Ne is 1%
Functional characteristics The measuring performance of the Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package is guaranteed in the following conditions (from table 43 of standard IEC61557-12):
Characteristic
Value
Classification of performance measuring and monitoring device (PMD) in accordance with chapter 4.3 of the standard
PMD-DD
Temperature
Operating: T= -25°C to +70°C; Storage: T = -30°C to +70°C; Class: K70
humidity and altitude
Up to 90% relative humidity without condensation; From 0 to 2000 meters
Performance class for active energy and power 1
Information page Presence of the Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package activates the IEC61557 12 information page, which can be consulted in the About menu
Figure 28
The page shows the activation state of the Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package (Activated/Deactivated) and the serial numbers of certain accessories installed on the CB for the specific purpose of conforming to the characteristics of the package (electronic units and internal current sensors)
117 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Measurements | 3 - Class 1 Power & Energy Metering
4 - Datalogger
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Presentation
Datalogger
The datalogger is a function which allows data associated with a trigger event to be recorded. The following data are recorded:
· Analog measurements: line-to-line voltages and phase currents · Digital events: protection events or alarms, circuit-breaker status signals, protection trips.
One or two independent recordings can be configured and, via Ekip Connect, all the associated information can be downloaded, displayed and saved.
Function When the datalogger is enabled and activated (RESTART), Ekip Touch continuously acquires data by filling and emptying an internal buffer (B).
If a trigger event (A) occurs, Ekip Touch interrupts acquisition (STOP) immediately or after a time that can be set by the user (C) and stores all the data of the window (D), which can then be downloaded to a PC for reading and analysis.
IMPORTANT: the function requires an auxiliary voltage supply
Figure 29
Parameters 1 The parameters and commands of the function are available in the Settings menu (page 46).
Parameter
Enable
Num. of Datalogger
Sampling frequency
Datalogger 1 and 2 Restart and Stop Both
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the function and its availability in the parameters
menu NOTE: il the enable command is hidden when at least one
Off
datalogger is activated
Determines the number of recordings (1 or 2) NOTE: the recordings share the settings of the sampling frequency 1 and type of memory
Establishes the number of samples acquired per second and the recording window. Four options are available: 1200 Hz (window= 13.6 s), 2400 Hz (6.8 s), 4800 Hz (3.4 s), 9600 Hz (1.7 s)
NOTE: · A high frequency allows the data to be analyzed more accurately · if there are two dataloggers, the recording window of each recording is halved
9600 Hz
Menu with the parameters of each Datalogger: trigger event, recording delay and Restart/Stop commands
Synchronized start and stop commands of the two dataloggers, valid and available with Num. of Datalogger = 2
118 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Measurements | 4 - Datalogger
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Parameters 2 The Datalogger 1 and Datalogger 2 submenus (available if the number of dataloggers selected is: 2) contain the following options:
Parameter
Stop Event
Stop delay Restart Stop
Description
Default
Trigger event at which the recording is to be interrupted; the main protection options (trips, timings, alarms) and the actuator status (open/ closed) are displayed. The Custom option can be configured via Ekip Connect
None
Recording interruption delay, calculated from the trigger; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0 s to 10 s, in 0.01 s steps
0.01 s
Recording start command
Manual recording stop command
Memory Type
Ekip Connect enables the Memory Type (Non volatile/Volatile) to be selected: · Non volatile: Ekip Touch maintains the registration even when off; the life of the internal battery of the unit
can be sensibly less than the declared value in the absence of auxiliary power supply. · Volatile: Ekip Touch loses the recording if it is switched off; when the unit is switched on again, the datalogger
automatically restarts, losing the previously stored data. The parameter is configured by default as Non volatile.
Signallings If there is a recording present, Ekip Touch provides the information on the diagnosis bar (DataLog available).
NOTE: Ekip Touch provides a general indication of recording availability in the configuration with 2 dataloggers: use Ekip Connect to identify which of the 2 recordings (or both) is
available
Ekip Connect
Ekip Connect 3 has two specific areas for the Datalogger function:
· Datalogger for configuring the recording parameters with a user-friendly interface, and for downloading the recordings
· Data Viewer for opening and consulting the recordings
Both areas are available in the Tools menu of Ekip Connect.
119 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Measurements | 4 - Datalogger
5 - Network Analyzer
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Presentation The Network Analyzer function allows you to set voltage and current controls over a long period, in order to analyze your system.
To this purpose, voltages and currents are monitored, so as to find:
· voltage sequences (Over, Under, Pos and neg) · unbalance between voltages (Unbalance) · short voltage drops (Interruption) and slow sags (Sag) · short voltage increases (Spikes) and slow swells (Swell) · harmonic distortion of voltages and currents (THD)
Each monitoring is associated with control parameters set by the user and updated each time the set control conditions occur.
Parameters The configuration parameters of the counters are available in the Settings - Network Analyzer menu (page 46).
The Monitor time parameter, which defines the length of each monitoring session, can also be set in the Settings menu.
NOTE: the parameter is the one used for measuring the maximum currents and voltages
Main Menu
Parameter Enable I Harmonic Analysis V Harmonic Analysis V Threshold Low
V Threshold High
Unbalance V Th
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the function and its availability in the parameters menu
Off
Activates harmonic analysis of the currents
Off
Activates harmonic analysis of the voltages
Off
Control threshold of the Under V Th counter The value is given as a percentage of rated voltage Un and can be set 85 % Un within the range: 75% to 95%, in 5% steps.
Control threshold of the Over V Th counter The value is given as a percentage of rated voltage Un and can be set 110 % Un within the range: 105, 110, 115 % Un
Alarm threshold for the Unbalance counter.
The value is given as a percentage of rated voltage Un and can be set
within the range: 2% to 10% Un, in 1% steps.
3 % Un
NOTE: 0% =symmetrical and balanced system
V microinterr. Th
Control threshold of the V microinterr counter. The value is given as a percentage of rated voltage Un and can be set 95 % Un within the range: 10% to 95% Un, in 5% steps
Control threshold of the Spike counter. V Spike Threshold The value is given as a percentage of Un and can be set within the
range: 105% to 125% Un, in 5% steps
105 % Un
Sags
Menu with the control parameters of the voltage sags
Swells
Menu with the control parameters of the voltage swells
Harmonics
The submenu, which becomes available by enabling the harmonic current and/or voltage analysis, allows the harmonic control parameters to be configured
Continued on the next page
120 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Measurements | 5 - Network Analyzer
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Sags Menu All the thresholds are given as a percentage of rated voltage Un and can be set from 10% to 95% Un, in 5% steps.
All the times are given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.04 s to 60 s, in variable steps
Parameter Description
V sag Th Short Control threshold of Sags Short counter
V sag dur Short
Minimum duration of sag below the Short threshold to validate the count of the Sags Short counter
V sag Th Middle Control threshold of Sags Middle counter
V sag dur Middle
Minimum duration of sag below the Middle threshold to validate the count of the Sags Middle counter
V sag Th Long Control threshold of Sags Long counter
V sag dur Long
Minimum duration of sag below the Long threshold to validate the count of the Sags Long counter
Default 10 % Un 0,8 s 45 % Un 0,8 s 95 % Un 0,8 s
NOTE: Ekip Touch accepts changes to the parameters subject to compliance with the following limitations: V sag dur Long V sag dur Middle V sag dur Short
Swells Menu (Swell) All the thresholds are given as a percentage of rated voltage Un and can be set from 105% to 125% Un, in 5% steps.
All the times are given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.04 s to 60 s, in variable steps
Parameter Description
V swell Th Short Control threshold of the Swell Short counter
V swell dur Short
Minimum duration of swell above the Short threshold to validate the count of the Swell Short counter
V swell Th Long Control threshold of the Swells Long counter
V swell dur Long
Minimum duration of swell above the Long threshold to validate the count of the Swells Long counter
Default 125 % Un 0,8 s 105 % Un 0,8 s
NOTE: Ekip Touch accepts changes to the parameters subject to compliance with the following limitations: V sag dur Long V sag dur Middle V sag dur Short
Harmonics (Current and Voltage)
All the thresholds are given as a percentage and can be set within the range: 5% to 20% (total THD) or: 3% to 10% (single harmonics) in 1% steps.
Menu Current
Voltage
Parameter THD Threshold
Single harmonic th
THD Threshold
Single harmonic th
Description Control threshold of the THD Voltages counter
Default 5 %
Control threshold of the single harmonics counters of the voltages 5 %
Control threshold of the THD Current counter
5 %
Control threshold of the single harmonics counters of the currents 5 %
121 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Measurements | 5 - Network Analyzer
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Counters - introduction The main counters of the function are available in the Measurements Network Analyzer menu, distributed among several sections (page 45). The extended list of all the measurements is available via Ekip Connect or by connecting to the bus system
NOTE: the Additional List item in the following paragraphs contains the additional counters that are only present via Ekip Connect; the type of reference counter is given in the
heading of the additional tables
V Sequences and V 3s Submenus V Sequences and V 3s Sequences have the following counters:
Sequences Menu
Parameter Description
V seq pos
Positive sequence of period in progress [V]
V Sequences
V seq neg
Negative sequence of period in progress [V]
Last V pos seq Positive sequence of period preceding the one in progress [V]
Last V neg seq Negative sequence of period preceding the one in progress [V]
V seq pos
Positive sequence calculated during the last three seconds [V]
V 3s Sequence V seq neg
Negative sequence calculated during the last three seconds [V]
Unbalance
Voltage unbalance calculated during the last three seconds [%]
Additional List Counters (Sequences) Last time stamp Counters (Sequences) Last value Actual unbalance value Last time stamp
Actual number of U.
Actual [day -1 ... day -7] number of U. Cumulative number of U.
Description Date and time of last recording of the sequences
Description Voltage unbalance relating to the period in progress [%] Voltage unbalance relating to the period preceding the one in progress [%] Date and time of last recording of the unbalances Counts the number of times that the average value of the ratio between the positive on negative sequence (with direction of rotation 3-2-1) and negative on positive sequence (1-2-3) exceeds the Unbalance V Th threshold; the count refers to the actual day Counters relating to the number of unbalances detected in the last seven days of activity, calculated using the internal clock of the unit Cumulative counter of all the unbalances detected by the unit (sum of the other counters or to be increased also for the previous days?)
NOTE: all measurements of unbalances (Not balanced and Unbalance value) saturate at 200%
THD Current and THD Voltages The THD Current and THD Voltages submenus have the following counters:
Menu THD Current THD Voltages
Counters L1, L2, L3, Ne U12, U23, U31
Description Instantaneous harmonic distortion value of each current phase Instantaneous harmonic distortion value of each line-to-line voltage
122 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Measurements | 5 - Network Analyzer
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Over V Th and Under V Th Certain counters relating to the sequence measurements are available in the Counters - Day -1 and Counters - Cumulative submenus:
Counters Over V Th
Under V Th
Description
Counts the number of times that the average value of the positive sequence (in the set direction of rotation of the phases: 1-2-3) or negative sequence (in the set direction of rotation of the phases: 3-2-1) exceeds the V Threshold High threshold. The count refers to the reference menu interval (previous day or cumulative)
Counts the number of times that the average value of the positive sequence (in the set direction of rotation of the phases: 1-2-3) or negative sequence (in the set direction of rotation of the phases: 3-2-1) falls below the V Threshold Low threshold. The count refers to the reference menu interval (previous day or cumulative)
Additional List
Counters (Over Voltage) Last time stamp Last value Actual number of O. Actual [day -2 ... day -7] number of O.
Description Date and time of last recording of the Over V Th counter Value of the last swell above the Over V Th [V] threshold Over V Th count for the current day Over V Th count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the internal clock of the unit
Counters (Under Voltage) Description
Last time stamp
Date and time of last recording of the Under V Th counter
Last value
Value of the last sag below the Under V Th [V] threshold
Actual number of O.
Under V Th count for the current day
Actual [day -2 ... day -7] number of O.
Under V Th count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the internal clock of the unit
V microinterr. (Interruption) The V microinterr counter should be understood as reduction of the RMS value of the line-to-line voltage below the V microinterr. Th set threshold for less than 40 ms (short time voltage sag).
The counter is available in the two submenus Counters - Day -1 and Counters - Cumulative (previous day or cumulative)
NOTE: Since the counter is based on the RMS value calculation, two rapid voltage sags of equal duration may be evaluated differently, depending on when they occur:
Drop detected
Drop not detected
t
t
Additional List
Counters (Interruptions) Last instant Last value Last duration Actual number of I. Actual [day -2 ... day -7] number of I.
Description
Date and time of last recording of the V microinterr counter Value of last sag below the V microinterr [V] threshold Value of last sag below the V microinterr [ms] threshold V microinterr count for the current day V microinterr count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the internal clock of the unit
123 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Measurements | 5 - Network Analyzer
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Spikes The Spikes counter should be understood as increase of the RMS value of the line-to-line voltage above the set V Spike Threshold threshold for less than 40 ms (short time voltage spike).
The counter is available in the two submenus Counters - Day -1 and Counters - Cumulative (previous day or cumulative)
NOTE: Since the counter is based on the RMS value calculation, two rapid voltage spikes of equal duration may be evaluated differently, depending on their amplitude:
Increase detected
Increase not detected
t
t
Additional List
Counters (Interruptions) Last time stamp Last value Last duration Actual number of S. Actual [day -2 ... day -7] number of S.
Description
Date and time of last recording of the Spikes counter Value of last swell above Spikes [V] threshold Duration of last swell above Spikes [ms] threshold Spikes count for the current day Spikes count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the internal clock of the unit
Sags Certain counters relating to sags are available in the Counters - Day -1 and Counters - Cumulative submenus:
Counters (Interruptions) Sags Short
Sags Middle
Sags Long
Description
Counts the number of times that any line-to-line voltage falls below the V sag Th Short threshold for longer than V sag dur Short Counts the number of times that any line-to-line voltage falls below the V sag Th Middle threshold for longer than V sag dur Middle Counts the number of times that any line-to-line voltage falls below the V sag Th Long threshold for longer than V sag dur Long
The count refers to the reference menu interval (previous day or cumulative)
NOTE: since an event may fall under more than one category, only the counter of the main type (Long > Middle > Short) is increased
Additional List
Counters (Interruptions) Last time stamp Sags Middle Sags Long Actual number of S. Actual [day -2 ... day -7] number of S.
Description
Date and time of last recording of the Sags Short counter Value of last sag below the Sags Short [V] threshold Duration of last sag below the Sags Short [ms] threshold Sags Short count for the current day Sags Short count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the internal clock of the unit
Continued on the next page
124 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Measurements | 5 - Network Analyzer
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Counters (Sags Middle) Last time stamp Sags Middle Sags Long Actual number of S. Actual [day -2 ... day -7] number of S.
Description
Date and time of last recording of the Sags Middle counter Value of last sag below the Sags Middle [V] threshold Duration of last sag below the Sags Middle [ms] threshold Sags Middle count of the current day Sags Middle count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the internal clock of the unit
Counters (Sags Middle) Last time stamp Sags Middle Sags Long Actual number of S. Actual [day -2 ... day -7] number of S.
Description
Date and time of last recording of the Sags Long counter Value of last sag below the Sags Long[V] threshold Duration of last sag below the Sags Long[ms] threshold Sags Long count of the current day Sags Long count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the internal clock of the unit
Swells Certain counters relating to swells are available in the Counters - Day -1 and Counters - Cumulative submenus:
Counters (Sags Middle) Swells Short
Swells Long
Description
Counts the number of times that any line-to-line voltage exceeds the V swell Th Short threshold for longer than V swell dur Short Counts the number of times that any line-to-line voltage exceeds the V swell Th Long threshold for longer than V swell dur Long
The count refers to the reference menu interval (previous day or cumulative)
NOTE: since an event may fall under more than one category, only the counter of the main type (long > short) is increased
Additional List
Counters (Swells Short) Last time stamp Last value Last duration Actual number of S. Actual [day -2 ... day -7] number of S.
Description
Date and time of last recording of the Swells Short counter Value of last swell above Swells Short [V] threshold Duration of last swell above Swells Short[ms] threshold Swells Short count for the current day Swells Short count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the internal clock of the unit
Counters (Swells Long) Last time stamp Last value Last duration Actual number of S. Actual [day -2 ... day -7] number of S.
Description
Date and time of last recording of the Swells Long counter Value of last swell above Swells Long[V] threshold Duration of last swell above Spikes[ms] threshold Swells Long count for the current day Swells Long count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the internal clock of the unit
125 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Measurements | 5 - Network Analyzer
ABB | SACE Emax 2
THD Voltages and Currents Certain counters relating to harmonic distortion are available in the Counters - Day -1 and Counters Cumulative submenus:
Counters (Swells Long) THD Voltages
THD Current
Description Counts the total number of minutes in which total distortion exceeds current threshold THD Threshold
Counts the total number of minutes in which total distortion exceeds voltage threshold THD Threshold
NOTE: the counters saturate at 65535 minutes (45 days); they can be reset by a service connector command (via Ekip Connect) or via communication from the system bus
Additional List
Counters (Swells Long) Actual minutes Actual [day -2 ... day -7] number of THD C.
Description THD Current count for the current day [min]
THD Current count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the internal clock of the unit
Counters (Swells Long) Actual minutes
Actual [day -2 ... day -7] number of THD C.
Description THD Voltages count for the current day [min]
THD Voltages count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the internal clock of the unit
Waveforms
The Network Analyzer - Waveforms menu provides graphic representations of: · phase currents L1, L2, L3, Ne (for units configured with 4 phases) · line-to-line voltages V12, V23, V31 When one of the available quantities is selected, Ekip Touch acquires and displays the waveform
Figure 30
The detected waveform and the value at the time of selection are displayed in the window that appears. A new waveform and the relative measurement can be acquired with the Refresh command (1). Harmonics The waveform window will propose the Harmonics (2) command if harmonic analysis of currents and/or voltages has been selected. This command accesses the histogram of the harmonics (relating to the grid frequency set in the menu) that make up the waveform.
Figure 31
Touch the sides of the display to scroll the harmonics after (3) and before (4) the selected harmonic, displayed on a flashing graph with value shown in the center of the page. The command for exiting the page is at the top left (5).
126 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Measurements | 5 - Network Analyzer
Ekip Touch - Settings
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - Main settings
Foreword All the following parameters are available either directly, or from the Settings menu, in the conditions established by Ekip Touch on the basis of the version and configuration described. To correctly address parameters which are present in the menu but not described below: · Circuit-breaker: Hardware Trip, T Protection, Neutral Protection · Phase Sequence · Monitor time · Power Controller · Load Shedding · Network Analyzer · Datalogger · Dual Set · Functions please consult the Settings menu overview (page 46).
WARNING! changes to the settings must be made in the absence of protection alarms
Bluetooth Low Energy - The Bluetooth antenna on the Trip unit can be activated in the Bluetooth Low Energy menu. This is useful Connection security for launching a communication with an external device (tablet, smartphone) according to the Bluetooth Low Energy protocol, via the EPiC APP (page 11). Activation of Bluetooth Low Energy communication requires the Trip unit to be pre-engineered for a wireless connection: security of the data and Bluetooth Low Energy connection between the Trip unit and its device is guaranteed thanks to the ABB EPiC application and the pairing configuration described in the next paragraph.
WARNING! It is the customer's sole responsibility to provide and continuously ensure a secure connection between his device and the Trip unit. The plant manager
must establish and maintain appropriate measures (such as but not limited to the installation of malware prevention systems, application of authentication measures, his own system and interface against any kind of security breach, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or information. ABB and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to such security breaches, unauthorized accesses, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or information, use of APPs other than those allowed.
ABB recommends a few general configurations to strengthen the access of data into the Trip unit: · activate the access PIN code in the Trip unit configure it with a value differing from the default value · if parameters need not be written, configure the Trip unit only for parameter readout via bus (Test bus
parameter = Off) · switch off the Bluetooth Low Energy antenna (Bluetooth Low Energy-Enable parameter= Off) after use
IMPORTANT: communications via wireless and via service connector function alternatively: if Bluetooth Low Energy is activated there can be no communication
with other accessories via the service connector
127 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Settings | 1 - Main settings
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Bluetooth Low Energy - The following parameters are available Parameters Parameter Description
Default
Enable
Enables/disables Bluetooth Low Energy antenna switch-on and availability of the other parameters in the menu: · if On, the antenna comes on, on the basis of the Battery Mode parameter Off configuration · if Off, the antenna is off
Defines the switch-on mode of the Bluetooth Low Energy antenna, based
on the presence of the devices on the service connector (Ekip T&P, Ekip
Programming, Ekip TT); can have two values:
· --- ; with this option, the state of the antenna depends esclusively on the
presence of devices: on if not present; off if present
· ON ; with this option, the antenna is switched off for 15 seconds when
Battery mode a device is connected, after which: it remains off if communication with
---
the device has been activated; it comes on if no communication has been
activated
IMPORTANT: the typical scenario in which Battery mode should
be configured = On is: Ekip Touch + Ekip TT + communication
with smartphone activated; in all other cases, including System
Update, configure Battery mode = ---
Start Pairing
Command which starts Pairing between Trip unit and external device. To
perform the operation correctly:
1. Press Connect on EPiC APP, select the Trip Unit from among the units in
the list and then select Connect again
2. Press Start Pairing in the Trip unit menu, enter the PIN, then press Start
Pairing again
3. Press Start Pairing on EPiC APP and confirm the operations until the code
request appears 4. Check that the pop up with the Passkey appears on the display of the Trip
---
unit (about 20 seconds) and enter it in EPiC APP
5. The Trip unit will be connected to the external device from this moment on;
for the successive re-connections, it will be sufficient to just repeat point 1
NOTES:
· execute the procedure within 120 seconds
· the command is not available if communication with a device is
activated
Decouple devices
Command that deletes the list of devices coupled to the Trip unit NOTE: the command is not available if communication with a device is --activated
Version
FW version of the Bluetooth Low Energy module installed on board
---
IMPORTANT: when Bluetooth Low Energy antenna is on, communication on the service connector is not available
IMPORTANT: if Bluetooth is disabled during the order (with the extracode) or disabled by a Service L3 authorized person, the dedicated menu will neither be present,
nor visible nor usable. The icons will not be shown on the screen if Bluetooth is disabled
128 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Settings | 1 - Main settings
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Configuration The Circuit breaker-Configuration menu, allowing the presence of the External neutral sensor to be activated, is available for the 3P CB (page 234).
Activation of the configuration with External neutral (3P + N) enables: · histograms of phase Ne in the Histograms page · neutral current measurements · submenu for configuring the Neutral protection (Neutral Protection) · neutral current recording in the case of TRIP With 3P CB, the parameter is set by default as: 3P.
Ground protection
In the earth Circuit-breaker-Protections menu of the LSIG version of Ekip Touch you can:
· activate/deactivate the presence of external toroid S.G.R and relative Gext protection (page 233, 84). · activate the presence of Rc Toroid and relative protection (page 233, 87). · activate/deactivate the MDGF transformer presence and relative MDGF protection.
NOTE: Rc Toroid can be activated if the Measuring Measurements package and Rc version Rating plug are present; sensor presence in the menu can only be deactivated afterwards
by replacing the installed Rating plug
With Ekip Touch LSIG, the parameter is set by default as: Absent.
Line frequency Frequency adjustment is performed to set the installation frequency; the choice is between 50 Hz and 60 Hz. NOTE: the measurements are taken on the basis of the set grid frequency: incorrect configuration of the parameter may lead to abnormal measurements and protection
Ekip Touch is supplied with the parameter setting that suits the ordered configuration.
Modules The Modules menu provides various options:
Parameter
Description
Default
Local/Remote
The parameter defines the mode in which the parameters are written in the unit: · Local: parameter editing only via the display or service connector · Remote: parameter editing only remotely (Ekip Com modules)
NOTES: · the Remote mode requires the presence of auxiliary power
supply and Ekip Com modules, otherwise it disables automatically · However, the Local/Remote parameter can still be edited in the
Remote mode
Local
Local bus
The parameter enables communication between the Trip unit and modules
installed via terminal box or outside the unit to be activated.
Correct communication between unit and modules is confirmed by:
· population of the Modules menu with all the modules connected
Off
· Power Leds of the modules on and synchronized like the power led of
Ekip Touch
· absence of Local Bus alarm in the diagnosis bar
Ekip Signalling 4K Menu with the parameters of the Ekip Signalling 4K module, if present
Ekip Measuring Menu with the parameters of the module Measurement (page 184)
-
Menu of every module connected and detected (from page 191)
Functions
Access to the LOCAL Switch On and RESET signaling functions (from page 89)
129 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Settings | 1 - Main settings
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Test Bus The parameter allows parameter editing via the service connector to be enabled/disabled, thereby limiting the possibility of configuring all the options on the display (in the Local mode) or via modules Ekip Com (in the Remote mode). Disabling the parameter, Local mode and using the password allow security against undesired modification by unauthorized persons to be increased.
NOTE: with Test Bus= Off, communication via service connector is still guaranteed (reading enabled)
Ekip Touch is supplied with the parameter set to: On.
System The System menu provides various options:
Parameter Date Time Language Password
Description Setting the current date Setting the current time Setting the language in display menus Password setting (page 50)
Default
English 00001
IMPORTANT: setting and checking Date and Time is important for all the recording functions (trips or measurements); in the event of date and time glitches, reset
and if necessary replace the battery inside Ekip Touch (page 256).
View The View menu provides various options:
Parameter Description
Enables the orientation of the Alarms List, Measuring Instruments and TFT orientation Main Measurements pages to be set. The options are: Horizontal, Vertical
clockwise, Vertical counter-clockwise
Customer page
Allows you to activate a supplementary information page, which can be accessed by pressing the iTEST button twice from any page with a diagnosis bar. The information on the new page can be configured via Ekip Connect (page 132)
Allows the current to be displayed in the Measuring instruments page to be Ammeter Phase set from among the following options: Imax, I1, I2, I3, Ne (only in the 4P or
3P + N configuration)
Voltmeter Phase
Allows the voltage to be displayed in the Measuring instruments page to be set from among the following options: Vmax, V12, V23, V31
Default Horizontal
Off
Imax Vmax
Maintenance The parameter allows an alarm, concerning maintenance of the unit, to be enabled/disabled. (page 113). Ekip Touch is supplied with the parameter set to: On.
130 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Settings | 1 - Main settings
2 - Additional settings
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Presentation Via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or system bus communication, you can: A description of the different functions is given below.
Programmable States There are sixteen independent programmable states identified by the letters A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, offering different solutions for event control.
Each programmable status can have two values: True or False. There are also various configuration parameters available: · Trigger: event or combination of several status activation events (up to 24, in AND or OR logic configuration). · On Delay: status activation delay calculated from trigger presence onwards. · Off Delay: status de-activation delay calculated from trigger absence onwards.
NOTE: the status activates if the trigger is present for longer than the On delay setting and de-activates if the trigger is absent for longer than the Off delay setting
Figure 32
The statuses can be used with external module Ekip Signalling 10K, on Link Bus or with the programmable functions, so as to convey the required signaling combination to the contacts.
Filters
Measuring filters can be activated on channels S.G.R. or MDGF and Rc and V0:
· GTE filter: available if the external toroid is present (S.G.R., MDGF or Rc). · V0 filter available with neutral connection activated
If the filter is activated, the measurements and specific protections (Gext or MDGF and Rc for GTE filter, and V0 for V0 filter) are dealt with differently: Ekip Touch applies a pass-band filter to the signal so as to measure the fundamental component only (50 or 60 Hz).
TAG Name, User data Tags that can be programmed by the user to facilitate remote identification of units.
NOTE: the Name TAG and communication address form the identification used by Ekip Connect for the connected devices
131 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Settings | 2 - Additional settings
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Customers Page Enabling and fields for editing the Customers page (5 information lines) that can be viewed on the display of the unit (page 130).
Installation Date of installation of unit
Load Profile Time The counter indicates the time that has elapsed since the last reset of the energy measurements. It is active and updated in the presence of at least one of the following: auxiliary supply or supply by Ekip T&P.
Led Alive
The parameter enables the behavior of the Power led of the Trip unit and of all the connected modules to be modified; if activated (Alive Mode on), the Power leds act in the following way:
· Ekip Touch: flashes at 0.5Hz frequency · Modules: if there are no communication errors, they synchronize with the led of Ekip Touch.
If deactivated, the Power leds on the respective devices come on with a steady light.
Open/Close Remote Direct Command
The parameter controls 2 different command packages for remote opening and closing:
· Enabled: command 7 and 8 valid (direct Open and Close commands). · Disabled: commands 7 and 8 not valid: in this case, remote opening and closing can still be obtained
using the programmable YC COMMAND and YO COMMAND functions and the Request circuit-breaker opening and Request circuit-breaker closing commands
Change Double Set of If activated, enables the set of parameters (Adaptive Protections) to be changed even when timing alarms parameters always are in progress.
Disabled by default.
Repeat zone selectivity S/I/G If Enabled, zone selectivity HW signals propagation logic applies in accordance with the table in the QT1 HW technical application notes. 1SDC007100G0205
If Disabled, the HW selectivity signal is not propagated by Ekip Touch
Zone selectivity input functions
The zone selectivity inputs and certain of the outputs can be configured in this section:
· Standard: input or output operation as per standard zone selectivity logic; all selectivity functions are set as Standard. (1SDC007100G0205 or 1SDC007401G0201)
· Customized: the event that activates the zone selectivity input or output can be selected.
IMPORTANT: in the Customized configuration, the only zone selectivity activation event is the one set and standard selectivity operation is therefore not active
(changes should only be made by expert technical personnel).
Glitch The commands of Glitches 16 to 23 activate the respective glitch registers, which can be used for customizing programmable functions or output contacts.
Wizard Reset Reset Wizard: the Wizard window appears on Ekip Touch at the first power-on and can be used to enter some of the parameters of the unit.
132 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Settings | 2 - Additional settings
Ekip Touch - Test
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - Test
Presentation The test area can be accessed on the display; the commands available in this area allow certain functions of the Trip unit to be checked; details of all the commands available in the Test menu are given below (page 47). Ekip T&P with Ekip Connect has a Test Protections section where the presence of current or voltage alarm signals can be simulated and times and trips can be checked.
Autotest The Autotest command starts an automatic sequence of the display and leds so as to enable their operation to be checked. The sequence comprises the following test phases: 1. Screen with message "www.abb.com". 2. Darkening of the display. 3. Color sequence with red, green, blue bands, with gradual increase of backlighting 4. Lighting up, for one second, of the Warning and Alarm leds.
NOTE: auxiliary power supply must be present in order to check the gradual increase of backlighting
Trip Test Selection of the Trip test command accesses the dedicated page where the operator is asked to press the iTEST key to confirm the test operation. An open command is transmitted to the Trip coil of the CB when the key is released.
IMPORTANT:
· the open command is sent with the circuit-breaker closed and in the absence of current · following a command, the user is responsible for checking the effective change in
status of the actuator and the information displayed: make sure that there are no alarms on the diagnosis bar before performing the test NOTE: to reset the TRIP signal, go back to the HOME page and press the iTEST key or transmit a TRIP RESET command (via Ekip Connect or remotely)
Test CB Selection of the Test CB command accesses a submenu with the Open CB and Close CB commands. The commands allow opening coil YO and closing coil YC to be activated, respectively: a window with the message "Test Executed" confirms that the command has been transmitted correctly. Correct operation of the entire command system (Trip unit, Ekip Com Actuator and opening and closing coils) is checked by opening and closing the circuit-breaker.
IMPORTANT:
· the open and close commands of the coils only function when the Trip unit is on and powered by an auxiliary supply
· make sure that the coils are connected to the supply source · release operation is checked by the commands: faults in Ekip Com Actuator or the
coils are not detected by the test
133 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Test | 1 - Test
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Signalling 4K The menu activates in the presence of module Ekip Signalling 2K and auxiliary power supply. The Autotest command is available in the menu; it activates the automatic output test sequence (contacts and leds) and provides for the following operations: · Opening of the output contacts and switching off of output leds · Closing in sequence of the four output contacts and switching on of the relative leds · Reset initial conditions
IMPORTANT: the Autotest command closes the contacts regardless of the configuration set by the user: the user is responsible for making the devices connected to the
modules secure, checking that the contacts have closed properly and that the leds have come on
Ekip Signalling 2K The menu activates in the presence of module Ekip Signalling 2K, auxiliary power supply and local bus enabled.
NOTE: a menu is available for each Ekip Signalling 2K module present, up to a maximum of three
The Autotest command is available in each submenu; it activates the automatic output test (Contacts and leds), input test (leds) and provides for the following operations:
1. Resetting of output contacts (= open) and leds (= off). 2. Lighting up of all leds in sequence (output and input) 3. Closing and switch-off in sequence of the two output contacts while the relative leds come on. 4. Reset initial conditions
IMPORTANT: the Autotest command closes the contacts regardless of the configuration set by the user: the user is responsible for making the devices connected to the
Ekip Signalling 2K modules secure, checking that the contacts have closed properly and that the leds have come on
ZoneSelectivity The menu has one or two sections, visibility of which depends on the protections available and enabled:
Submenus S Selectivity G Selectivity
Reference selectivity S, S2, D (Forward) G, Gext, MDGF, D (Backward)
Outputs/Inputs managed SZi (DFi), SZo (DFo) GZi (DBi), GZo (DBo)
Each submenu has three fields for checking selectivity inputs and outputs:
Field Input Force output Force Output
Description Provides the status of the selectivity input (On/Off) Selectivity output activated Selectivity output deactivated
Consult the description of the putting into service procedure when checking the selectivity contacts in the manuals 1SDH000999R1002 and 1SDH001000R1002.
RC test The command is available in the presence of Rating plug Rc and Rc toroid. Selection of the command accesses a window containing the protection settings and test instructions: 1. Press the iTEST button to send a test signal to the toroid. 2. The toroid sends Ekip Touch a signal as though it had measured an alarm current. 3. Ekip Touch sends a TRIP command.
IMPORTANT: the command sends a signal to the Rc toroid and concludes with a TRIP command: the user is responsible for checking that the initial connections are
correct (of the toroid and power supplies of the unit) and that TRIP is accomplished
134 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Test | 1 - Test
Ekip Touch - Additional functions
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - Zone Selectivity
Description Zone Selectivity is an evolution of time selectivity (see chapter "3 - Selectivity between ABB SACE circuitbreakers"), in which a dialog is created between the trip units through input and output blocking signals: an active input blocking signal means that the circuit-breaker must remain closed.
Specifically, if a trip unit with the function enabled detects a fault current higher than the threshold set for a particular protection, it activates the output blocking signal for the protection and, before opening, checks the corresponding input blocking signal: · If the input is not active, the trip unit opens with a delay equal to the selectivity time set for the protection
(which must be lower than the protection tripping time). · If the input is active, it opens only if the fault persists and with a delay equal to the tripping time of the
protection.
Zone Selectivity can be enabled via cabling (Hardware Selectivity) with ABB SACE circuit-breakers, not Emax 2, where available.
Besides Hardware Selectivity, SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers allow Logic Selectivity to be configured using the communication via Link Bus between releases equipped with Ekip Link module. For further details, consult paragraph "Zone Selectivity with SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers".
Zone Selectivity with ABB SACE circuit-breakers
With electronic trip units not for ABB SACE Emax 2:
· Zone selectivity can be implemented only for protections S I G and D (Directional). · If the function is available, the circuit-breaker is equipped with two blocking outputs and two blocking
inputs that is, one output and one input for each S, I and G protection), or as an alternative two outputs and two inputs for protection D (one output and one input per direction). · Since only two blocking outputs and two blocking inputs are available, Zone Selectivity for protections S, I and G and Directional Zone Selectivity are mutually excluding (to implement Directional Zone Selectivity, the S, I and G protections must be disabled, and vice versa). · To actuate Zone Selectivity, the releases must be equipped with auxiliary voltage to activate the outputs. · Zone selectivity for S and I protection share the same restrain signal · Each S G and D protection has two selectivity parameters: the function enabling parameter and selectivity time, meaning the opening time of the circuit-breaker if the selectivity input is not active. · For I protection the selectivity time is fixed (without possibilty to modify the value). · The blocking outputs and inputs are considered active if the level is high (equal to the auxiliary voltage). · For protection D, the selectivity time to be set is the same for both directions.
To obtain Zone Selectivity, the protections must be set, and the blocking outputs and must be wired, so that only those circuit-breakers capable of isolating the overload or fault without the rest of the installation being de-energized open. Regarding this:
· For each type of selectivity, definitions, operating principles, application fields, advantages and disadvantages, requirements, indications for setting the protections and examples are provided in the Technical Application Paper QT1 1SDC007100G0205 "Low voltage selectivity with ABB circuit-breakers".
· For Directional Selectivity, application examples are available in the White Paper 1SDC007401G0201 "Directional protection and directional zone selectivity".
135 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Additional functions | 1 - Zone Selectivity
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Zone Selectivity with SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers
With SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers, Zone Selectivity can be implemented:
· If the circuit-breakers are equipped with Ekip LCD or Touch trip units (including Hi-, G, and G Hi- trip units). · For protections S, I, G, D, 2I, MCR, S2, Gext, MDGF (availability depends on the trip unit model).
Hardware Selectivity operation is the same as that described in the previous section for SACE circuit-breakers other than Emax2, except for the addition of S2, Gext and MDGF in the list of protections supported.
NOTE: S2, Gext and MDGF share the same selectivity inputs/outputs of S (S2) and G (Gext and MDGF), respectively. If several protections are active with the same channels (e.g.:
S and S2) the trip unit controls the inputs and outputs with OR logic: configure the parameters
with care to avoid undesired signals or actions.
Logic Selectivity, which is available in the presence of Ekip Link modules, has different advantages:
· Each protection is independent. There are no cases of shared or exclusive channels/bits (example: selectivity D can be actuated without disabling protections S and G).
· Each device connected to Link Bus can be customized with many propagation parameters, mask, diagnosis.
Use of both types of selectivity or just logic selectivity can be selected on trip unit for each protection.
NOTE: for details on how to associate trip units connected to the same Link Bus, see the chapter "9 - Ekip Link".
Logic selectivity: setting
For each protection for which you wish to implement Zone Selectivity, you must set the function enabling among the available parameters. Then, in addition to these parameters, the selectivity time is also activated for the setting.
Otherwise, Zone Selectivity can only be set up via the Ekip Connect software. Specifically: · Logic selectivity can be implemented for a maximum of 12 of the 15 actors (trip units) that can be associated
to the trip unit via Link Bus (see the chapter "9 - Ekip Link"). · Only hardware selectivity or mixed selectivity (hardware and logic) must be selected in the Ekip Link
advanced selectivity page. · The IP address of each actor present must be entered in the Ekip Link configuration. Entry of the
address enables the configuration parameters and state indicators to be displayed in the various pages (see the chapter "1 - Power Controller"). · For each actor associated to the trip unit via Link Bus and for which you want to enable Logic Selectivity, the function must be enabled (the value "True" must be assigned to the Selectivity Actor parameter). · Selectivity masks are available for each actor present in the Ekip Link advanced selectivity page: the mask enables selection of the protections of the actors (S, G, D-Forward, D-Backward, S2, Gext, MDGF) that activate the selectivity input of the trip unit (example: actor 1, protection mask S = S2: selectivity S of the trip unit will be active in the presence of signals S2 of actor 1). · If selectivity has been enabled for protection S and the protection itself is in the alarm state, the following are activated on the output: the S/D-Forward hardware signal and logic selectivity bit S. In addition, with reference to the example, the circuit-breaker opening time varies on the basis of the state of the selectivity inputs and/or state bits: · if hardware signal S/D-Forward (SZi) and logic selectivity bits S2 and Gext of actor 1 are not active: the circuit-breaker is open during the selectivity time for protection S. · if hardware signal S/D-Forward (SZi) or, with mixed selectivity, logic selectivity bits S2 or Gext of actor 1 are active: the circuit-breaker is open during S protection time (if S protection is still in the alarm state once this time has elapsed).
IMPORTANT: if hardware-only selectivity is selected, the logical selectivity bits are ignored in input, but they are however activated in output.
NOTE: the S/D-Forward (G/D-Backward) hardware output is activated only if the protections S or D-Forward (G or D-Backward) are in alarm, and the S/D-Forward (G/D-Backward)
hardware input acts as a block only for the protections S and D-Forward (G and D-Backward), regardless of whether hardware-only or mixed selectivity is selected.
Continued on the next page
136 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Additional functions | 1 - Zone Selectivity
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
· Remote Programmable States A and B are also included in the selectivity masks: these 2 parameters, which are available in the Ekip Link configuration page, enable the event (or combination of several events) and reference actor that activate the selectivity input of the trip unit to be selected. 2 further states are available, C and D, but they cannot be configured for Zone Selectivity. All 4 programmable states are used for the Programmable Logic function described in chapter "9 - Ekip Link".
NOTE: The Programmable Logic function is different from that of Zone Selectivity.
Additional functions: repetition of selectivity information
The Repeat Configuration mask parameter is available in the Ekip Link advanced selectivity page. It enables the selection of protections whose logic selectivity bit, if present on the input, must be propagated regardless of the state of the protection on the current trip unit.
NOTE: the parameter only acts on the selectivity bits. It does not involve the hardware outputs.
Additional functions: diagnostics
In the presence of both hardware and logic selectivity, the diagnosis highlights any errors in the hardware selecitivity cabling by checking its continuity. In the Ekip Link diagnosis configuration page it is possible to: enable diagnosis, configure the interval of time between one inspection and the next, select the inputs to be checked for each active actor (S/D_ Forward, G/D_Backward).
Then: · A check is performed on the hardware inputs at regular intervals. · If, on the trip unit, the input of an actor is configured for diagnosis (e.g. input S of actor 3) and this input
is not active when the test is performed, the actor stimulates its output (e.g. actor 3 activates output S) for a short time: the trip unit considers the test result to be positive if it receives the signal correctly at its input, otherwise it will signal error. · the diagnosis check will not be performed if the hw input is active. · if the input configured for diagnosis is active when the test is performed, diagnosis check will not be performed and the Detection state in the Ekip Link state page will indicate: Unknown.
Error signals (inconsistency) · Regardless of the diagnosis, if a hardware input is active and none of the logic selectivity bits of the
associated actors is active, a line inconsistency for this input is reported in the Ekip Link state page.
NOTE: to check the line inconsistency, all the actors associated with the trip unit are checked, including those for which the function has not been enabled (i.e. the value "True" was
not assigned to the Selectivity Actor parameter).
· A line inconsistency (independently of diagnostics) is indicative of a possible configuration error (for example: a hardware input of the trip unit is connected to the hardware output of a trip unit not associated via Link Bus, or to an actor for which the function has not been enabled).
· Therefore, to avoid a line inconsistency being reported, the trip units whose hardware outputs are connected to the hardware inputs of the trip unit must also be connected to the Link Bus and associated to the trip unit (see the chapter "9 - Ekip Link") while it is not necessary (it is not necessary for the value "True" to be assigned to the Selectivity Actor parameter).
137 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Additional functions | 1 - Zone Selectivity
ABB | SACE Emax 2
2 - Generator protection
Description Specific protections and functions have been integrated into SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers equipped with Ekip LCD or Touch trip units (with Measurement enabler with voltage socket module), or Ekip Hi- or G or G Hi(LCD or Touch) trip units to protect low voltage synchronous generators against typical fault conditions and to connect the generators to the installation. This ensures solutions that are compact and simple to install, with no need to turn to indirect solutions.
Available information More information is available in the White Paper 1SDC007409G0202 "Generator protections: Ekip G trip unit for SACE Emax 2", which provides: · A list of the available protections and functions giving both the ABB name and the ANSI codes (example:
protection RQ, with ANSI codes 40 and 32R). · For each protection, the fault conditions to which it is applied (example: for protection RQ, the inversion
of the sign of the reactive power, positive if outgoing from the generator). · A description of the malfunctions that can lead to the above fault conditions (example: for reactive power
reversal, the loss of excitation and the consequent loss of the electromotive force, with reactive power absorption from the network by the generator). · The types of generator or installation in which such mulfunctions are most likely to take place (for example: reversal of reactive power, smooth rotor generators). · The consequences to which they may lead if the trip unit does not trip (example: for reversal of reactive power, a voltage drop, if the network is not able to supply the required reactive power with the consequent loss of system stability, and in any case an increase in temperature on the generator windings). · If the protection can be duplicated using the Hi- version of the trip unit, with the possibility of setting the two protections independently, and therefore with the possibility of adding redundancy to increase reliability, or to fine tune the adjustment of the protection. · For each protection, the parameters to be set, the trip curves and the criteria for the setting of parameters. · For each of the above parameters, the values that can be assigned. · For each protection, an application example. · The description of the synchronism function, which can be implemented with the Ekip Synchrocheck module (see the chapter "12 - Ekip Synchrocheck"), that permits the parallel connection of two independent power supply systems. For a summary of the fault conditions to which the protections are applied and of the parameters to be set, see the chapter "Ekip Touch - Protections" starting on page 51.
Compatibility To identify the trip units in which the protections are available, see the chapter "1 - Overview", and the chapter "4 - Menu" and the paragraph "Advanced menus".
138 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Additional functions | 2 - Generator protection
1 - Power Controller
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Description The Power Controller function allows the loads of an installation to be managed according to power consumption, for the purpose of reducing consumption and optimizing energy efficiency.
All the parameters and measurements of the function are available via Ekip Connect; however, the Trip unit allows certain of them to be set and displayed, as described below.
IMPORTANT: consult the Technical catalog or White paper of the function for full details (page 13, 16).
Ekip Touch Parameter Certain configuration parameters of the function are available in the Settings - Power Controller menu 46).
Parameter Enable Load Operating Mode
Power Limits
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the function and its availability in the parameters menu OFF
Enables the configuration of each of the 15 programmable loads to be set (from Load 1 to Load 15); either Automatic or Manual configuration can be selected
Manual
Enables 10 power limits to be set (from Power Limit 1 to Power Limit 10); the value is given in kW and can be set within range: 10 kW to 10000 kW, in 10 kW 10 kW steps
NOTE: to characterize the parameters of the function, it is advisable to first configure them via Ekip Connect and only then use the Trip unit to enable or modify the power limits and
loads
Ekip Touch Measure A specific page containing the main measurements is available in the Measurements pages, with Power Controller activated:
Measurement Ea T LOADS LOADS Shed Sp T
Description Expected energy Time elapsed in the evaluation window Number of loads monitored Number of shed loads Load shedding priority setting Evaluation window
The Power Controller menu, with information concerning the 15 loads in two submenus, is available in the About page when Power Controller is activated (page 47):
Submenus Load Input Status Load Active
Information provided Status of the loads (from Load 1 to Load 15): open or closed Load configuration (from Load 1 to Load 15): active or inactive
139 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Additional functions | 1 - Power Controller
2 - Load Shedding
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Description The Load Shedding function allows faults to be managed in installations which are able to function thanks to the energy produced by renewable and local energy sources, especially the absence of power supply caused, for example, by a fault on the MV voltage side.
This function is available in two versions: · Basic, supplied with all the Ekip Touch Trip units · Adaptive; can be purchased by means of the relative additional package and is available for all Trip units
with the Measuring Measurements package All the parameters and measurements of the function are available via Ekip Connect; however, the Trip unit allows certain of them to be set and displayed, as described below.
IMPORTANT: consult the Technical catalog or White paper of the function for full details (page 13, 16).
Ekip Touch Parameter Certain configuration parameters of the function are available in the Settings - Load Shedding menu (page46).
NOTE: it is advisable to first configure the parameters via Ekip Connect, and only then operate on the Trip unit
Parameter Enable Version Solar Plant present SolarPlant NominalPower ATS Generator Power
Frequency slope
F W Warning (1)
Reconnection Timeout
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the function and its availability in the parameters menu Off
Display of the version of the function, Basic or Adaptive
NOTE: with the Basic version, the only parameter available is
--
Reconnection Timeout
Establishes whether the microgrid includes a solar energy system (Off/On) Off
Available with Solar Energy System Present = On, defines the rated power of
its solar energy system. The value is given in kW and can be set within the range: 100 kW to 65535
100 kW
kW, in 1 kW steps
Establishes whether the installation has an ATS system (Off/On)
Off
Available with ATS=On, defines the power received from the ATS branch; can be set within the range: 0 kW (. . . .) to 10000 kW, in 1 kW steps
. . . .
Defines the instantaneous frequency variation that activates Load shedding The value is given as absolute value (Hz/s) and can be set within the range: 0,6 Hz/s 0.6 Hz/s to 10 Hz/s in 0.2 Hz/s steps
Control threshold of the minimum frequency that activates Load shedding The value is given as absolute value (Hertz) and can be set within the range: 3 Fn 0.9 Fn to 1.1 Fn in 0.001 Fn steps
Defines the time employed by the Trip unit between reconnection of one load and the next, after the main CB has reclosed. The value is given as absolute 10 s value (s) and can be set within the range: 1 s ÷ 1800 s, in 1 s steps
NOTE: Load shedding activates if the monitoring conditions defined by the Frequency slope and F W Warning parameters are present at the same time
140 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Additional functions | 2 - Load Shedding
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Touch Measure A specific page containing the main measurements is available in the Measurements pages, with Power Controller activated:
Measurement F Fn LOADS LOADS Shed
Description Frequency measured Nominal frequency of the Trip unit Number of loads monitored Number of shed loads
The Load Shedding menu, with information concerning the 15 loads in two submenus, is available in the About page when Load Shedding is activated (page 47).
Submenus Load Input Status Load Active
Information provided Status of the loads (from Load 1 to Load 15): open or closed Load configuration (from Load 1 to Load 15): active or inactive
141 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Additional functions | 2 - Load Shedding
3 - IPS Interface protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Description The IPS Interface protection function allows faults to be managed in installations which are able to function thanks to the energy produced by renewable and local energy sources, especially the absence of power supply, e.g. caused by a fault on the MV voltage side.
The function is available for all the Ekip Hi-Touch Trip units.
All the parameters and measurements of the function are available via Ekip Connect; however, the Trip unit allows protection 59 S1, V DIR, V INV and control thresholds Voltage stability, Frequency stability and F W1 to be set, as described below.
IMPORTANT: consult the Technical catalog or White paper of the function for full details (page 13, 16).
Protection 59.S1 [ANSI 59S1] The protection sends a TRIP command if the maximum mean value of the three line-to-line voltages, calculated in a 10-minute floating menu, exceeds the threshold for longer than the set time.
The Protections-Advanced menu includes the protection submenu in which the parameters can be entered:
Parameter Enable Trip Enable
Threshold
Time
Description Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
Establishes the value that activates the protection. The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) and can be set within the range: 1 Un to 1.3 Un, in 0.05 Un steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 3 s to 999 s, in 3 s steps
Default Off Off
1,1 Un
3 s
Limitations and additional functions
The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or communication via system bus (page 83).
Protection V DIR [ANSI 27VD] If the positive sequence measured by the Trip unit exceeds or falls below threshold Upos (depending on the direction set), the corresponding alarm will be activated (no TRIP).The Protections-Advanced menu includes the protection submenu in which the parameters can be entered:
Parameter Enable Direction
Threshold
Description Activates/deactivates the control threshold of the parameters and their availability in the menu
Defines whether sequence monitoring is performed after the measured sequence has dropped (Down) or been exceeded (Up)
Establishes the value that activates the alarm. The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) and can be set within the range: 0.1 Un to 1.5 Un in 0.05 Un steps
Default Off Down
0,8 Un
Protection V INV [ANSI 59VI] If the negative sequence measured by the Trip unit exceeds or falls below threshold Uneg, the corresponding alarm will be activated (no TRIP).
The Protections-Advanced menu includes the protection submenu in which the parameters can be entered:
Parameter Enable
Threshold
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates monitoring of the parameters and their availability in the menu
Off
Establishes the value that activates the alarm. The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) and can be set within the range: 0,05 Un 0.05 Un to 0.5 Un in 0.05 Un steps
142 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Additional functions | 3 - IPS Interface protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
VS Warning A warning signal is activated if all three of the line-to-line voltages measured by the Trip unit are within the window defined by the control thresholds for the set time.
The Protections-Advanced-Warnings menu includes the control threshold submenu in which the parameters can be entered:
Parameter Enable
Signal source
Threshold DOWN Threshold UP Time
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates monitoring of the parameters and their availability in the menu
Off
Defines whether the line-to-line voltages to be verified are those from the internal sockets (Measurement module) or from Ekip Synchrocheck, if present.
NOTE: if Ekip Synchrocheck is set, monitoring will refer to one single voltage
Meas.
Establishes the lower limit value of the control band, given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un), which can be set within the range: 0.5 0,9 Un Un to 1 Un in 0.001 Un steps
Establishes the upper limit value of the control band, given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un), which can be set within the range: 1 Un 1,1 Un to 1.5 Un, in 0.001 Un steps
This is the monitoring time that activates the signal; the value is given in seconds and can be set within a range: 0.1 s to 900 s, in 0.1 s steps
30 s
FS Warning A warning signal is activated if the frequency measured by the Trip unit is within the window defined by the control thresholds for the set time.
The Protections-Advanced-Warnings menu includes the control threshold submenu in which the parameters can be entered:
Parameter Enable
Signal source
Threshold DOWN Threshold UP Time
Description Activates/deactivates monitoring of the parameters and their availability in the menu
Defines whether the line-to-line voltages to be verified are those from the internal sockets (Measurement module) or from Ekip Synchrocheck, if present.
NOTE: if Ekip Synchrocheck is set, monitoring will refer to one single voltage
Establishes the lower limit value of the control band, given as both absolute value (Hertz) and relative value (Fn), which can be set within the range: 0.9 Fn to 1 Fn in 0.001 Fn steps
Establishes the lower limit value of the control band, given as both absolute value (Hertz) and relative value (Fn), which can be set within the range: 1 Fn to 1.1 Fn in 0.001 Fn steps
This is the monitoring time that activates the signal; the value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to 900 s, in 0.1 s steps
Default Off
Meas.
0,998 Fn 1,002 Fn 30 s
F W1 Warning If the frequency measured by the Trip unit exceeds or falls below the threshold (depending on the direction set), the corresponding alarm will be activated (no TRIP).
The Protections-Advanced-Warnings-F W Warnings menu includes the control threshold submenu in which the parameters can be entered:
Parameter Enable Direction
Threshold
Description Activates/deactivates the control threshold of the parameters and their availability in the menu
Defines whether frequency monitoring is performed after the measured sequence has dropped (Down) or been exceeded (Up)
Establishes the value that activates the alarm. The value is given as both absolute value (Hertz) and relative value (Fn) and can be set within the range: 0.9 Fn to 1.1 Fn in 0.001 Fn steps
Default Off Down
3 Fn
143 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Additional functions | 3 - IPS Interface protections
Ekip Touch - Default
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - Ekip TOUCH default parameters
Foreword Given the number of parameters available with Ekip Touch, each chapter describing their characteristics also includes their default value settings.
The configurations of the main parameters are given below.
Protections All Ekip Touch models are supplied with the protections (and relative correlated functions) off, with the exception of the protections listed below:
Protection L (1) I Harmonic distortion Rc (2)
Configuration I1= 1 In; t1= 144 s; curve= t= k/I 2; prealarm: 90% I1 I3= 4 In; startup= OFF On Idn= 3 A; Tdn= 0,06 s
(1) protection always active; a model L Disable rating Plug must be used to disable it (2) protection available and active if model Rc Rating Plus is present
Parameters Unless different specifications are requested when ordering, all Ekip Touch models are supplied with the following configurations:
Parameters Frequency Configuration Neutral Rated voltage Power flow Phase Sequence Local bus Mode Language Bluetooth Low Energy Password Home page Led Alive View Maintenance Test Bus Modbus RTU par Profibus DeviceNet TM Modbus TCP/IP
Configuration 50 Hz (IEC) / 60 Hz (UL) 3P (3P circuit-breaker) / 4P (4P circuit-breaker) Off (3P circuit-breaker) / 50% (4P circuit-breaker) 400 V Top Bottom 1-2-3 Off Local English Off 00001 Histograms Disabled Horizontal On On Address: 247; baudrate: 19.2 Kbit/s Address: 125 MAC ID: 63; baudrate: 125 Kbit/s Static IP: 0.0.0.0
144 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Ekip Touch - Default | 1 - Ekip TOUCH default parameters
Mechanical characteristics
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - E1.2 description
Description of circuit-breaker Emax E1.2 circuit-breakers consist of a structure containing the poles, the operating mechanism and the auxiliary parts. Each pole, enclosed in a plastic box, consists of a breaking part and a current transformer. The structure of the breaking part differs between selective or current-limiting circuit-breaker. The circuit-breaker is available in two types: · fixed version · withdrawable The circuit-breaker in fixed version (see Figure 33) has its own terminals for connection to the power circuit. The withdrawable circuit breaker consists of a mobile part (see Figure 34 for IEC and Figure 35 for UL) and of a fixed part (see Figure 36 for IEC and Figure 37 for UL) for connection through its own terminals to the power circuit. The coupling between the mobile part and the fixed part is via disconnection contacts mounted on the fixed part.
Figure 33
Figure 34
Figure 35
Figure 36
Figure 37 145 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 1 - E1.2 description
Description of the circuitbreaker front panel The following are the main components of the circuit-breaker:
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Figure 38
Pos. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2
3
1
9
8
4
7
6
5
Description Lever for manually charging the closing springs SACE Ekip protection trip unit Name of the circuit-breaker CB open (O) / closed (I) indicator Closing pushbutton Opening pushbutton Mechanical signalling of tripped TU Springs charged-discharged signalling device Electrical data plate
Description of electrical data plate IEC
11 10 9 8 7 6
Figure 39
Pos. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
146 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
1
23
4
5
Uimp 12Kv
12
Description Type of circuit-breaker Utilization category Device type: Circuit-breaker or switch-disconnector Rated current Rated operating frequency Admissible rated short-time current Rated duty short-circuit breaking capacity Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Rated service voltage Standards Circuit-breaker serial number Impulse voltage
Continued on the next page Mechanical characteristics | 1 - E1.2 description
Description of electrical data
plate UL
1
ABB | SACE Emax 2
2
SACE E1.2S-A
Iu 1200A
8
S/ N: 000000000000000
ABB SA CE M ade in Italy
FX X X X X X X X X X
7
ANSI C37.13 - UL1066
50-60 Hz
3
6
R a t e d M a x i m um Vol t a ge(V) 254 508 635
5
R a t e d S h o r t - C i r c ui t (kA ) 66
66
42
4
Short Time
(k A )
42
Low-V ol tage A C P ower Ci r c ui t B r ak er 63FA
Figure 40
Pos. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Description Type of circuit-breaker Rated current Rated operating frequency Admissible rated short-time current Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Rated service voltage Standards Circuit-breaker serial number
147 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 1 - E1.2 description
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Manual operations for opening The following is the sequence of steps for closing and opening the circuit-breaker: and closing the circuit-breaker 1. Check that the circuit-breaker is open (open / closed indicator "O - OPEN"), and check that the springs
are discharged (spring signalling device "white - DISCHARGED SPRING") as indicated in Figure 41. 2. Charging the springs - Pull the lever [A] downwards several times until the springs charged signalling
device [B] is "yellow - CHARGED SPRING" as indicated in Figure 42.
AB
Figure 41
Figure 42
3. Check that the circuit-breaker is open (open/closed signalling device "O - OPEN"), and check that the springs are charged (springs signalling device "yellow - CHARGED SPRING") as indicated in Figure 43.
4. Closing - Press the closing pushbutton "I - Push ON" as indicated in Figure 44.
Figure 43
Figure 44
5. Check that the circuit-breaker is closed (open/closed indicator "I - CLOSED"), and check that the springs are discharged (spring signalling device "white - DISCHARGED SPRING" as indicated in Figure 45.
6. Opening - Press the opening pushbutton "O - Push OFF" as indicated in Figure 46.
Figure 45 148 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Figure 46
Continued on the next page
Mechanical characteristics | 1 - E1.2 description
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
7. Check that the circuit-breaker is open (open / closed indicator "O - OPEN"), and check that the springs are discharged (spring signalling device "white - DISCHARGED SPRING") as indicated in Figure 47.
Figure 47
Mechanical status indicators The following are the possible states in which you can find the circuit-breaker: 1. Circuit-breaker open with springs discharged (see Figure 48). 2. Circuit-breaker open with springs charged (see Figure 49). 3. Circuit-breaker closed with springs discharged (see Figure 50). 4. Circuit-breaker closed with springs charged (see Figure 51). This state occurs when after closing (see step 4 - Figure 51) the springs are recharged manually or automatically by the gearmotor (if provided).
Figure 48
Figure 49
Figure 50
Figure 51
149 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 1 - E1.2 description
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Circuit breaker racking-in/ The following is the procedure for the insertion of the moving part in the fixed part:
racking-out operations
WARNING!
· Make sure the circuit-breaker is disconnected from all sources of energy. · Switch the circuit-breaker to the open position with springs discharged.
WARNING! Before proceeding, remove all equipment used during the work and remove processing waste and materials used.
1. Turn plate through 90° before inserting the moving part.
"CLICK"
Figure 52
2. Make sure that signalling device on the fixed part indicates the DISCONNECT position. See Figure 53.
Figure 53
3. Position the moving part in the fixed part and push until it comes to a stop. See Figure 54 and Figure 55.
Figure 54
Figure 55
Continued on the next page
150 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 1 - E1.2 description
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
4. Extract the disconnection crank from its housing See Figure 56.
5. Press the lock pushbutton and fit the handle into the moving part. In this phase, the moving part will still be in the DISCONNECT position. See Figure 57.
1
2
Figure 56
Figure 57
6. Keep breaker pushed. Turn handle clockwise until pushbutton projects and signaling device indicates that circuit-breaker is in position TEST. See Figure 58.
1
2
Figure 58
7. Press the lock button and then rotate the crank clockwise until the button comes out and the indicator shows that the circuit-breaker is in the CONNECT position. See Figure 59.
1
2
Figure 59
Continued on the next page
151 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 1 - E1.2 description
Continued from the previous page
8. Extract the crank. See Figure 60. 9. Replace the crank in its housing See Figure 61.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Figure 60
Figure 61
To extract the moving part from the fixed part, perform the same steps indicated for insertion in reverse order. After extraction, in order to remove the moving part, unlock the safety lock. See Figure 62.
1
2
Figure 62
WARNING! The inserted circuit-breaker must be opened in order to be able to reach the test position. On the UL version, the fail safe prevents the removal of the
circuit-breaker from the fixed part with springs charged. Discharge the springs before removing the circuit-breaker from the fixed part. For further details, consult the Mechanical safety accessories chapter.
Mechanical position indicators
The following are the possible positions where you can find the mobile part of a withdrawable circuit-breaker during its use:
· circuit breaker in DISCONNECT position (see Figure 63). · circuit-breaker in test position (see Figure 64). · circuit-breaker in CONNECT position (see Figure 65).
Figure 63 152 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Figure 64
Figure 65 Mechanical characteristics | 1 - E1.2 description
2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Description of circuit-breaker The Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers consist of a steel structure in which the operating mechanism, the poles and the auxiliary parts are located. Each pole, isolated from the others, contains the breaking parts and the current transformer of its own phase. The structure of the poles differs between selective or current-limiting circuit-breaker. The circuit-breaker is available in two types: · fixed version · withdrawable
The circuit-breaker in fixed version (see Figure 66) has its own terminals for connection to the power circuit. The withdrawable circuit breaker consists of a mobile part (see Figure 67) and of a fixed part (see Figure 68 for IEC and Figure 69 for UL) for connection through its own terminals to the power circuit. The coupling between the mobile part and the fixed part is via disconnection contacts mounted on the fixed part.
Figure 66
Figure 67
Figure 68
Figure 69
153 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
Description of the circuit- The following are the main components of the circuit-breaker: breaker front panel 2
3
1
4
5
6 7
8
9
Figure 70
Pos. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Description Lever for manually charging the closing springs Ekip protection trip unit Name of the circuit-breaker CB open (O) / closed (I) indicator Opening pushbutton Mechanical signalling of tripped TU Closing pushbutton Springs charged-discharged signalling device Electrical data plate
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Description of electrical data plate IEC
1
23
4
12
11
5
10
9
8
7
Uimp 12 kV
13
6
Figure 71
Pos. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
154 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Description Type of circuit-breaker Utilization category Device type: Circuit-breaker or switch-disconnector Rated current Rated operating frequency Rated voltage of accessories Admissible rated short-time current Rated duty short-circuit breaking capacity Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Rated service voltage Standards Circuit-breaker serial number Impulse voltage
Continued on the next page
Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
Description of electrical data plate UL
Figure 72
Pos. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1
2
SACE E2.2V-
S/N: 000000000000000
u 2000 A
ABB SACE M ade in Italy
8
ANSI C37.13 - UL1066
50-60 Hz
3
7
R a t e d M a x i m um Vol t a ge (V) 254 508 635
6
R a t e d S hor t - C i r c ui t (kA ) 100 100
85
Short Time
(kA )
85
Low-Vol tage AC
5
Acce s s or ie s
P ower Ci r cui t B r ak er 63FA
A UX 4
4
A UX 6
3 A 400 V AC
220 V - 250 V AC/DC
RT
C
220 V - 250 V AC/DC
YR
YC2
220 V - 250 V AC/DC U
Description Type of circuit-breaker Rated current Rated operating frequency Rated voltage of accessories Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Rated service voltage Standards Circuit-breaker serial number
155 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Manual operations for opening The following is the sequence of steps for closing and opening the circuit-breaker: and closing the circuit-breaker 1. Check that the circuit-breaker is open (open / closed indicator "O - OPEN"), and check that the springs
are discharged (spring signalling device "white - DISCHARGED SPRING") as indicated in Figure 73. 2. Charging the springs - Pull the lever [A] downwards several times until the springs charged signalling
device [B] is "yellow - CHARGED SPRING" as indicated in Figure 74.
A B
Figure 73
Figure 74
3. Check that the circuit-breaker is open (open/closed signalling device "O - OPEN"), and check that the springs are charged (springs signalling device "yellow - CHARGED SPRING") as indicated in Figure 75.
4. Closing - Press the closing pushbutton "I - Push ON" as indicated in Figure 76.
Figure 75
Figure 76
5. Check that the circuit-breaker is closed (open/closed indicator "I - CLOSED"), and check that the springs are discharged (spring signalling device "white - DISCHARGED SPRING" as indicated in Figure 77.
6. Opening - Press the opening pushbutton "O - Push OFF" as indicated in Figure 78.
Figure 77 156 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Figure 78
Continued on the next page
Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
7. Check that the circuit-breaker is open (open / closed indicator "O - OPEN"), and check that the springs are discharged (spring signalling device "white - DISCHARGED SPRING") as indicated in Figure 79.
Figure 79
Mechanical status indicators The following are the possible states in which you can find the circuit-breaker:
1. Circuit-breaker open with springs discharged (see Figure 80).
2. Circuit-breaker open with springs charged (see Figure 81).
3. Circuit-breaker closed with springs discharged (see Figure 82).
4. Circuit-breaker closed with springs charged and not ready to close (see Figure 83). This state occurs when after closing (see step 4 - Manual operations for opening and closing the circuit-breaker) the springs are recharged manually or automatically by the gearmotor (if provided).
5. Circuit-breaker open with springs charged and not ready to close (see Figure 84). This state occurs in the following cases:
· The circuit-breaker is open due to tripping of protection trip units and the Reset signal has not been reset. To close the circuit-breaker press the TU Reset pushbutton on the front of the circuit-breaker.
· The key lock or padlock is active in the open position. · The undervoltage coil is de-energized · The opening coil is permanently energized. · The closing coil is permanently energized. · The pushbutton for enabling the insertion/extraction crank of a withdrawable circuit-breaker is pres-
sed.
Figure 80
Figure 81
Figure 82
Figure 83 157 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Figure 84
Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Circuit breaker racking-in/ The following is the procedure for the insertion of the moving part in the fixed part:
racking-out operations
WARNING!
· Make sure the circuit-breaker is disconnected from all sources of energy. · Switch the circuit-breaker to the open position with springs discharged.
WARNING! Before proceeding, remove all equipment used during the work and remove processing waste and materials used.
1. Turn plate through 90° before inserting the moving part.
1
2 "CLICK"
3
Figure 85
2. Position the lifting plates on the mobile part making sure that the tongue of the plates is latched properly. See Figure 86.
1
2
3
Figure 86
3. Extract the guides of the fixed part using the appropriate levers. See Figure 87. 4. Position the moving part on the guides of the fixed part. Latch by inserting the hollow part of the side
in the latch of the guide of the fixed part See Figure 88.
1
2
Figure 87 158 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Figure 88
3
Continued on the next page
Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
5. Unlatch the tongue and remove the lifting plates from the moving part. See Figure 89.
1
2
3
Figure 89
6. Make sure that the signalling device indicates the DISCONNECT position. See Figure 90.
Figure 90
7. Grip the guide levers of the fixed part and push them until the moving part stops. See Figure 91.
Figure 91 159 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Continued on the next page Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
8. Extract the disconnection crank from its housing See Figure 92.
9. Press the lock pushbutton and fit the handle into the moving part. In this phase, the moving part will still be in the DISCONNECT position. See Figure 93.
1 2
Figure 92
Figure 93
10. Turn handle clockwise until pushbutton projects and signaling device indicates that circuit-breaker is in position TEST. See Figure 94.
Figure 94
11. Press lock pushbutton and turn handle clockwise until pushbutton projects and signaling device indicates that circuit-breaker is in position CONNECT. See Figure 95.
Figure 95
2 1
Continued on the next page
160 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
Continued from the previous page
12. Extract the crank. See Figure 96. 13. Replace the crank in its housing See Figure 97.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Figure 96
Figure 97
WARNING! The inserted circuit-breaker must be opened in order to be able to reach the test position. On the UL version, the fail safe prevents the removal of the
circuit-breaker from the fixed part with springs charged. Discharge the springs before removing the circuit-breaker from the fixed part. For further details, consult the Mechanical safety accessories chapter.
To extract the moving part from the fixed part, perform the same steps indicated for insertion in reverse order.
Figure 98
Continued on the next page
161 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Always use both levers of the guides on the fixed part when racking out the circuit-breaker. See Figure 98.
=
= OK
NO!
Figure 99
WARNING! When withdrawing the moving part, make sure that both guides on the fixed part travel to the same extent, thereby keeping the moving part parallel to
the fixed part. See Figure 99.
Mechanical position indicators
The following are the possible positions where you can find the mobile part of a withdrawable circuit-breaker during its use:
· circuit breaker in DISCONNECT position (see Figure 100) · circuit-breaker in test position (see Figure 101) · circuit-breaker in CONNECT position (see Figure 102)
Figure 100 162 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Figure 101
Figure 102
Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
3 - Environmental conditions
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Installation environment Install the circuit-breaker in a dry environment, without dust or corrosive acids, and so that it is not subject to shock or vibration.
If this is not possible, mount the circuit-breaker in a compartment protecting it adequately.
For the dimensions to be considered for installation, see the chapter "4 - Installation" on page 165 where the references for following information can be found: · minimum installation volumes of the circuit-breakers and derived versions in a cell · overall dimensions of the circuit-breakers and the fixed parts · drilling of mounting holes · drilling of the cell door
Temperatures of the installation The mechanical and electrical characteristics are guaranteed between -25 ° C and +70 ° C, -13 °F e +158 °F. environment
Particular weather conditions The circuit breaker is designed to operate in particularly difficult industrial environments.
It was tested according to: · IEC 60068-2-1: endurance at low temperatures · IEC 60068-2-2: hot dry climate · IEC 60068-2-30: hot humid climate · IEC 60068-2-52 severity 2: saline mist atmosphere · IEC 60947 (pollution level 3) · IEC60721-3-6 class 6C3 · IEC60721-3-3 class 3C2
NOTE: the circuit-breaker is suitable for installation in environments with saline concentrations no higher than 10 mg/m3.
Dusty environments It is recommended to install the circuit breaker in suitably ventilated switchgear where penetration by dust is minimized.
In case of dusty environments (dust> 1 mg/m3) second level maintenance procedures must be followed.
Vibration
The circuit-breaker is insensitive to mechanical or electromagnetic vibrations that meet the following standards:
· IEC 60068-2-6 a) From 1 to 13 Hz with movement equal to 1 mm - 0.04 in b) From 13 to 100 Hz with constant acceleration equal to 0.7 g - 0.025 lbs
· Shipping Registers' specifications: RINA, BV, GL, ABS, LRs, DNV
163 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 3 - Environmental conditions
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Altitude The circuit breaker maintains its rated operating characteristics up to 2000 m above sea level.
Once this altitude is passed, you need to consider reduction of dielectric strength and reduced cooling capacity of the air.
The following are the corrections expressed as a percentage to be applied to the parameters according to altitude:
Altitude
Rated service voltage (V) Ue Rated current (A) at 40°C
2000 m / 6600 ft 100%
100%
3000 m / 9900 ft 88%
98%
4000 m / 13200 ft 78%
93%
5000 m / 16500 ft 68%
90%
Electromagnetic compatibility The use of specific devices in industrial installations may cause electromagnetic interference in the electrical system. The SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers were developed and tested in an EMC environment in accordance with IEC 60947-2, Annex J and F.
Storage Environment Store the circuit breaker in a dry, dust-free environment free of harsh chemicals. The storage ambient temperature must be: · Circuit-breaker in the original packaging, without protection trip unit or Ekip Dip trip unit, between -40 ° C and +85 ° C, -40 °F e +185 °F. · Circuit-breaker in the original packaging, with Ekip Touch protection trip unit, between -25°C and + 85°C, -22°F e +185°F. NOTE: the storage conditions may differ from the usage conditions.
164 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 3 - Environmental conditions
4 - Installation
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Overall Dimensions E1.2 Information on the overall dimensions is available on the website:
http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/.
The following drawings are also available in .dxf format:
· 1SDH000999R0101 - E1.2 III-IV Fixed F EF IEC-UL · 1SDH000999R0102 - E1.2 III-IV Fixed FC IEC-UL · 1SDH000999R0103 - E1.2 III-IV Withdrawable EF IEC-UL · 1SDH000999R0104 - E1.2 III-IV Withdrawable ES IEC-UL · 1SDH000999R0105 - E1.2 III-IV Withdrawable SHR IEC · 1SDH000999R0106 - E1.2 III-IV Withdrawable FC IEC · 1SDH000999R0107 - E1.2 III-IV Fixed HR-VR Positionable IEC · 1SDH000999R0108 - E1.2 III-IV Fixed ES IEC-UL · 1SDH000999R0109 - E1.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR-VR IEC · 1SDH000999R0120 - E1.2 Flange Fixed Withdrawable IEC-UL · 1SDH000999R0121 - E1.2 Floor mounting IEC-UL · 1SDH000999R0303 - E1.2 III-IV Withdrawable Rear Terminals HR-VR UL · 1SDH000999R0307 - E1.2 III-IV Fixed Rear Terminals HR-VR UL
Positioning anchor plates E1.2 The following diagram shows the distance for positioning the first anchor plate for E1.2 circuit-breakers according to the peak current:
500/ 19.69
450/ 17.72
L
L
400/ 15.75
350/ 13.78
300/ 11.81
L
L
250/ 9.84
200/ 7.87
150/
5.91
L
L
100/
3.94 40
60
80
100 120 140 160
Figure 103
(1): distance of the first anchor plate from the circuit-breaker terminals (2): peak current
165 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 4 - Installation
Overall dimensions E2.2-E4.2 Information on the overall dimensions is available on the website: -E6.2 http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/.
The following drawings are also available in .dxf format:
· 1SDH001000R0100 - E2.2 III-IV Fixed HR VR IEC · 1SDH001000R0101 - E2.2 III-IV Fixed F IEC-UL · 1SDH001000R0102 - E2.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR-VR IEC · 1SDH001000R0103 - E2.2 III-IV Withdrawable F IEC · 1SDH001000R0104 - E2.2 III-IV Fixed SHR IEC · 1SDH001000R0105 - E2.2 III-IV Withdrawable SHR IEC · 1SDH001000R0106 - E2.2 III-IV Fixed SVR IEC · 1SDH001000R0107 - E2.2 III-IV Withdrawable SVR IEC · 1SDH001000R0110 - E2.2 2000 III-IV Withdrawable FL IEC · 1SDH001000R0111 - E2.2 2500 III-IV Withdrawable FL IEC · 1SDH001001R0100 - E4.2 III-IV Fixed HR VR IEC · 1SDH001001R0101 - E4.2 III-IV Fixed F IEC · 1SDH001001R0102 - E4.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR-VR IEC · 1SDH001001R0103 - E4.2 III-IV Withdrawable F IEC · 1SDH001001R0104 - E4.2/E9, E4.2/E III-IV Fixed SHR IEC · 1SDH001001R0105 - E4.2/E9, E4.2/E III-IV Withdrawable SHR IEC · 1SDH001001R0106 - E4.2/E9, E4.2/E III-IV Fixed SVR IEC · 1SDH001001R0107 - E4.2/E9, E4.2/E III-IV Withdrawable SVR IEC · 1SDH001001R0110 - E4.2 3200 III-IV Withdrawable FL IEC · 1SDH001001R0111 - E4.2 4000 III-IV Withdrawable FL IEC · 1SDH001060R0100 - E6.2 III-IV Fixed HR IEC · 1SDH001060R0101 - E6.2 III-IV Fixed VR IEC · 1SDH001060R0102 - E6.2 IV FS Fixed HR-VR IEC · 1SDH001060R0104 - E6.2 III-IV Fixed F IEC · 1SDH001060R0105 - E6.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR IEC · 1SDH001060R0106 - E6.2 III-IV Withdrawable VR IEC · 1SDH001060R0107 - E6.2 IV FS Withdrawable HR-VR IEC · 1SDH001060R0108 - E6.2 III-IV Withdrawable F IEC · 1SDH001060R0110 - E6.2 6300 III-IV Withdrawable FL IEC · 1SDH001000R0120 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 Fixed Withdrawable Flange IEC-UL · 1SDH001000R0121 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 Fixed internal mounting IEC-UL · 1SDH001000R0300 - E2.2 III-IV Fixed HR-VR UL · 1SDH001000R0302 - E2.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR-VR UL · 1SDH001000R0303 - E2.2 III-IV Withdrawable F UL · 1SDH001001R0300 - E4.2 III-IV Fixed HR-VR UL · 1SDH001001R0302 - E4.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR-VR UL · 1SDH001001R0303 - E4.2 III-IV Withdrawable F UL · 1SDH001001R0304 - E4.2 III-IV Fixed HR-VR UL · 1SDH001001R0305 - E4.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR-VR UL · 1SDH001001R0306 - E4.2 3600 III-IV Fixed UL · 1SDH001060R0300 - E6.2 III-IV Fixed HR UL · 1SDH001060R0301 - E6.2 III-IV Fixed VR UL · 1SDH001060R0302 - E6.2 IV FS Fixed HR-VR UL · 1SDH001060R0305 - E6.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR UL · 1SDH001060R0306 - E6.2 III-IV Withdrawable VR UL · 1SDH001060R0307 - E6.2 IV FS Withdrawable HR-VR UL · 1SDH001060R0308 - E6.2 III-IV-IV FS Withdrawable F UL · 1SDH001060R0309 - E6.2 III-IV Fixed VR UL · 1SDH001060R0310 - E6.2 IV FS Fixed VR UL · 1SDH001060R0311 - E6.2 III-IV Withdrawable VR UL · 1SDH001060R0312 - E6.2 IV FS Withdrawable VR UL · 1SDH001060R0313 - E6.2 6000 III Withdrawable VR UL
ABB | SACE Emax 2
166 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 4 - Installation
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Positioning anchor plates The following diagram shows the distance for positioning the first anchor plate for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuitE2.2-E4. 2-E6.2 breakers according to the peak current:
L
500/ 19.69
450/ 17.72
E2.2
E4.2
E6.2
400/ 15.75
350/ 13.78
300/ 11.81
250/
9.84
L
200/ 7.87
150/ 5.91
100/
3.94 40
60
80
100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300
Ipk [kA] (2)
L [mm] (1)
Figure 104 (1): distance of the first anchor plate from the circuit-breaker terminals (2): peak current
Positioning anchor plates E4.2-A 3200A / 3600A Fixed The anchor plates must be positioned as indicated in the figure.
30 mm max.
Bus Bracing
Figure 105
167 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Continued on the next page Mechanical characteristics | 4 - Installation
Continued from the previous page
Positioning of anchor plates for Terminals FL The anchor plates must be positioned as indicated in the figure.
Bus Bracing
ABB | SACE Emax 2
150mm
110mm
Figure 106
Bus Bracing
>690V version IEC circuitbreakers
>690V disconnectors and circuit-breakers are available in the following configurations:
Circuit-breaker
E1.2/E9
E2.2/E9 E4.2/E9 E6.2/E9
Voltage 800V 800V 800V/900V 800V/900V 800V/900V
Version F (1) W (2) F (3) F (3) F (3)
(1) With front terminals (F) and high terminal covers (HTC) (2) With positionable rear terminals (HR/VR) and phase separators (PB) (3) With insulating protections
Details about assembling insulating protections are available at http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/ DownloadCenter/, especially in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0746.
>635V version UL circuitbreakers
>635V disconnectors and circuit-breakers are available in the following configurations:
Circuit-breaker E4.2H-A/E
Voltage 730V
Version F (1)
(1) With insulating protections
Details about assembling insulating protections are available at http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/ DownloadCenter/, especially in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0746.
168 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 4 - Installation
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Earthing (for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 The circuit-breakers in fixed version and the fixed part of withdrawable circuit-breakers are equipped with a only) screw for the ground connection. The connection must be implemented by means of a conductor of suitable cross-section according to the IEC 61439-1 Standard. Clean and degrease the area around the screw before making the connection. After assembly of the conductor, tighten the screw with a torque of 2 N m - 17.7 lb in.
Figure 107
Figure 108
Clearances Information on clearances is available on the website: http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/ The following layout is also available 1SDH001301R0001 - Cubicle E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2
Phase separators (for E2.2E4.2-E6.2 only)
Phase barriers are mandatory for 2ps configuration. For the 4ps configuration it is possible to place isolation barriers for the segregation of live parts.In addition, the phase separators are mandatory:
· If, between two phases, the minimum distance between the screws that fix the circuit-breaker terminals to the connection bars is less than 14 mm - 0.55".
· For circuit breakers version IEC >690V and UL >635V.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular with the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0810.
169 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 4 - Installation
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Connection to the power circuit The connection of a circuit-breaker to the power circuit is performed using the connection busbars of the electric switchgear fixed to the terminals of the circuit-breaker. The sizing of the busbars is specified by the designer of the electrical switchgear. IMPORTANT: before proceeding with the connection between terminals and connection busbars: · Make sure that the contact surfaces of the busbars are free of burrs, dents, traces of rusting, dust or traces of grease. · Make sure, if aluminium busbars are used, than they are tin plated in the contact areas. · Make sure that the busbars do not exert forces in any direction on the terminal. · Tightening: for E1.2 use M10 screws with resistance class 8.8 equipped with spring washers and lock them with a torque of 45 Nm - 398.3 lb in · Tightening: for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 use M12 screws with resistance class 8.8 equipped with spring washers and lock them with a torque of 70 Nm - 619.5 lb in
IMPORTANT: it is possible to obtain different capacities for the connections by altering the thickness and number of busbars in parallel.
NOTE: the information on the performances of the circuit-breakers in switchboards is available on the website:
http://new.abb.com/low-voltage/products/circuit-breakers/emax2.
The connection for the E1.2 circuit-breaker is shown below as swell as the tables with some examples of the amount and sizes of the connections that can be used for each type of circuit-breaker:
Figure 109
circuit-breaker IEC 60947 Iu (A)
E1.2
630
E1.2
800
E1.2
1000
E1.2
1250
E1.2
1600
circuit-breaker UL 1066 Iu (A)
E1.2-A E1.2-A
800 1200
Figure 110
Dimension of busbars (mm)
Horizontal terminals
Vertical terminals
2x40x5
2x40x5
2x50x5
2x50x5
2x50x10
2x50x8
2x50x10
2x50x8
3x50x8
2x50x10
Dimension of busbars (inches)
Horizontal terminals
Vertical terminals
2x1/4x2
1x1/4x3
3x1/4x2
2x1/4x2
Continued on the next page
170 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 4 - Installation
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
The connection for the E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers is shown below as swell as the tables with some examples of the amount and sizes of the connections that can be used for each type of circuit-breaker:
Figure 111 IEC
circuit-breaker IEC 60947 Iu (A)
800 1000 1250 1600 E2.2 2000
2500
2000
2500 E4.2
3200
4000
4000
E6.2
5000
6300
(1) values for spread terminals
circuit-breaker UL 1066 Iu (A)
E2.2-A E4.2-A E6.2-A
1600
2000 2000 2500 3200 3600 4000 5000 6000
Figure 112 UL
Dimension of busbars (mm)
Horizontal terminals
Vertical terminals
1x50x10
1x50x10
2x50x5
2x50x5
2x50x10
2x50x10
2x60x10
1x100x10
3x60x10
2x80x10
3x60x10 (1)
2x80x10 (1)
3x60x10
4x100x5
3x60x10 (1)
4x100x5 (1)
2x80x10
2x80x10
2x100x10
2x100x10
3x100x10
3x100x10
4x100x10
4x100x10
4x100x10
4x100x10
5x100x10
5x100x10
6x100x10
6x100x10
Dimension of busbars (inches)
Horizontal terminals
Vertical terminals
4x1/4x2
3x1/4x2
3x1/4x2.5
2x1/4x3
4x1/4x2.5
4x1/4x2
4x1/4x2.5
4x1/4x2
4x1/4x4
3x1/4x4
-
4x1/4x4
-
4x1/4x5
4x1/4x5
4x1/4x5
8x1/4x5
6x1/4x5
-
6x1/4x6
Continued on the next page
171 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 4 - Installation
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
To optimize the thermal efficiency, it is recommended to adhere to the following installation guidelines:
· Guarantee the maximum possible distance between the input and output busbars. See the example Figure 113.
· Guarantee the maximum use of the surface of the terminal. See the example Figure 114. · Make sure that the distance between the holes and the end of the terminal and between the holes and
extremity of the busbar is the same. See the example Figure 115. · Make sure that, accordingly to the number of busbars and terminal tangs, the busbars of the lateral phases
are as distant as possible from the busbars of the central phase. See the example Figure 116.
NO
OK
Figure 113
NO
OK
Figure 114
= =
Figure 115
OK
OK
Figure 116 172 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
OK
NO NO
Mechanical characteristics | 4 - Installation
NO
5 - Technical characteristics
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection degree
SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers guarantee the following protection degrees:
· IP20 for circuit-breakers in fixed or withdrawable versions, excluding the terminals · IP30 for the front parts of the circuit-breaker when it is installed in a switchboard with IP30 flange mounted
on the door · IP54 in circuit-breakers equipped with an optional IP54 transparent flange fitted to the front door of the
switchboard.
Dissipated power
To guarantee the performance of the switchgear in terms of uninterrupted rated capacity, the design of the switchgear must take into account the power dissipated by switchgear and controlgear and by the installed live parts. Dissipated powers are calculated according to the standard IEC 60947. The values indicated in the table refer to the total power for each three-phase circuit-breaker with balanced loads with a current flow equal to the rated uninterrupted current Iu. These power dissipations are measured according to the standard IEC 60947. The values indicated in the table refer to the total power of the circuit-breakers in three-pole and four-pole versions with balanced loads and a current flow equal to the rated uninterrupted current Iu at 50/60 Hz.
Iu
630A 800A 1000A 1250A 1600A 2000A 2500A 3200A 4000A 5000A 6300A
Dissipated power [W]
E1.2 B/C/N
E2.2 B/N/S/H
F (1)
W (2)
F (1)
W (2)
31
62
50
100
34
72
78
156
53
113
122
244
83
176
201
400
136
288
212
450
267
550
E4.2 N/S/H/V
F (1)
W (2)
425
743
465
900
E6.2 H/V/X
F (1)
W (2)
309
544
483
850
767
1350
Iu
250A 400A 800A 1200A 1600A 2000A 2500A 3200A 3600A 4000A 5000A 6000A
Dissipated power [W]
E1.2
E2.2
B/N/S - A B/N/S - A
F (1) W (2) 7 14 17 35 59 118 125 250
F (1) W (2)
15 22 48 73 100 152 170 260
E2.2 H/V - A E2.2 2000A B/N/S - A
E4.2 S/H/V - A
F (1) W (2) F (1) W (2)
15 22 48 68 99 138 167 233 250 350
44 58 86 114 143 189 211 279 310 410
E4.2 L - A E4.2 3200A S/H/V - A
E6.2 H/V - A
F (1) W (2) F (1) W (2)
E6.2 L - A F (1) W (2)
42 49 81 111 132 181 193 264 280 384 445 610 578
323 438 395 536 476 646 476 646 700 950 700 950
1484
(1) Fisso - Fixed - Fest - Fixe - Fijo (2) Estraibile - Withdrawable - Ausfahrbarer - Débrochable - Extraíble
173 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 5 - Technical characteristics
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Derating due to temperature In certain installations, the circuit-breakers could end up operating at a temperature above the reference temperature (40 °C). In such cases the rated capacity of the circuit-breaker may be reduced. To find out the percentage of reduction to be applied to the capacity consult the following table:
Emax 2 E1.2 Temperature [°C]
< 40
45
E1.2 250
100%
100%
E1.2 630
100%
100%
E1.2 800
100%
100%
E1.2 1000 100%
100%
E1.2 1250 100%
100%
E1.2 1600 100%
100%
50 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
55 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 98%
60 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 95%
65 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 93%
70 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 90%
Emax 2 E2.2 Temperature [°C]
< 40
45
E2.2 250
100%
100%
E2.2 630
100%
100%
E2.2 800
100%
100%
E2.2 1000 100%
100%
E2.2 1250 100%
100%
E2.2 1600 100%
100%
E2.2 2000 100%
100%
E2.2 2500 100%
100%
50 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
55 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
60 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 95% 98%
65 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 91% 94%
70 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 98% 87% 90%
Emax 2 E4.2 Temperature [°C]
< 40
45
E4.2 2000 100%
100%
E4.2 2500 100%
100%
E4.2 3200 100%
100%
E4.2 4000 100%
100%
50 100% 100% 97% 94%
55 100% 100% 93% 90%
60 100% 100% 89% 86%
65 100% 100% 86% 83%
70 100% 100% 82% 80%
Emax 2 E6.2 Temperature [°C]
< 40
45
E6.2 4000 100%
100%
E6.2 5000 100%
100%
E6.2 6300 100%
100%
50 100% 100% 95%
55 100% 100% 91%
60 100% 100% 87%
65 100% 98% 84%
70 100% 95% 81%
174 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 5 - Technical characteristics
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Current limiting curve
SACE Emax 2 series offer current-limiting circuit-breakers in E1.2 size up to 1600 A. These circuit-breakers are characterized from the constructional point of view by the following features:
· Dedicated stored energy operating mechanism that reduces opening times. · Specific main contacts that, by exploiting the electrodynamic forces generated by the short-circuit,
accelerate the opening of the main contacts.
These features enable rapid breaking and consequently reduce the electromechanical and thermal stress suffered by the installation during a short-circuit. The Current-limiting circuit-breakers are characterized by short-time withstand currents that are not particularly high and are therefore not suitable for applications where selectivity towards more downstream devices is required or in case of devices with high inrush currents in the start-up phase.
E1.2 L - Current-limiting curves
E1.2 L - Pass-through specific energy limitation curves
175 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical characteristics | 5 - Technical characteristics
Accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - Overview
Introduction All the circuit-breakers have a series of electrical and mechanical accessories that can be applied according to the circuit-breaker type, and a series of electronic accessories that can be applied according to the type of Ekip trip unit equipping the circuit-breaker.
Mechanical and electrical The following table shows the possible combinations of the electrical and mechanical accessories for E1.2:
accessories Type of accessory
Accessory
Circuit-breakers
Switchdisconnectors
AUX 4Q
S
R
AUX 15Q
R
R
Ekip AUP (1)
R
R
Electrical signalling
Ekip RTC
R
R
S51
S
-
S33 M/2
R
R
YO (4) - YC
R
R
YO2 (4)
R
R
Electrical control
YU (2)(4)
R
R
M
R
R
YR
R
-
KLC - PLC
R
R
KLP - PLP (1)
R
R
SL (1)
S
S
Security mechanical
DLC
R
R
Anti-insertion lock
S
S
MOC
R
R
FAIL SAFE (3)
R
R
PBC
R
R
IP54
R
R
Protection mechanical
HTC-LTC
R
R
PB
R
R
Interlocks
MI
R
R
S: Standard. R: on request. (1) For withdrawable version only. (2) Incompatible with FAIL SAFE. Can be ordered for UL on request (3) Incompatible with YU; standard for UL version. (4) A maximum of two accessories are available for YO and YU.
Continued on the next page
176 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Accessories | 1 - Overview
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
The following table shows the possible combinations of the electrical and mechanical accessories for E2.2E4.2-E6.2:
Type of accessory Electrical signalling
Electrical control
Security mechanical Protection mechanical Interlocks
Accessory
AUX 4Q AUX 6Q AUX 15Q (5) Ekip AUP (1) Ekip RTC S51 S51/2 (6) S33 M/2 YO (4) - YC YO2 (4) - YC2 YU (2)(4) YU2 (2)(4) M YR KLC - PLC KLP - PLP (1) SL (1) DLR (1) DLP (1) DLC (5) Anti-insertion lock MOC FAIL SAFE (3) PBC IP54 MI (5)
Circuitbreakers S R R R R S R R R R R R R R R R S R R R S R R R R R
Switch-
Derived versions
disconnectors CS MV MTP
R
-
-
-
R
-
-
-
R
-
-
-
R
R
R
R
R
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
R
-
-
-
R
-
-
-
R
-
-
-
R
-
-
-
R
-
-
-
R
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
R
-
-
-
R
-
-
R
S
-
-
S
R
-
-
R
R
-
-
R
R
-
-
R
S
-
-
S
R
-
-
R
R
-
-
R
R
-
-
R
R
-
-
R
R
-
-
R
S: Standard. R: on request. (1) For withdrawable version only. (2) Incompatible with FAIL SAFE. Can be ordered for UL on request (3) Incompatible with YU; standard for UL version. (4) A maximum of two accessories are available for YO and YU. (5) Not available for withdrawable circuit-breakers with lateral fastening. (6) Incompatible with YR
177 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Accessories | 1 - Overview
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Electronic accessories The following table shows the possible combinations of the electronic accessories:
Type of accessory Accessory
Power supply
Ekip Supply
Ekip Com
Ekip Com Redundant
Connectivity
Ekip Com Actuator Ekip Link
Ekip Signalling Modbus TCP
Ekip Signalling 2K
Signal
Ekip Signalling 3T Ekip Signalling 4K
Ekip Signalling 10K
Measurement enabler
Measurement enabler with voltage socket
Measurement and Protection
Ekip Synchrocheck Rating Plug
Toroid S.G.R.
Rc Toroid
External neutral sensor
Ekip Multimeter Display and Supervision
Ekip Control Panel
Testing and Programming
Ekip TT Ekip T&P Ekip Programming
Trip units
Ekip Dip
Ekip Touch
R
R
-
R
-
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
-
R
-
R
-
R
R
R
-
R
-
R
-
R
R
R
-
R
-
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
S
R
R
R
R
Ekip Ekip G Hi-Touch Touch
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
-
-
S
S
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
S
S
R
R
R
R
Ekip G Hi-Touch R R R R R
R
R R R R -
S
R R R R R R R S R R
S: Standard. R: on request. NOTE: Ekip Signalling 4K module available for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers.
Wiring diagrams The internal connections of the circuit-breaker, the connections to the external terminal box of all accessories and all related notes are indicated on the wiring diagrams.
There is one document and it is valid for all SACE Emax 2 CBs, with certain considerations distinguishing the various models/versions also described on the actual diagrams: · access to certain connections and accessories in the terminal box differs, depending on whether the
version is fixed or withdrawable · Emax E1.2 can be fitted with three modules (one Ekip Supply + two other modules); E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 can
be fitted with up to four modules (one Ekip Supply + three other modules) · Ekip Signalling 4K module: Emax E1.2 does not have the connections for Q5...Q10 / Ekip Signalling 4K
Information about the wiring diagram is available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/ DownloadCenter/, especially in document 1SDM000091R0001.
178 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Accessories | 1 - Overview
2 - Standard accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Accessories for fixed circuitbreakers
Fixed version SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers and switch-disconnectors are always supplied with the following accessories as standard:
· IP30 protection for the switchgear door · lifting plates for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers · front terminals for E1.2 circuit-breakers · orientable rear terminals for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers, mounted in HR HR position · screws for mounting in switchboards
In addition, for automatic circuit-breakers only, the following accessories are always supplied:
· four standard open/closed auxiliary contacts - AUX 4Q · four terminals for the auxiliary connections · mechanical signalling for protection trip unit tripping - Ekip TU Reset · Ekip TT power supply and test unit, when a protection unit is present on display · Ekip protection trip unit tripping signalling contact S51
Accessories for withdrawable circuit-breakers
Withdrawable version SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers and switch-disconnectors are always supplied with the following accessories as standard:
· anti-extraction locking mechanism with the circuit-breaker closed · lifting plates for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers · racking-in/racking-out lever · anti-insertion lock
In addition, for automatic circuit-breakers only, the following accessories are always supplied:
· four standard open/closed auxiliary contacts - AUX 4Q · four terminals for the auxiliary connections · mechanical signalling for protection trip unit tripping - Ekip TU Reset · Ekip TT power supply and test unit, when a protection unit is present on display
The fixed parts of the withdrawable versions are always supplied with:
· IP30 protection for the switchgear door · anti-insertion lock · standard shutter lock - SL · screws for floor mounting · orientable rear terminals
179 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Accessories | 2 - Standard accessories
3 - Assembly and disassembly
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Mounting The circuit-breaker is supplied with the ordered accessories already assembled. If ordered individually and separately from the job order of the circuit-breaker, the accessories are supplied with a Kit Sheet describing all the assembly operations.
Disassembly operations for To dismantle the accessories, the following parts must be removed from the circuit-breaker: circuit breakers E1.2 · Front cover (A) and protection (F) by removing the screws (B and C). · For 4-p circuit-breakers, the lateral protection (D) by fixing the screws (C and E).
E
A
F
D
B
C
Figure 117 - Removing the front cover and protections
After reassembling the accessories, the parts previously dismantled must be reassembled as indicated:
· Front cover (A) and protection (F) by screwing the fixing screws (B and C) with tightening torque 0.8 Nm - 7 lb in (B) and 1.5 Nm - 13 lb in (C).
· For 4-p circuit-breakers, the lateral protection (D) by fixing the screws (C and E) with tightening torque 1.5 Nm - 13 lb in.
E
A
F
D
B
C
Figure 118 - Assembly of front cover and protections
180 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Accessories | 3 - Assembly and disassembly
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Disassembly operations for To dismantle the accessories, the following parts must be removed from the circuit-breaker: circuit breakers E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 · Transparent flange (A) of the trip unit, by turning the screws (B).
· Front cover of the circuit-breaker (C), by removing the mounting screws (D).
Figure 119 - Removing the flange and front cover
1
C
2
2 1
90°
A B
D
After reassembling the accessories, the parts previously dismantled must be reassembled as indicated:
· Front cover of the circuit-breaker (C), by screwing in the mounting screws (D) with tightening torque 1.1 Nm - 9.74 lb in.
· Transparent flange (A) of the trip unit, by turning the screws (B).
Figure 120 - Assembly of flange and front cover
C D
2 1
A
2
1 90°
B
181 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Accessories | 3 - Assembly and disassembly
4 - Introduction to the electronic accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Operating conditions
Ekip Synchrocheck, Ekip Com and Ekip Signalling function correctly: · In the presence of auxiliary supply voltage · With the circuit-breaker in the Racked-in position (if the CB version is withdrawable) The limitations listed below apply in all the other cases:
Module\ Condition
Ekip Synchrocheck
Ekip Com
Module power supply absent
Synchronism contact open
CB in Test (1)(2) position
Synchronism: not available (4)
CB in DISCONNECTED (1)(3) position
Synchronism: not available (4)
Communication: absent Communication: active
Communication: partially active (5)
Ekip Signalling 2K
Ekip Signalling 3T Ekip Signalling 4K
Ekip Signalling 10K
Output contacts: open
Output contacts: open
Inputs and output contacts: available
Inputs and output contacts: available
Inputs and output contacts: partial available (6)
Module power supply off (Output contacts:: open)
(1) the description refers to the module when correctly on and with the CB in the indicated position (2) in the Test position, the Trip unit is connected to the modules and all information is available on the display or via external communication (3) in the Racked-out position, connection and communication between Trip unit and modules is interrupted. Information is not available/valid (4) due to voltage not connected to the internal sockets (5) see System Interface, INFORMATION WITH PROTECTION TRIP UNIT DISCONNECTED section (next page) (6) the outputs only function correctly if configured as: input status (of module itself) or non-communication with Trip unit. For all other configurations, the module forces the Outputs as per Contact Type parameter (NO, NC).
System Interface Document 1SDH001140R0001.zip, describing how to use the Ekip Com communication modules correctly, is available in ABB library; the file contains:
Document 1SDH001140R0001.pdf
1SDH001140R0001.xlsx
Description Guidelines with details about how to put the communication modules into service, with reference to the protocols and supporting documents
Table with the references of all the registers for parameters, controls, measurements, etc.
The .zip file contains the files for supplementing Ekip Touch in the available communication networks, with the specific Ekip Com module and an IMPORTANT file with notes on how to use the files:
File (1)(2)
Protocol / Ekip Com module
ABBS0E7F.gsd + EkiDPB.bmp
File .gsd and module image for configuring Ekip Com Profibus DP
Ekip_COM_EtherNetIP_M4_v03_06.eds File .eds for configuring Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM
Ekip_COM_DeviceNet_v02_08.eds
File .eds for configuring Ekip Com DeviceNet TM
ABBEC0304_Ed1.icd ABBEC0304_Ed2.icd
File .icd for configuring Ekip Com IEC 61850
GSDML-V2.3-ABB S.p.A.-Ekip Com Profinet-20180823.xml
File .xml for configuring Ekip Com Profinet
(1) The files are also valid for the respective Redundant versions. (2) Check the Firmware version of your module so as to choose the file with the correct configuration.
182 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Accessories | 4 - Introduction to the electronic accessories
Internal electronic accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - Rating Plug
The Rating Plug, supplied with the trip unit establishes the rated current In required by the measuring range and for setting the current protections (with reference to In). It is installed on a dedicated front connector which can be accessed by the user. The trip unit continuously checks for the presence of the Rating Plug and signals its absence or any assembly or installation errors. If a new model is installed, the Trip unit displays the request for installation when first powered. In Ekip Touch, field Nom.Curr in the About-Circuit breaker menu displays the In quantity read by the unit.
Versions Various models of different sizes are available and can be ordered in three versions: a classic version, a version which activates Rc protection and one that deactivates L protection; the three versions have different labels:
Figure 121
IMPORTANT: the Rating plug labels have a black background; if the colour is different, they may be incompatible with the trip units described in this document: consult
ABB for assistance
Replacement The module can be replaced by the user; any Rating Plug with maximum rated current equal to the nominal size of the CB (Iu) can be installed.
WARNING!
· with Iu 400 A size circuit-breakers, Rating Plugs from 100 A to the Iu size of the CB can be installed
· with Iu > 400 A size circuit-breakers, Rating Plugs from 400 A to the Iu size of the CB can be installed
Further details about assembly and the Rating Plug installation procedure are available in ABB Library, particularly in document 1SDH001000R0510.
IMPORTANT: to avoid alarms or undesired trips, the Rating Plug must be replaced when Trip unit is off, the CB open and in the absence of primary currents and
voltages
183 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Internal electronic accessories | 1 - Rating Plug
2 - Measurement
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Presentation
Two Measurement modules are available:
· Measurement enabler installed by default on Ekip Touch and enabled in the presence of the Measuring Measurements package (enabling can be obtained both at the time the circuit-breaker is ordered or at a later date, via Market Place)
· Measurement enabler with voltage socket is installed by default on Ekip Hi-Touch, Ekip G Touch and Ekip G Hi-Touch; can be installed in conjunction with Ekip Touch if requested when circuit-breaker is ordered
Both modules measure voltages, frequencies, power and energy values; in addition, the Measurement enabler with voltage socket module allows:
· the Trip unit to be supplied directly by the voltage sockets to which it is connected · management of the synchronism function when the Ekip Synchrocheck module is installed (see chapter
dedicated to Ekip Synchrocheck from page 223).
Measurement performance The measurement performance provided when the Measurement modules are installed (described on page 114), are more accurate when the Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package is present (described on page 117.
Configurations available
Both modules can be ordered with different connection configurations:
· connections to internal terminals or in an external terminal box · connections to the upper or lower terminals of the poles on the basis of the expected power flow · with normal or reverse pole order
For full details about ordering and the connections, consult technical catalog 1SDC200023D0906 and the wiring diagrams 1SDM000091R0001.
Electrical characteristics The Measurement modules function correctly in the electrical conditions described on page 17.
Installations with up to 1150 VAC line-to-line voltage can be connected and configured in the presence of connections to external sockets and an isolation transformer.
Isolation transformer The isolation transformer must conform to standard IEC 60255-27 and possess the following characteristics:
Characteristics Electrical
Description
· Accuracy class: 0,2 · Performance: 10 VA · Overload: 20 % permanent · Insulations: 4 kV between inputs and outputs, 4 kV between shield and outputs, 4 kV between shield and inputs · Frequency: Fn +-10% · Primary voltage: 100 to 1150 V (nominal, to be configured via menu) · Secondary voltage: 100 to 230 V (nominal, to be configured via menu)
184 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Internal electronic accessories | 2 - Measurement
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Menu The specific configuration area will activate in the Settings - Modules - Ekip Measuring menu if the Measurement module is detected correctly by Ekip Touch.
The following parameters can be configured in this menu:
Parameter Voltage Transf. Rated voltage Primary voltage
Secondary voltage
Positive Power flow
Neutral connection
Description
Default
Selects the presence or absence of the external transformer
Absent
Available in the absence of a transformer; defines rated voltage Un. The value is given as absolute value (Volts) and can be set within 400 V the range: 100 V to 690 V with variable steps.
Available in the presence of a transformer; defines rated voltage Un
of the installation. The value is given as absolute value (Volts) and can be set within
400 V
the range: 100 V to 1150 V with variable steps.
Available in the presence of a transformer; defines the secondary voltage of the transformer. The value is given as absolute value (Volts) and can be set within the range: 100 V to 230 V with variable steps.
100 V
Defines the power flow required for D protection; there are 2 options available (page 73): · High Low: the power flows from the low terminals to the high High Low ones (load connected low) · Low High: opposite power flow (load connected high)
Available with 3P CB; allows the presence of the external Neutral to be enabled.
NOTE: presence of the neutral activates phase voltage measurement
Absent
About The About-Modules menu contains the specific menu of the module with the serial number and version of the module itself.
Test The Measurement module must be disconnected from Ekip Touch (according to the procedure available on the front label) and the external sockets must be disconnected from the terminal box in the following cases:
Test
Dielectric test Isolation between phases
Module Measurement enabler (1) x
Module Measurement enabler with voltage sockets x
x
(1) disconnection to be performed also in the presence of Ekip Touch without Measuring package
Replacement The Measurement module can be replaced on its Trip unit, for details consult document 1SDH001000R0528.
If the Measurement module is replaced, module change is indicated on the display by an alarm in the diagnosis bar when the apparatus is powered for the first time.
To install the new module: · Confirm the installation module which appears automatically on the display · Execute manual control, available in the Settings menu (page46)
WARNING! if the Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package is present, module replacement could impair the performance values indicated on page 117; consult
ABB to assess solutions able to comply with your requirements
185 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Internal electronic accessories | 2 - Measurement
3 - Ekip Signalling 4K
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Signalling 4K is an accessory signaling module allowing programmable inputs/outputs to be managed. This module has: · four outputs and relative state led: O 01, O 02, O 03, O 04 · four digital inputs and relative state led: I 01, I 02, I 03, I 04 · a Power led with the startup status of the module
The module can be installed on Emax 2 E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers equipped with Ekip Touch trip unit.
NOTE: Ekip Signalling 4K can be installed on circuit-breakers in which AUX 6Q contacts are not present
Connections The module connects directly to the Mainboard, in the dedicated slot on the left-hand side of the display; the outputs and inputs of the module can be accessed from the upper terminal box of the circuit-breaker. To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0516. For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001.
Power supply Ekip Signalling 4K functions with Ekip Touch energized by auxiliary supply, with Ekip Supply or direct power supply, or via the Measurement enabler with voltage sockets module. The Power led comes on when the module is activated and functioning. NOTE: when the module is off, the output contacts are always in the open position and the state of the inputs is not valid
Output Each output consists of two contacts (O 01: K3-K7; O 02: K4-K8; O 03: K5-K9; O 04: K6-K10), isolated from the trip unit and other outputs, which have two physical states (contacts open or closed) and provide the following electrical characteristics:
Characteristics Maximum switchable voltage
Breaking capacity
Dielectric strength between open contacts Dielectric strength between each contact and coil
Maximum limit (1) 150 VDC / 250 VAC. 2 A @ 30 VDC, 0,8 A @ 50 VDC, 0,2 A @ 150 VDC, 4A @ 250 VAC 1000 V AC (1 minute @ 50 Hz). 1000 V AC (1 minute @ 50 Hz).
(1) data relating to a resistive load
All the outputs are independent and can be programmed so as to activate when one or more events occur (see Menu on page 187).
Input Each input consists of two contacts (I 01: H1-HC; I 02: H2-HC; I 03: H3-HC; I 04: H4-HC) and has two physical states: open circuit (> 100 k) and short circuit (< 50 )
All the inputs are independent and can be programmed so that an action or signaling are executed at the time of a specific change of state (see Menu on page 188).
Ekip Touch interprets the state of each input differently, on the basis of the electrical condition detected and the configuration of the contact programmed via the (polarity) menu:
Electrical condition Circuit open
Short-circuit
Contact configuration (polarity) Active open Active closed Active open Active closed
State detected ON OFF OFF ON
186 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Internal electronic accessories | 3 - Ekip Signalling 4K
Interface The module has nine signaling leds:
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Figure 122
LEDs Power O 01, O 02, O 03, O 04
I 01, I 02, I 03, I 04
Description Signals the state of the module (on or off)
Indicate the physical state of the contacts of each output: · off: contact open · on: contact closed
Indicate the physical state of the contacts of each input: · off: circuit open · on: short circuit
Menu The specific configuration area will activate in the Settings-Modules menu if the Ekip Signalling 4K module is connected correctly to Ekip Touch.
The programming submenus of the inputs and outputs are present inside.
Output parameters All the available outputs enable the following parameters to be configured:
Parameter Signal source
Delay Contact Type Latched (1)
Description
Default
Event which activates the output and changes the state of the contacts. Different protection proposals, statuses and thresholds are available in the menu; the Custom mode can be configured via Ekip Connect so as to extend the solutions and combine several events.
None
Minimum presence of Source for output activation; the Delay is given in
seconds and can be set within a range between 0 s and 100 s, in 0.01 s steps.
NOTES:
0 s
· output will not activate if Source deactivates before Delay has elapsed
· if delay = 0 s Source must still be present for longer than 300 mS
Defines the rest status of the contact with Source not present between either:
normally open (NO) and closed (NC).
NO
Output activation coincides with the change in state with respect to that of rest.
Allows the output to be managed differently when Source disappears: either
keep contact activated (On) or deactivate it (Off). NOTE: if Self-latching = On, the output resets if the module switches off,
Off
or in the case of a module auto test or signal reset command
Continued on the next page
187 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Internal electronic accessories | 3 - Ekip Signalling 4K
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Parameter
min Activation Time (2)
Description
If Self-latching = Off, defines the minimum activation time of the output in the presence of rapid Sources: · Source duration < Min activ. time = the output remains activated for the duration of the Min activ. time · Source duration < Min activ. time = the output remains activated for as long as the Source persists Choose between: 0 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms
Default 0 ms
(1) deactivate the self-latchings of the outputs used for Power Controller if the module is used for the Power Controller function (2) the Pulse Mode option will be available as well as those described if the module is used for the Power Controller function. If selected, the output is maintained active for a fixed time pertaining to the function itself, regardless of whether the event that activated it persists or not.
Input parameters All the inputs enable the following parameters to be configured:
Parameter Polarity
Delay
Description
Default
Defines whether the state of the input is ON when the contacts are open (Active open) or short-circuited (Active Closed)
Active closed
Minimum activation and deactivation time of an input enabling a change of
state to be recognized by the trip unit; the Delay is given in seconds and can
be set within a range between 0 s and 100 s, in 0.01 s steps.
NOTES:
0.1 s
· the trip unit will not detect a change of state if it is present for less
than the set Delay
· if Delay = 0 s, the change of state must still be more than 300 mS|ii|
About The About-Modules menu contains the specific area for Ekip Signalling 4K, in which the states of the inputs (On/Off) and outputs (Open/Closed) are present.
Test The dedicated area in the Test menu is activated if Ekip Signalling 4K is detected correctly by the trip unit. For details of the test characteristics, please consult page 134.
Commands and functions
If Self-latching = On, the activated output contacts can be reset with:
· automatic command RESET signaling, which can be programmed in the Settings-Modules-Functions menu of Ekip Touch or via Ekip Connect
· manual command via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via system bus communication
188 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Internal electronic accessories | 3 - Ekip Signalling 4K
4 - Ekip LCD
ABB | SACE Emax 2
The LCD version of the protection trip unit can be requested for installations in particularly aggressive environments (low temperatures, high degree of humidity, dust or chemical substances). The LCD version differs from the version with touchscreen display in: · Black and white LCD display. · Menu navigation by buttons. · The HOME button provides direct access to the page Menu. The Measurements pages can be accessed
using the ARROW UP and ARROW DOWN buttons from the page Histograms. (Main Page and Measuring Instruments area are not available). All the protection, measurement and accessory options are the same as those of the touchscreen version.
189 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Internal electronic accessories | 4 - Ekip LCD
External electronic accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - Ekip Supply
Ekip Supply is an accessory supply module. It is available in two models, depending on the incoming voltage to be provided.
It performs three functions: · supplies auxiliary power to Ekip Touch · allows the terminal box modules to be supplied and connected to Ekip Touch · acts as a bridge for the Local Bus between Ekip Touch and the external electronic accessories (e.g. Ekip
Signalling 10K and Ekip Multimeter) The module has a Power led to signal the presence of incoming power supply: · off: no supply · on (steady): supply present
Electrical characteristics Model
Power supply voltages Frequency Maximum power consumption without modules (1) Maximum power consumption with modules (2) Maximum inrush current
Ekip Supply 24-48VDC 21,5 ÷ 53 VDC -3 W 10 W 2 A for 20 ms
(1) Ekip Touch with just Ekip Supply (2) Ekip Touch with three modules connected with Ekip Cartridge
Ekip Supply 110-240 VAC/DC 105 ÷ 265 VAC/DC 45 ÷ 66Hz 3 VA/W 10 VA/W 2 A for 20 ms
Connections The module must be assembled in the first slot of the terminal box on the circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version).
For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; use AWG 22-16 cables with 1.4 mm maximum outer diameter for the external cabling.
To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0511.
190 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 1 - Ekip Supply
2 - Ekip Com Modbus RTU
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Com Modbus RTU is a communication accessory which allows Ekip Touch to be integrated into an RS485 network with Modbus RTU communication protocol, remote supervision and monitoring functions, in two different modes, master and slave.
You can perform the following operations remotely: · read Ekip Touch measurements and information · manage certain controls, including opening and closing the actuator · access information and parameters not available on the display · If connected to a withdrawable version of the circuit-breaker, the allows the racked-in/racked-out status
to be detected
NOTE: the remote open and close commands of the circuit-breaker can only be executed if Ekip Touch is in the Remote configuration and the circuit-breaker is equipped with the
Ekip Com Actuator module (page 234)
Ekip Com Modbus RTU is always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (page 234.
The System Interface document is available for mapping the module in its communication network. All the required communication and command details are listed in the document (page 182).
Models Two different modules compatible with the Modbus RTU protocol are available: Ekip Com Modbus RTU and Ekip Com Modbus RTU Redundant. The modules are identical in terms of characteristics and installation methods, except for: display menus, cabling and addresses for system communication, which are specific for each module.
NOTE: if different indications are not given, the information in the next chapter is valid for both models
The two modules can be connected at the same time to Ekip Touch so as to expand the potential of the unit (e.g. for applications where high grid reliability is required).
IMPORTANT: each Ekip Touch can be fitted with only one module per type. The configuration with two modules of the same model is not allowed (example: two
Ekip Com Modbus RTU Redundant)
Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version). To connect the module to its communication network and for references about the terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; use Belden 3105A type cables or equivalent for the external cabling. To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0512.
Power supply Ekip Com Modbus RTU is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected. NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of auxiliary power supply
191 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 2 - Ekip Com Modbus RTU
Interface the module has three signaling leds:
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Figure 123
LEDs Power
Rx Tx
Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch: · off: module off · on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on and communication with Trip unit present. · flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per second): module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicates the status of the communication between network master and module (slave): · off: Modbus RTU communication not activated · on with fast flashes: Modbus RTU communication activated
Indicates the status of the communication between network master and module (slave): · off: communication between Modbus RTU not activated · on with fast flashes: Modbus RTU communication activated
Configurations
ON
1 2 3 4
Figure 124
Resistor Rterm Rpol
Dip 1 and 2
3 and 4
Description
Default
120 termination resistor Move dip-switches 1 and 2 to the ON position to connect Rterm
Off
220 pull-up or pull-down resistor Move dip-switches 3 and 4 to the ON position to connect Rpol
Off
IMPORTANT: move the dip-switches before connecting the module to Ekip Supply and the communication network
192 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 2 - Ekip Com Modbus RTU
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Menu Local bus activation, which is essential for starting the communication between module and Ekip Touch, is available in the Settings menu (page 130).
Two areas are activated if Ekip Touch detects the module correctly:
· information area in the About-Modules menu, containing the software version and serial number of the module · specific configuration area in the Settings-Modules menu, where the following communication parameters
can be configured
Parameter Serial address
Baudrate
Physical protocol
Description
Default
Module address; 1 to 247 range available IMPORTANT: devices connected to the same network must 247 / 246 (1) have different addresses
Data transmission speed; 3 options are available: 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s, 38400 bit/s
19200 bit/s
Defines the stop and parity bit; 4 options are available: · 8,E,1 = 8 data bits, 1 EVEN parity bit, 1 STOP bit · 8,O,1 = 8 data bits, 1 ODD parity bit, 1 STOP bit · 8,N,2 = 8 data bits, no parity bit, 2 STOP bits · 8,N,1 = 8 data bits, no parity bit, 1 STOP bit
8,E,1
(1) 247 default of the Ekip Com Modbus RTU module; 246 default of the Ekip Com Modbus RTU Redundant module
Remote configurations The operating configuration can be changed from slave to master via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via system bus communication so as to integrate the module into an interactive data exchange network (see description of Ekip Com Hub, page 216).
IMPORTANT:
· In the Master configuration, the module does not allow data exchange as in the normal Slave function
· the presence of several masters in the same network can cause faulty operation
Remote information Certain additional information concerning the version and status of the module is available via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by communication via system bus; the information includes: HW and Boot version, CRC status (correctness of the SW in the module).
193 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 2 - Ekip Com Modbus RTU
3 - Ekip Com Profibus DP
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Com Profibus DP is a communication accessory which allows Ekip Touch to be integrated into an RS485 network with Profibus communication protocol, with remote supervision and monitoring functions.
The module is configured as a Slave and remotely, you can: · read Ekip Touch measurements and information · manage certain controls, including opening and closing the actuator (MOE-E) · access information not available on the display · If connected to a withdrawable version of the circuit-breaker, the allows the racked-in/racked-out status
to be detected
NOTE: the remote open and close commands of the circuit-breaker can only be executed if Ekip Touch is in the Remote configuration and the circuit-breaker is equipped with the
Ekip Com Actuator module (page 234)
Ekip Com Profibus DP is always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (page 234).
The System Interface document is available for mapping the module in its communication network. All the required communication and command details are listed in the document (page 182).
Models Two different modules compatible with the Profibus protocol are available: Ekip Com Profibus DP and Ekip Com Profibus DP Redundant The modules are identical in terms of characteristics and installation methods, except for: display menus, cabling and addresses for system communication, which are specific for each module.
NOTE: if different indications are not given, the information in the next chapter is valid for both models
The two modules can be connected at the same time to Ekip Touch so as to expand the potential of the unit (e.g. for applications where high grid reliability is required).
IMPORTANT: each Ekip Touch can be fitted with only one module per type. The configuration with two modules of the same model is not allowed (example: two
Ekip Com Profibus DP Redundant)
Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version). For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; use Belden 3079A type cables or equivalent for the external cabling. To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0512.
Power supply Ekip Com Profibus DP is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected. NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of auxiliary power supply
Interface the module has three signaling leds:
Figure 125 194 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Continued on the next page External electronic accessories | 3 - Ekip Com Profibus DP
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
LEDs Power
Rx Tx
Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch: · off: module off · on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on and communication with Trip unit present. · flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per second): module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicates the status of the communication between network master and module (slave): · off: communication between master and module not activated · on steady: communication between master and module activated
Indicates the status of the communication between network master and module (slave): · off: communication between master and module not activated · on flashing: communication between master and module activated
Configurations Resistors can be connected to the RS-485 bus by configuring the dip-switches at the side of the module:
ON
1 2 3 4
Figure 126
Resistor Rterm Rpol
Dip 1 and 2
3 and 4
Description 220 termination resistor Move dip-switches 1 and 2 to the ON position to connect Rterm
390 pull-up or pull-down resistor Move dip-switches 3 and 4 to the ON position to connect Rpol
Default Off
Off
IMPORTANT: move the dip-switches before connecting the module to Ekip Supply and the communication network
Menu Local bus activation, which is essential for starting the communication between module and Ekip Touch, is available in the Settings menu (page 46).
Two areas are activated if Ekip Touch detects the module correctly:
· information area in the About - Modules menu, containing the software version and serial number of the module
· specific configuration area in the Settings - Modules menu, where the following communication parameters can be configured:
Parameter Description
Module address; 1 to 126 range available
Serial address
IMPORTANT: devices connected to the same network must
have different addresses
Default 125 / 124 (1)
(1) 125 default of the Ekip Com Profibus DP module; 124 default of the Ekip Com Profibus DP Redundant module
Remote information Certain additional information concerning the version and status of the module is available via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by communication via system bus; the information includes: HW and Boot version, CRC status (correctness of the SW in the module).
195 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 3 - Ekip Com Profibus DP
4 - Ekip Com DeviceNet TM
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Com DeviceNet TM is a communication accessory which allows Ekip Touch to be integrated into a CAN network with DeviceNet TM communication protocol, with remote supervision and monitoring functions.
The module is configured as a Slave and remotely, you can: · read Ekip Touch measurements and information · manage certain controls, including opening and closing the actuator (MOE-E) · access information and parameters not available on the display · If connected to a withdrawable version of the circuit-breaker, the allows the racked-in/racked-out status
to be detected
NOTE: the remote open and close commands of the circuit-breaker can only be executed if Ekip Touch is in the Remote configuration and the circuit-breaker is equipped with the
Ekip Com Actuator module (page 234)
Ekip Com DeviceNet TM is always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (page 234).
The System Interface document is available for mapping the module in its communication network. All the required communication and command details are listed in the document (page 182).
Models Two different modules compatible with the DeviceNet TM protocol are available: Ekip Com DeviceNet TM and Ekip Com DeviceNet TM Redundant. The modules are identical in terms of characteristics and installation methods, except for: display menus, cabling and addresses for system communication, which are specific for each module.
NOTE: if different indications are not given, the information in the next chapter is valid for both models
The two modules can be connected at the same time to Ekip Touch so as to expand the potential of the unit (e.g. for applications where high grid reliability is required).
IMPORTANT: each Ekip Touch can be fitted with only one module per type. The configuration with two modules of the same model is not allowed (example: two
Ekip Com DeviceNetTM Redundant)
Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version). For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; use Belden 3084A type cables or equivalent for the external cabling. To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0512.
Power supply Ekip Com DeviceNet TM is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected. To function correctly, the DeviceNet TM bus must be supplied on terminals V+ and V- with a signal of over 12 VDC.
NOTE:
· the ABB PLC with DeviceNet (CM575-DN) communication module provides V+ V- supply · communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of power
supplies from Ekip Supply and on the supply terminals of the bus
196 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 4 - Ekip Com DeviceNet TM
Interface the module has three signaling leds:
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1
2
Figure 127
LEDs
Power
Network Status (1)
Network Status (2)
Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch: · off: module off · on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on and communication with Trip unit present. · flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per second): module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicates the communication status on the bus: · off: device off line (with Status led off) (1), or in the error condition (with Status led on) · on steady: device on line, and assigned to a master (operating condition) · on flashing: device on line, but not assigned to a master (device ready to communicate)
Indicates the communication status on the bus: · Off: no error. · On fixed: device in bus off, or Network Power absent. · On flashing: I/O connection (cyclic data) in timeout
(1) the device has not yet sent the Duplicate ID sequence in line
Configurations Resistors can be connected to the CAN bus by configuring the dip-switches at the side of the module:
ON
1234
Figure 128
Resistor Rterm
Dip 1 and 2
Description
Default
120 termination resistor Move dip-switches 1 and 2 to the ON position to connect Rterm
Off
IMPORTANT:
· move the dip-switches before connecting the module to Ekip Supply and the network · the termination resistors must never be included in the nodes; inclusion of this capacitance
could lead to a network with improper termination (impedance too high or too low), which could potentially cause a failure. For example, removal of a node comprising a termination resistor could lead to network failure · the termination resistors must never be installed at the end of a drop line but only at the ends of the main trunk line
197 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 4 - Ekip Com DeviceNet TM
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Menu Local bus activation, which is essential for starting the communication between module and Ekip Touch, is available in the Settings menu (page 46).
Two areas are activated if Ekip Touch detects the module correctly:
· information area in the About - Modules menu, containing the software version and serial number of the module
· specific configuration area in the Settings - Modules menu, where the following communication parameters can be configured:
Parameter MAC Address Baudrate
Description
Default
Module address; 1 to 63 range available IMPORTANT: devices connected to the same network must 63 / 62 (1) have different addresses
Data transmission speed; 3 options are available: 125 kbit/s, 250 kbit/s, 500 kbit/s
125 kbit/s
(1) 63 default of the Ekip Com DeviceNet TM module; 62 default of the Ekip Com DeviceNet TM Redundant module
Remote configurations Additional parameters can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus communication:
Parameter Class ID
Bus-Off Behavior
Description
Defines the addressing class of the module, either 8 or 16 bits.
Defines the behavior of the module following loss of communication (Bus-Off), with a choice between Standard (supply reset is awaited if the communication is lost) and Advanced (the module attempts to reset itself if it detects the error status).
Default 8-bit Class ID
DeviceNet standard
Remote information Certain additional information concerning the version and status of the module is available via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by communication via system bus; the information includes: HW and Boot version, CRC status (correctness of the SW in the module).
198 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 4 - Ekip Com DeviceNet TM
5 - Ekip Com Modbus TCP
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Com Modbus TCP is a communication accessory which allows Ekip Touch to be integrated into an Ethernet network with Modbus TCP communication protocol, with remote supervision and monitoring functions.
The module is configured as master and remotely, you can: · read Ekip Touch measurements and information · manage certain controls, including opening and closing the actuator (MOE-E) · access information and parameters not available on the display · If connected to a withdrawable version of the circuit-breaker, the allows the racked-in/racked-out status
to be detected
NOTE: the remote open and close commands of the circuit-breaker can only be executed if Ekip Touch is in the Remote configuration and the circuit-breaker is equipped with the
Ekip Com Actuator module (page 234)
Ekip Com Modbus TCP is always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (page 234). The System Interface document is available for mapping the module in its communication network. All the required communication and command details are listed in the document (page 182). Depending on the parameter settings, described in the next pages, the ports used by the module are:
Port 502/tcp 319/udp 20/udp 68/udp
Service Modbus TCP
IEEE 1588
DHCP client
Notes Valid for the Modbus TCP mode
Valid with IEEE 1588 protocol enabled
DHCP client enabled alternatively as: Static address = On
Safety and cyber security Since the module allows the actuator connected to Ekip Touch and access to the data in the unit to be checked, it can only be connected to networks equipped with all the necessary security and prevention measures against unauthorized access (for example, the network of the control system of an installation).
IMPORTANT:
· it is the customer's sole responsibility to provide and continuously ensure a secure connection between the module and customer network or any other network (as the case may be). The plant manager must establish and maintain appropriate measures (such as but not limited to the installation of firewalls, application of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of antivirus programs, etc.) to protect the product, the network, the customer system and interface against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or information. ABB and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to such security breaches, unauthorized accesses, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or information.
· The module cannot be connected directly to the Internet. Only connect to dedicated Ethernet networks with Modbus TCP communication protocol
Models Two different modules compatible with the Modbus TCP protocol are available: Ekip Com Modbus TCP and Ekip Com Modbus TCP Redundant.
The modules are identical in terms of characteristics and installation methods, except for: display menus, cabling and addresses for system communication, which are specific for each module.
NOTE: if different indications are not given, the information in the next chapter is valid for both models
The two modules can be connected at the same time to Ekip Touch so as to expand the potential of the unit (e.g. for applications where high grid reliability is required).
IMPORTANT: each Ekip Touch can be fitted with only one module per type. The configuration with two modules of the same model is not allowed (example: two
Ekip Com Modbus TCP Redundant)
199 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 5 - Ekip Com Modbus TCP
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version). For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; a cable of the Class 6 S/FTP type (Class 6 with double screening S/FTP) must be used for the communication bus. To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0514.
Power supply Ekip Com Modbus TCP is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected. NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of auxiliary power supply
Interface the module has three signaling leds:
2
1
Figure 129
LEDs Power
Link (1) Activity (2)
Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch: · off: module off · on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on and communication with Trip unit present. · flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per second): module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicates the communication state: · off: incorrect connection, signal absent. · on steady: connection correct
Indicates the communication state: · off: no activity on line · flashing: activity on line present (receiving and/or transmitting)
200 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 5 - Ekip Com Modbus TCP
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Configurations via menu Local bus activation, which is essential for starting the communication between module and Ekip Touch, is available in the Settings menu (page 127).
The following communication parameters can be configured if the module has been correctly detected by Ekip Touch in the Settings-Modules menu:
Parameter
Static IP address ON
Static address IP address Static Network Mask Static Gateway address
Description Defines whether the module has the dynamic (Off) or static (On) IP address. Se = On all the associated parameters are enabled
Enables the static IP to be selected
Default Off 0.0.0.0
Enables the subnet mask to be selected
0.0.0.0
When there are several subnets, enables the IP address of the node to which the module is connected to be selected
0.0.0.0
Information in menu The following information will be available in the About-Modules menu if Ekip Touch has detected the module correctly:
About SN and version
IP address
Network Mask Gateway address TCP Client 1, 2, 3 MAC address
Description Identifier and SW version of the module
Address of the module, assigned to the module by a DHCP server at the time of connection to the network in the case of configuration with a dynamic IP, or can be xset via the menu in the event of a static IP.
NOTE: without a DHCP server, the module automatically adopts a random IP address within the 169.254.xxx.xxx range
Subnet mask; identifies the method for recognizing the subnet to which the modules belong and enables modules to be searched for within a defined set of recipients.
IP address of the node to which the module is connected, in the presence of several subnets
IP addresses of the client devices connected to the module (in the Server mode)
Address assigned by ABB, with OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) equal to ac:d3:64, which uniquely identifies the manufacturer of an Ethernet device
201 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 5 - Ekip Com Modbus TCP
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Remote configurations Additional parameters can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus communication:
Parameter Description
Client/Server
Parameter for changing the configuration of the module from Server Only to Client and Server and for integrating it into an interactive data exchange network (see Ekip Com Hub on page 216)
IMPORTANT: if Client/Server, the module allows data exchange like a normal Server function
IEEE 1588 enable
Allows the IEEE 1588 protocol for distribution of the clock and synchronization signal to be enabled (1).
Master IEEE 1588
Enables the module to be set up as a master in the the network segment to which it belongs (synchronization clock).
IEEE 1588 delay Allows the data exchange mode between module and master, either
mechanism
Peer-to-Peer or End-to-End, to be selected.
SNTP Client enable
Allows the SNTP protocol for distribution of the clock and synchronization signal to be enabled (1)
Force Static IP Address
Allows the network server that supplies the SNTP to be set.
Time zone
Defines the time zone to be used for synchronism
Daylight Saving Used to select whether daylight saving time is present (ON) or not
Time
(OFF) in the country to which the synchronization time refers
Disabilita Gratuitos ARP
Permits (Enabled ARP) the periodic generation of a Gratuituos ARP message, used by Ekip Connect to rapidly find the modules via Ethernet scan without knowing the IP address beforehand
Access protected by password
Enables the writing operations performed via the network to be protected by a password (Request password)
Password
With access protected by enabled password, this is the password to
Modbus TCP use before each writing session (2).
Default
Server only
OFF OFF End-to-End OFF 0.0.0.0 +00:00 OFF ARP Enabled
Standard mode Local access
(1) Enable IEEE 1588 and Enable SNTP client must not be enabled at the same time (2) the parameter can only be changed via system bus in the remote configuration
Remote information Additional information can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus communication:
Information Boot and HW version Flash CRC status e result Stato Ekip Link SNTP Server Error SNTP Server Synchronisation
IEEE 1588 status
Description General module information Information about the correctness of the SW in the module Signals Ethernet cable connection errors Error in communication with SNTP server
State of synchronism with SNTP server
Valid with Master IEEE 1588= ON, notifies the presence (Slave or PTP Master Active) or absence (PTP Master but Passive) of the higher level master
202 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 5 - Ekip Com Modbus TCP
6 - Ekip Com Profinet
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Com Profinet is a communication accessory which allows Ekip Touch to be integrated into an Ethernet network with Profinet communication protocol, with remote supervision and monitoring functions.
The module is configured as master and remotely, you can: · read Ekip Touch measurements and information · manage certain controls, including opening and closing the actuator · access information not available on the display · If connected to a withdrawable version of the circuit-breaker, the allows the racked-in/racked-out status
to be detected
NOTE: the remote open and close commands of the circuit-breaker can only be executed if Ekip Touch is in the Remote configuration and the circuit-breaker is equipped with the
Ekip Com Actuator module (page 234)
Ekip Com Profinet is always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (page 234). The System Interface document is available for mapping the module in its communication network. All the required communication and command details are listed in the document (page 182. The ports used by the module are:
Ethertype 0x88CC 0x8892 (Profinet)
0x0802
Port -
34964/udp
Service LLDP Profinet IO Profinet-cm (Context manager)
Notes Link Layer Discovery Protocol Specific for real time communications (RT)
DCE/RPC
Safety and cyber security Since the module allows the actuator connected to Ekip Touch and access to the data in the unit to be checked, it can only be connected to networks equipped with all the necessary security and prevention measures against unauthorized access (for example, the network of the control system of an installation).
IMPORTANT:
· it is the customer's sole responsibility to provide and continuously ensure a secure connection between the module and customer network or any other network (as the case may be). The plant manager must establish and maintain appropriate measures (such as but not limited to the installation of firewalls, application of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of antivirus programs, etc.) to protect the product, the network, the customer system and interface against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or information. ABB and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to such security breaches, unauthorized accesses, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or information.
· The module cannot be connected directly to the Internet. Only connect to dedicated Ethernet networks with Profinet communication protocol
Models Two different modules compatible with the Profinet protocol are available: Ekip Com Profinet and Ekip Com Profinet Redundant.
The modules are identical in terms of characteristics and installation methods, except for: display menus, cabling and addresses for system communication, which are specific for each module.
NOTE: if different indications are not given, the information in the next chapter is valid for both models
The two modules can be connected at the same time to Ekip Touch so as to expand the potential of the unit (e.g. for applications where high grid reliability is required).
IMPORTANT: each Ekip Touch can be fitted with only one module per type. The configuration with two modules of the same model is not allowed (example: two
Ekip Com Profinet Redundant)
203 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 6 - Ekip Com Profinet
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version). For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; a cable of the Class 6 S/FTP type (Class 6 with double screening S/FTP) must be used for the communication bus. To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0514.
Power supply Ekip Com Profinet is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected. NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of auxiliary power supply
Interface the module has three signaling leds:
2
1
Figure 130
LEDs Power
Link (1) Activity (2)
Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch: · off: module off · on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on and communication with Trip unit present. · flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per second): module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicates the communication state: · off: incorrect connection, signal absent. · on steady: connection correct
Indicates the communication state: · off: no activity on line · flashing: activity on line present (receiving and/or transmitting)
Menu Local bus activation, which is essential for starting the communication between module and Ekip Touch, is available in the Settings menu (page 46).
The following information will be available in the About-Modules menu if Ekip Touch has detected the module correctly:
Information SN and version
MAC address
Description Identifier and SW version of the module
Address assigned by ABB, with OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) equal to ac:d3:64, which uniquely identifies the manufacturer of an Ethernet device
Remote information Certain additional information concerning the version and status of the module is available via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by communication via system bus; the information includes: HW and Boot version, CRC status (correctness of the SW in the module).
204 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 6 - Ekip Com Profinet
7 - Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM is a communication accessory which allows Ekip Touch to be integrated into an Ethernet network with EtherNet/IP TM communication protocol, with remote supervision and monitoring functions.
The module is configured as master and remotely, you can: · read Ekip Touch measurements and information · manage certain controls, including opening and closing the actuator · access information and parameters not available on the display · If connected to a withdrawable version of the circuit-breaker, the allows the racked-in/racked-out status
to be detected
NOTE: the remote open and close commands of the circuit-breaker can only be executed if Ekip Touch is in the Remote configuration and the circuit-breaker is equipped with the
Ekip Com Actuator module (page 234)
Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM is always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (page 234). The System Interface document is available for mapping the module in its communication network. All the required communication and command details are listed in the document (page 182. Depending on the parameter settings, described in the next pages, the ports used by the module are:
Port 44818 44818 2222 68/udp
Protocol TCP UDP UDP DHCP Client
Notes Encapsulation Protocol (example: ListIdentity, UCMM, CIP Transport Class 3) 44818 UDP Encapsulation Protocol (example: ListIdentity) 2222 UDP CIP Transport Class 0 or 1 DHCP client enabled alternatively as Static address = On
Safety and cyber security Since the module allows the actuator connected to Ekip Touch and access to the data in the unit to be checked, it can only be connected to networks equipped with all the necessary security and prevention measures against unauthorized access (for example, the network of the control system of an installation).
IMPORTANT:
· it is the customer's sole responsibility to provide and continuously ensure a secure connection between the module and customer network or any other network (as the case may be). The plant manager must establish and maintain appropriate measures (such as but not limited to the installation of firewalls, application of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of antivirus programs, etc.) to protect the product, the network, the customer system and interface against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or information. ABB and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to such security breaches, unauthorized accesses, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or information.
· The module cannot be connected directly to the Internet. Only connect to dedicated Ethernet networks with EtherNet/IP TM communication protocol
Models Two different modules compatible with the EtherNet/IP TM protocol are available: Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM and Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TMRedundant.
The modules are identical in terms of characteristics and installation methods, except for: display menus, cabling and addresses for system communication, which are specific for each module.
NOTE: if different indications are not given, the information in the next chapter is valid for both models
The two modules can be connected at the same time to Ekip Touch so as to expand the potential of the unit (e.g. for applications where high grid reliability is required).
IMPORTANT: each Ekip Touch can be fitted with only one module per type. The configuration with two modules of the same model is not allowed (example: two
Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM Redundant)
205 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 7 - Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version). For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; a cable of the Class 6 S/FTP type (Class 6 with double screening S/FTP) must be used for the communication bus. To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0514.
Power supply Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected. NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of auxiliary power supply
Interface the module has three signaling leds:
2
1
Figure 131
LEDs Power
Link (1) Activity (2)
Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch: · off: module off · on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on and communication with Trip unit present. · flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per second): module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicates the communication state: · off: incorrect connection, signal absent. · on steady: connection correct
Indicates the communication state: · off: no activity on line · flashing: activity on line present (receiving and/or transmitting)
Configurations via menu Local bus activation, which is essential for starting the communication between module and Ekip Touch, is available in the Settings menu (page 46).
The following communication parameters can be configured if the module has been correctly detected by Ekip Touch in the Settings-Modules menu:
Parameter
Static IP address ON
Static address IP address Static Network Mask Static Gateway address
Description Defines whether the module has the dynamic (Off) or static (On) IP address. Se = On all the associated parameters are enabled
Enables the static IP to be selected
Enables the subnet mask to be selected
When there are several subnets, enables the IP address of the node to which the module is connected to be selected
Default
OFF
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
206 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 7 - Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Information in menu The following information will be available in the About-Modules menu if Ekip Touch has detected the module correctly:
Information SN and version
IP address
Network Mask Gateway address MAC address
Description Identifier and SW version of the module
Address of the module, assigned to the module by a DHCP server at the time of connection to the network in the case of configuration with a dynamic IP, or can be set via the menu in the event of a static IP.
NOTE: without a DHCP server, the module automatically adopts a random IP address within the 169.254.xxx.xxx range
Subnet mask; identifies the method for recognizing the subnet to which the modules belong and enables modules to be searched for within a defined set of recipients.
IP address of the node to which the module is connected, in the presence of several subnets
Address assigned by ABB, with OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) equal to ac:d3:64, which uniquely identifies the manufacturer of an Ethernet device
Remote configurations Additional parameters can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus communication:
Parameter Description
Enable IEEE 1558
Allows the IEEE 1588 protocol for distribution of the clock and synchronization signal to be enabled (1).
IEEE 1558 Master
Enables the module to be set up as a master in the the network segment to which it belongs (synchronization clock).
IEEE 1558 Delay Allows the data exchange mode between module and master, either
mechanism
Peer-to-Peer or End-to-End, to be selected.
Enable client SNTP
Allows the SNTP protocol for distribution of the clock and synchronization signal to be enabled (1)
ANTP Server address
Allows the network server that supplies the SNTP to be set.
Time zone
Defines the time zone to be used for synchronism
Daylight Saving Used to select whether daylight saving time is present (ON) or not
Time
(OFF) in the country to which the synchronization time refers
Default OFF OFF End-to-End OFF 0.0.0.0 +00:00 OFF
(1) Enable IEEE 1588 and Enable SNTP client must not be enabled at the same time
Remote information Additional information can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus communication:
Information HW and Boot version Flash CRC status and result Ekip Link status SNTP Server Error SNTP Server Synchronization
IEEE 1558 status
Description General module information Information about the correctness of the SW in the module Signals Ethernet cable connection errors Error in communication with SNTP server State of synchronism with SNTP server Valid with Master IEEE 1588= ON, notifies the presence (Slave or PTP Master Active) or absence (PTP Master but Passive) of a higher level master
207 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 7 - Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM
8 - Ekip Com IEC 61850
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Com IEC 61850 is a communication accessory which allows Ekip Touch to be integrated into an Ethernet network with IEC 61850 communication protocol, with remote supervision and monitoring functions.
The module is configured as master and remotely, you can:
· read Ekip Touch measurements and information · manage certain controls, including opening and closing the actuator · access information and parameters not available on the display · transmit vertical communication (report) to superior supervision systems (SCADA), with statuses and
measurements (re-transmitted whenever and only if they change with respect to the previous report) · transmit horizontal communication (GOOSE) to other actuator devices (example: medium voltage
circuit-breakers), with all the information about status and measurements normally shared by Ekip Com communication modules via bus. · If connected to a withdrawable version of the circuit-breaker, the allows the racked-in/racked-out status to be detected
NOTE: the remote open and close commands of the circuit-breaker can only be executed if
Ekip Touch is in the Remote configuration the circuit-breaker is equipped with the
Ekip Com Actuator module (page 234)
Ekip Com IEC 61850 is always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (page 234).
The System Interface document is available for mapping the module in its communication network. All the required communication and command details are listed in the document (page 182).
The document also describes the configuration files for the IEC 61850 protocol and relative uploading procedure for assigning the Technical Name and enabling GOOSE messages if required (by setting the relative MAC Addresses)
Depending on the parameter settings, described in the next pages, the ports used by the module are:
Ethertype 0x0800-IP 0x88B8 0x0800-IP 0x0800-IP
Port 102 123 UDP 69 UDP
Protocol ISO Transport Service on top of the TCP (RFC 1006) GOOSE Messages NTP - Network Time Protocol TFTP - Trivial File Transfer Protocol
Safety and cyber security The module uses the HTTPS protocol and can be connected to the Internet
Since the module allows the actuator connected to Ekip Touch and access to the data in the unit to be checked, it can only be connected to networks equipped with all the necessary security and prevention measures against unauthorized access (for example, the network of the control system of an installation).
IMPORTANT:
· it is the customer's sole responsibility to provide and continuously ensure a secure connection between the module and customer network or any other network (as the case may be). The plant manager must establish and maintain appropriate measures (such as but not limited to the installation of firewalls, application of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of antivirus programs, etc.) to protect the product, the network, the customer system and interface against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or information. ABB and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to such security breaches, unauthorized accesses, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or information.
· The module cannot be connected directly to the Internet. Only connect to dedicated Ethernet networks with IEC 61850 communication protocol
208 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 8 - Ekip Com IEC 61850
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Models Two different modules compatible with the IEC 61850 protocol are available: Ekip Com IEC 61850 and Ekip Com IEC 61850 Redundant. The modules are identical in terms of characteristics and installation methods, except for: display menus, cabling and addresses for system communication, which are specific for each module.
NOTE: if different indications are not given, the information in the next chapter is valid for both models
The two modules can be connected at the same time to Ekip Touch so as to expand the potential of the unit (e.g. for applications where high grid reliability is required).
IMPORTANT: each Ekip Touch can be fitted with only one module per type. The configuration with two modules of the same model is not allowed (example: two
Ekip Com IEC 61850 Redundant)
Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version). For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; a cable of the Class 6 S/FTP type (Class 6 with double screening S/FTP) must be used for the communication bus. To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0514.
Power supply Ekip Com IEC 61850 is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected. NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of auxiliary power supply
Interface the module has three signaling leds:
2
1
Figure 132
LEDs Power
Link (1) Activity (2)
Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch: · off: module off · on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on and communication with Trip unit present. · flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per second): module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicates the communication state: · off: incorrect connection, signal absent. · on steady: connection correct
Indicates the communication state: · off: no activity on line · flashing: activity on line present (receiving and/or transmitting)
209 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 8 - Ekip Com IEC 61850
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Configurations via menu Local bus activation, which is essential for starting the communication between module and Ekip Touch, is available in the Settings menu (page 46).
The following communication parameters can be configured if the module has been correctly detected by Ekip Touch in the Settings-Modules menu:
Parameter
Description
Static IP address ON
Defines whether the module has the dynamic (Off) or static (On) IP address. Se = On all the associated parameters are enabled
Static address IP address Enables the static IP to be selected
Static Network Mask
Enables the subnet mask to be selected
Static Gateway address
When there are several subnets, enables the IP address of the node to which the module is connected to be selected
Enable SNTP client
Allows the SNTP protocol for distribution of the clock and synchronization signal to be enabled.
SNTP Server Addr.
Allows the network server that supplies the SNTP to be set.
Default OFF
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
OFF 0.0.0.0
Information in menu The following information will be available in the About-Modules menu if Ekip Touch has detected the module correctly:
Information SN and version
IP address
Network Mask Gateway address MAC address Cfg file Cfg file error
Description Identifier and SW version of the module
Address of the module, assigned to the module by a DHCP server at the time of connection to the network in the case of configuration with a dynamic IP, or can be set via the menu in the event of a static IP.
NOTE: without a DHCP server, the module automatically adopts a random IP address within the 169.254.xxx.xxx range
Subnet mask; identifies the method for recognizing the subnet to which the modules belong and enables modules to be searched for within a defined set of recipients.
IP address of the node to which the module is connected, in the presence of several subnets
Address assigned by ABB, with OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) equal to ac:d3:64, which uniquely identifies the manufacturer of an Ethernet device
Name of the configuration file uploaded to the modules
Code of the error concerning the configuration file (0 = no error)
210 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 8 - Ekip Com IEC 61850
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Remote configurations Additional parameters can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus communication:
Parameter Preferred configuration file Enable IEEE 1558 IEEE 1558 Master IEEE 1558 Delay mechanism Time zone Daylight Saving Time
TFTP Security level
CB Open/CB Close command
Falg word hex
Description
Default
If several configuration files are present, allows file hierarchy between .cid and .iid to be defined
.cid
Allows the IEEE 1588 protocol for distribution of the clock and synchronization signal to be enabled (1).
OFF
Enables the module to be set up as a master in the the network segment to which it belongs (synchronization clock).
OFF
Allows the data exchange mode between module and master, either End-to-
Peer-to-Peer or End-to-End, to be selected.
End
Defines the time zone to be used for synchronism
+00:00
Used to select whether daylight saving time is present (ON) or not (OFF) in the country to which the synchronization time refers
OFF
Defines the file loading procedure: · TFTP always On = port open, loading always possible · TFTP enable required = port normally closed. To start loading, Enable TFTP must be run at the start of the procedure and Disable TFTP must be run at the end of the procedure (disable not necessary, security command).
TFTP always On
Defines the limitations to remote opening and closing command
execution:
· Standard commands = standard commands (unrestricted) activated Standard
· CB operate request = standard commands not activated. Use
commands
programmable functions YC COMMAND and YO COMMAND, and
Request breaker open (28) and Request breaker close (29) commands
Sets a filter on the selectivity statuses
0
Remote information Additional information can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus communication:
Information HW and Boot version Flash CRC status and result Ekip Link status SNTP Server Error SNTP Server Synchronization
IEEE 1558 status
GOOSE Missing Configure Mismatch Decode Error Sequence number error Remote programmable statuses (from E to R) Zone selectivity remote inputs
Description General module information Information about the correctness of the SW in the module Signals Ethernet cable connection errors Error in communication with SNTP server State of synchronism with SNTP server Valid with Master IEEE 1588= ON, notifies the presence (Slave or PTP Master Active) or absence (PTP Master but Passive) of a higher level master Signals that an expected GOOSE has not been received
A GOOSE received does not conform to the expected structure
Condition (true/false) of the programmable states and information on selectivity arising from logic defined in the configuration files loaded in module IEC 61850
211 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 8 - Ekip Com IEC 61850
9 - Ekip Link
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Link is a communication accessory which allows Ekip Touch to be integrated into an internal Ethernet network with ABB proprietary protocol.
The following functions can be performed with the remote module: · Programmable Logic · Power Controller · Zone selectivity To perform these functions, the system units involved must be equipped with their own Ekip Link and for each of these, the IP addresses of all the other Ekip Link connected must have been entered.
Each devices is defined as an Actor in the Link network.
Each Ekip Link can interface with up to 15 actors, of which up to 12 for the Zone Selectivity function.
The ports used by the module are:
Port 18/udp 319/udp 320/udp 68/udp
Service ABB proprietary
IEEE 1588
DHCP client
Notes In the case of rapid exchanges of information among ABB devices
Valid with IEEE 1588 protocol enabled
DHCP client enabled alternatively as Static address = On
Ekip Link is always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (page 234).
Network The Ekip Link modules must be connected to a dedicated network that includes only Ekip Link and Ethernet switches for which support for level L2 multicast is declared in the datasheet.
If the network also includes routers, multicast must be enabled and configured in all the level L3 VLAN interfaces.
Programmable Logic Activation of up to four bits of the Ekip Link can be programmed via the Programmable Logic function, each bit according to any combination of the status bits of an actor of which the IP address has been entered.
These four bits are indicated as Statuses A B C and D; they are remotely programmable and their value is transmitted to the device to which Ekip Link is connected
Power Controller
Using the Power Controller function, each actor can:
· Acquire the status and control the loads · Act as master and collect the energy measurements of actors entered as Energy Meters · Supply energy measurements to actors entered as masters
The state of the loads can be acquired by checking the status of the inputs of the signaling modules connected to the actors of which the IP Addresses have been entered, while load control can be performed by programming the outputs.
Remote acquisition of the statuses of the loads and their control can also be performed with Ekip Signalling 10K connected to the network.
Further details about the potential of the function are available in White Paper 1SDC007410G0201 "Load management with Ekip Power Controller for SACE Emax 2".
212 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 9 - Ekip Link
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Zone selectivity
With the Zone Selecitivity function:
· the IP addresses entered refer to actors with the role of interlock with respect to the current role · the protections for which selectivity must be actuated by setting a mask, must be selected for each interlock
actor entered. Thus set, the function will now be indicated as logic in the following text so as to distinguish it from the standard function, now also indicated as hardware in the following text · thus selected, the protections add to those of the hardware S, I, G, D-Backward and D-Forward · hardware selectivity only, or both hardware and logic selectivity can be selected · diagnosis can be set, for each interlock release, to ascertain whether there is consistency between the hardware and logic selectivity information · a mask can be set for the purpose of identifying those protections whose received selectivity information must be re-transmitted, regardless of whether the actor is in the alarm status. The mask is only applicable to logic selectivity information
For further details about the Zone Selectivity function with Ekip Link, please consult page 90.
Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version).
For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; a cable of the Class 6 S/FTP type (Class 6 with double screening S/FTP) must be used for the communication bus.
To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0514.
Power supply Ekip Link is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected.
NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of auxiliary power supply
Interface the module has three signaling leds:
2
1
Figure 133
LEDs Power
Link (1) Activity (2)
Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch: · off: module off · on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on and communication with Trip unit present. · flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per second): module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicates the communication state: · off: incorrect connection, signal absent. · on steady: connection correct
Indicates the communication state: · off: no activity on line · flashing: activity on line present (receiving and/or transmitting)
213 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 9 - Ekip Link
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Configurations via menu Local bus activation, which is essential for starting the communication between module and Ekip Touch, is available in the Settings menu (page 46).
The following communication parameters can be configured if the module has been correctly detected by Ekip Touch in the Settings-Modules menu:
Parameter
Static IP address ON
Static address IP address Static Network Mask Static Gateway address
Description Defines whether the module has the dynamic (Off) or static (On) IP address. Se = On all the associated parameters are enabled
Enables the static IP to be selected
Enables the subnet mask to be selected
When there are several subnets, enables the IP address of the node to which the module is connected to be selected
Default
OFF
0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
Information in menu The following information will be available in the About-Modules menu if Ekip Touch has detected the module correctly:
Information SN and version
IP address
Network Mask Gateway address MAC address
Description Identifier and SW version of the module
Address of the module, assigned to the module by a DHCP server at the time of connection to the network in the case of configuration with a dynamic IP, or can be set via the menu in the event of a static IP.
NOTE: without a DHCP server, the module automatically adopts a random IP address within the 169.254.xxx.xxx range
Subnet mask; identifies the method for recognizing the subnet to which the modules belong and enables modules to be searched for within a defined set of recipients.
IP address of the node to which the module is connected, in the presence of several subnets
Address assigned by ABB, with OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) equal to ac:d3:64, which uniquely identifies the manufacturer of an Ethernet device
Remote configurations Additional parameters can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus communication:
Parameter
Description
Default
Client/Server
Parameter for changing the configuration of the module from Server Only to Client and Server and for integrating it into an interactive data exchange network (see Ekip Com Hub on page216).
IMPORTANT: if Client/Server, the module allows data exchange like a normal Server function
Server only
Enable IEEE 1558
Allows the IEEE 1588 protocol for distribution of the clock and synchronization signal to be enabled (1).
OFF
IEEE 1558 Master
Enables the module to be set up as a master in the the network segment to which it belongs (synchronization clock).
OFF
IEEE 1558 Delay mechanism
Allows the data exchange mode between module and master, either Peer-to-Peer or End-to-End, to be selected.
End-to-End
Enable client SNTP
Allows the SNTP protocol for distribution of the clock and synchronization signal to be enabled (1)
Off
ANTP Server address Allows the network server that supplies the SNTP to be set.
0.0.0.0
Time zone
Defines the time zone to be used for synchronism
+00:00
Daylight Saving Time
Used to select whether daylight saving time is present (ON) or not (OFF) in the country to which the synchronization time refers
OFF
Continued on the next page
214 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 9 - Ekip Link
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Parameter
Disable Gratuitous ARP
Password protected access Password Modbus TCP
Description
Default
Permits (Enabled ARP) the periodic generation of a Gratuituos ARP message, used by Ekip Connect to rapidly find the modules via Ethernet scan without knowing the IP address beforehand
ARP Enabled
Enables the writing operations performed via the network to be Standard
protected by a password (Request password)
mode
With access protected by enabled password, this is the password to use before each writing session (2).
Local access
(1) Enable IEEE 1588 and Enable SNTP client must not be enabled at the same time (2) the parameter can only be changed via system bus in the remote configuration
Remote Link configurations Regarding the Link functions, the following further parameters are available:
Parameter
Description
Default
Link Actor (1÷15)
IP address of each actor (from 1 to 15)
0.0.0.0
Remote Programmable Status (A÷D)
Configuration parameters of the configurable states: · selection of actor (actor from 1 to 15) which activates the programmable status · event of the actor that determines change of programmable status
Actor 1 None
Remote Status word (A÷D)
Configuration parameters of the words: · selection of actor (actor from 1 to 15) from which the word status is taken · selection of the taken word
None 1 global
Diagnostic
Active (Passive diagnosis) or deactivated (No diagnosis) cabled selectivity diagnosis
No Diagnostic
Diagnostic check timeout
30 s, 1 min, 10 min, 60 min diagnosis frequency intervals available, if activated
30 seconds
Zone Selectivity Type
Configuration of hardware selectivity (Only HW) or hardware and logic (Mixed)
HW only
Repeat Configuration mask
Interactive mask for selecting selectivity to be sent also to the upper levels (even if not active in the programmed device)
0x0000
Remote information Additional information can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus communication:
Information HW and Boot version Flash CRC status and result Ekip Link status SNTP Server Error SNTP Server Synchronization
IEEE 1558 status
Description General module information
Information about the correctness of the SW in the module
Signals Ethernet cable connection errors Error in communication with SNTP server
State of synchronism with SNTP server
Valid with Master IEEE 1588= ON, notifies the presence (Slave or PTP Master Active) or absence (PTP Master but Passive) of a higher level master
Remote Link information Regarding the Link functions, the following further parameters are available:
Information Line Congruency detection
Remote Programmable Status Remote Status Word Logic Zone Selectivity
Description Information about the state and inconsistency of HW and logic selectivity (state and type of selectivity inconsistent) Status (true/false) of remote programmable statuses A, B, C and D Value of remote programmable Words A, B, C, D Logic selectivity states (inputs and outputs)
215 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 9 - Ekip Link
10 - Ekip Com Hub
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Com Hub is a communication accessory that enables the data and measurements of Ekip Touch and other devices connected to the same installation to be gathered and then made available on the server through an Ethernet network.
The configuration of the module is available via Ekip Connect or with the System Interface document, which contains all the details. (page 182).
The ports used by the module are:
Port 67/udp 68/udp 443/tcp 123/udp 53/udp
Service DHCP client HTTPS SNTP DNS
Notes DHCP client enabled alternatively as Static address = On Always active when module is enabled Active with SNTP client enabled Always active
The Ekip Com Modbus RTU and Ekip Com Modbus TCP modules can be configured to support Ekip Com Hub in the collection of data to send to Cloud. See Getting Started 1SDC200063B0201.
Ekip Com Hub is always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (page 234).
Safety and cyber security The module uses the HTTPS protocol and can be connected to the Internet
IMPORTANT:
· it is the customer's sole responsibility to provide and continuously ensure a secure connection between the module and customer network or any other network (as the case may be). The plant manager must establish and maintain appropriate measures (such as but not limited to the installation of firewalls, application of authentication measures, encryption of data, installation of antivirus programs, etc.) to protect the product, the network, the customer system and interface against any kind of security breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or information. ABB and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to such security breaches, unauthorized accesses, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or information.
Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version). For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; a cable of the Class 6 S/FTP type (Class 6 with double screening S/FTP) must be used for the communication bus. To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0514.
Power supply Ekip Com Hub is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected.
NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of auxiliary power supply
216 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 10 - Ekip Com Hub
Interface the module has three signaling leds:
2
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1
Figure 134
LEDs Power
Link (1) Activity (2)
Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch: · off: module off · on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on and communication with Trip unit present. · flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per second): module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicates the communication state: · off: incorrect connection, signal absent. · on steady: connection correct
Indicates the communication state: · off: no activity on line · flashing: activity on line present (receiving and/or transmitting)
Configurations via menu Local bus activation, which is essential for starting the communication between module and Ekip Touch, is available in the Settings menu (page 46).
The following communication parameters can be configured if the module has been correctly detected by Ekip Touch in the Settings-Modules menu:
Parameter
Description
Default
Enable
Switches communication between module and server on/off.
Static IP address ON
Defines whether the module has the dynamic (Off) or static (On)
IP address.
Off
If = On all the associated parameters are enabled
Static address IP address Enables the static IP to be selected
0.0.0.0
Static Network Mask Enables the subnet mask to be selected
0.0.0.0
Static Gateway address
When there are several subnets, enables the IP address of the node to which the module is connected to be selected
0.0.0.0
Enable SNTP client
Allows the SNTP protocol for distribution of the clock and synchronization signal to be enabled.
Off
SNTP Server Addr.
Allows the network server that supplies the SNTP to be set.
0.0.0.0
Password
code required to register module on Cloud
---
Remote firmware update
Enables the firmware of the module to be updated. There are two parameters: · Enable, to configure firmware download · Automatic, to automate module updating
Off Automatic
217 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 10 - Ekip Com Hub
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Information in menu The following information will be available in the About-Modules menu if Ekip Touch has detected the module correctly:
Information SN and version
IP address
Network Mask Gateway address MAC address
Description Identifier and SW version of the module
Address of the module, assigned to the module by a DHCP server at the time of connection to the network in the case of configuration with a dynamic IP, or can be set via the menu in the event of a static IP.
NOTE: without a DHCP server, the module automatically adopts a random IP address within the 169.254.xxx.xxx range
Subnet mask; identifies the method for recognizing the subnet to which the modules belong and enables modules to be searched for within a defined set of recipients.
IP address of the node to which the module is connected, in the presence of several subnets
Address assigned by ABB, with OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) equal to ac:d3:64, which uniquely identifies the manufacturer of an Ethernet device
Remote configurations Additional parameters can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus communication:
Parameter Description
CRL Enable
Allows the CRL (Certificate Revocation List) to be used to ascertain whether the server certificate is valid
Clock update hardening enable
Enables control of the time reference transmitted by the SNTP server
SNTP Server Location
Enables the position of the SNTP server to be set in relation to the network in which the module is installed
SNTP Time zone Defines the time zone to be used for synchronism
SNTP Daylight Used to select whether daylight saving time is present (ON) or not Saving Time (OFF) in the country to which the synchronization time refers
Disable Gratuitous ARP
Permits (Enabled ARP) the periodic generation of a Gratuituos ARP message, used by Ekip Connect to rapidly find the modules via Ethernet scan without knowing the IP address beforehand
Default
+00:00 OFF ARP Enabled
218 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 10 - Ekip Com Hub
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Remote information Additional information can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus communication:
Information HW and Boot version Flash CRC status and result Publish enable configuration
Configuration file
Security file
Certificate Revocation List Executable file Configuration error Sample time Log time Upload time Configured device Polling period API events Connection client 1, 2, 3
Statistics
Status plant side
Status Cloud side
Application status
Status
Description General module information Information about the correctness of the SW in the module State of enabling in Security File Name of the file dedicated to the information to transmit (measurements, etc.) Name of the file dedicated to the information requested by the module for transmission purposes (addresses, certificates, etc.) Name of the file containing the revoked certificates Name of the executable firmware update file Module configuration error state Period of data acquisition from the connected devices Period within which the acquired data are saved in the log Period (calculated by the module) between each data transmission Number of modules involved in the network with Hub module Period in which the module communicates with the API device Address of TCP modbus clients connected to the module Recordings of the latest saving operations and percentage of resources being used Information about the quality of the communication with the other devices State of the errors concerning the TLS session established between module and server Operation progress indicators General indicators of the module: SNTP status, flash, cable connection, FW availability, file errors, etc.
219 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 10 - Ekip Com Hub
11 - Ekip Signalling 2K
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Signalling 2K is an accessory signaling module allowing programmable inputs/outputs to be managed.
This module has: · two contacts for output signals and relative status led · two digital inputs and relative status led · a Power led with the startup status of the module
Models Three different Signalling 2K modules are available: Ekip Signalling 2K-1, Ekip Signalling 2K-2 and RELT - Ekip Signalling 2K-3. The modules are identical in terms of characteristics and installation methods, except for: display menus, cabling and addresses for system communication, which are specific for each module.
NOTE: if different indications are not given, the information in the next chapter is valid for all three models
Two of the three modules can be connected at the same time to Ekip Touch so as to expand the potential of the unit (e.g. to increase the number of control outputs and inputs).
IMPORTANT: each Ekip Touch can be fitted with only one module per type. The configuration with two or three modules of the same model is not allowed
(example: two Ekip Signalling 2K-1 modules)
RELT - Ekip Signalling 2K-3
The RELT - Ekip Signalling 2k-3 module has a dedicated command (RELT Wizard) for auto-programming a set of trip unit parameters; The wizard ensures the activation of the 2I protection when the input of the RELT Ekip Signalling 2k-3 module active. In addition, the 2I is placed in local model and the RELT module's outputs are activated.
Below is a complete list of the parameters configured by the command:
Parameter 2I Protection (1)
2I Protection Function
Input I31 (RELT - Ekip Signalling 2K-3) Output O31 and O32 (RELT - Ekip Signalling 2K-3) SwitchOnLocal Function
Configuration from RELT Wizard command On; Threshold I31 = 1,5 In
Delay = 100 ms; Activation = depentent function; Function = RELT - Ekip Signalling 2K-3 Input 1 (I31)
Page 59
59, 89
Polarity = active closed; Delay = 0,1 s
221, 222
Signal source = 2I protection active; Delay = 0 s; Contact type = NO; Self-latching = OFF; min Activation Time = 0 ms
222
Function = 2I protection active; Delay = 0 s
89
(1) if Dual set is present, programming performed for both Set A and Set B The RELT setup Wizard can be found in the 2I protection menu and also the first time the trip unit is switched ON.
In the case that the wizard is not executed (or is rejected during the initial trip unit start up), the functionality and the characteristic of the RELT Ekip Signalling 2k-3 module will be as described in the following pages.
NOTE: The input is able to operate with a maximum input resistance of 25 Ohm. Wiring distance limitation have to be calculated from this value. As example: considering an
AWG20 cable with 29.5 Ohm/km and a microswitch with a resistance of few milliohm (negligible for the calculation) the limitation is: 25 (Ohm)/29.5 (Ohm/km)/2wires=0.423 km=423mt
Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version).
For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001 and 1SDM000019A1002; use AWG 22-16 cables with 1.4 mm maximum outer diameter for the external cabling.
To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0524.
220 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 11 - Ekip Signalling 2K
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Power supply Ekip Com Signalling 2K is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected. NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of auxiliary power supply
Input Ekip Touch can be configured so that the status of the inputs corresponds to actions or signals, with different programming options (page 222).
The connection of each input (H11 and H12 for model 2K-1, H21 and H22 for model 2K-2, H31 and H32 for model 2K-3) must be made with reference to the common contacts (HC).
The module permits two logic statuses, interpreted differently by Ekip Touch depending on the configuration selected for each contact:
State Open
Closed
Electrical condition Circuit open
Short-circuit
Contact configuration Active open Active closed Active open Active closed
Status detected by Trip unit ON OFF OFF ON
Output Ekip Touch can be configured so that the contacts of each output are closed or opened upon the occurrence of one or more events, with different programming options (page 222).
The output of each module consists of 2 contacts (K11-K12 and K13-K14 for model 2K-1; K21-K22 and K23-K24 for model 2K-2; K31-K32 and K33-K34 for model 2K-3), which are isolated from the unit and from the other outputs, and have the following electrical characteristics:
Characteristics Maximum switchable voltage
Breaking capacity
Dielectric strength between open contacts Dielectric strength between each contact and coil
Maximum limit (1) 150 VDC / 250 VAC 2 A @ 30 VDC, 0,8 A @ 50 VDC, 0,2 A @ 150 VDC, 4A @ 250 VAC 1000 V AC (1 minute @ 50 Hz). 1000 V AC (1 minute @ 50 Hz).
(1) data relating to a resistive load
Interface the module has three signaling leds:
Figure 135
LEDs Power
I 11, I 12 O 11, O 12
Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch: · off: module off · on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on and communication with Trip unit present. · flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per second): module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicate the status of the contacts of each output: · off: contact open · on: contact closed
Indicate the status of the contacts of each input: · off: circuit open · on: short circuit
221 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 11 - Ekip Signalling 2K
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Menu The specific configuration area will activate in the Settings - Modules menu if the Ekip Signalling 2K module is detected correctly by Ekip Touch. A specific menu containing the submenus of all the available and configurable inputs and outputs is available for each Ekip Signalling 2K module detected by Ekip Touch.
Input parameters All the available inputs enable the following parameters to be configured:
Parameter Polarity
Delay
Description
Default
Defines whether the input is interpreted as ON by Ekip Touch when it is open Active
(Active open) or when it is closed (Active Closed)
closed
Minimum activation time of the input before status change is recognized; the delay is given in seconds and can be set within range: 0 s to 100 s, in 0.01 s steps
NOTES: · if the input is deactivated before this time has elapsed the status change is not recognized · if delay = 0 s status change must still be more than 300 µS
0.1 s
Output parameters All the available inputs enable the following parameters to be configured:
Parameter Signal source
Delay
Contact Type Latched (1)
min Activation Time (2)
Description
Default
Event which activates the output and switches the contacts. Different protection proposals, statuses and thresholds are available on the display; the Custom mode can be configured via Ekip Connect so as to extend the solutions and combine several events
None
Minimum duration of the presence of the source before the output is
activated; the delay is given in seconds and can be set within range: 0 s to
100 s, in 0.01 s steps
NOTES:
0 s
· the output will not be switched if the source is deactivated before this
time has elapsed
· if delay = 0 s the source must still be present for longer than 300 µS
Defines the rest status of the contact with source not present between: open (NO) and closed (NC)
NO
Allows the output (and relative status led) to be kept activated (On) or deactivated (Off) when the event disappears
OFF
Defines the minimum closing time of the contact following the rapid presence
of sources:
· Source duration < min. activation = contact is activated for the minimum
activation time
0 ms
· Source duration min. activation = contact is activated for as long as the
source persists
Choose between: 0 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms
(1) deactivate the latchings of the outputs used if the Measurement module is used for the Power Controller function (2) if the Measurement module is used for the Power Controller function, the Power Controller option will also be available; if selected, the output is kept activated for a set time that depends on the function, regardless of whether the event that activated it persists
About The specific menu of the module available in the About - Modules menu contains:
· the serial number and version of the module · the statuses of the inputs (On/Off) and outputs (Open/Closed)
Test The test area in the Test menu is activated if the Ekip Signalling 2K module is detected correctly. For details of the test characteristics, please consult page 134.
Remote information Certain additional information concerning the version and status of the module is available via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by communication via system bus; the information includes: HW and Boot version, CRC status (correctness of the SW in the module).
222 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 11 - Ekip Signalling 2K
12 - Ekip Synchrocheck
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Synchrocheck is an accessory module that is used to control closing of an actuator when synchronism conditions, programmable by the user, exist.
To actuate synchronism: · Ekip Synchrocheck and the internal sockets measure, respectively, the voltage on the external contacts
(external voltage) and on the internal contacts (internal voltage) of the actuator · Ekip Synchrocheck manages a closing contact
NOTES:
· the actuator is described as a circuit-breaker in the following description and in the menus · with a generator and the actuator being configured: Normally, the external voltage is that of the
grid and the internal voltage is that of the generator
IMPORTANT: only one Ekip Synchrocheck can be installed on each CB
Mode The module operates in two modes, configurable by the user (manual-mode configuration) or managed automatically by the unit (automatic-mode configuration).
Conditions
Busbar active
Dead busbar and configuration: Normal
Description
Operation with external voltage other than zero: · synchronism search starts if the external voltage is (0.5 Un by default) or more, for at least (1 s by default) · synchronism is considered to have been reached if the differences between RMS values and frequencies and the voltage phases are (0.12 Un, 0.1 Hz, and 50° by default) or less
Operation with one of the voltages nil: · synchronism search starts if the internal voltage is (0.5 Un by default) or more, for at least (1 s by default) · synchronism is considered to have been reached if the external voltage is (0.2 Un by default) or less, for at least (1 s by default)
NOTE: with dead busbar and configuration: Reversed, the roles of the internal and external voltages are reversed
Synchronism signal: · is activated and maintained, after synchronism has been reached, for at least 0.2 s · is deactivated when synchronism ends or the circuit-breaker is opened (with condition: Evaluate CB status
= enabled) or communication with Ekip Touch is interrupted
Additional functions Certain options can be remotely configured in the synchronism conditions described above: · the open circuit-breaker condition can be added (disabled by default) · removal of the frequency and phase controls can be disabled
IMPORTANT: to be able to disable the frequency and phase controls, first make sure that the required frequency and phase correspondence between external and
internal contacts already exists
223 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 12 - Ekip Synchrocheck
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version). For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; use AWG 22-16 cables with 1.4 mm maximum outer diameter for the external cabling. To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0513.
Power supply Ekip Com Synchrocheck is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected. NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of auxiliary power supply
Input Ekip Synchrocheck has an input (V S1 - V S2) for reading voltage, operation of which is ensured within the ranges and with the performance given below:
Component Voltage Frequency (3) Phase (5)
Operating range 0÷120 VAC 30÷80 Hz -
Normal operating range 10 ÷ 120 VAC 30 ÷ 80 Hz -180 ÷ +180 °
Accuracy (1) 1 % (2) 0,1 % (4) 1 °
(1) the accuracy values refer to normal operating ranges, as established by IEC 61557-12 (2) with busbar activated (3) with the busbar activated, frequency measurement starts at 36 V AC and ends at 32 V AC measured
voltage (4) in the absence of harmonic distortion (5) phase measurement refers to the phase difference between internal and external voltage
Isolation transformer
An isolating transformer with the characteristics given below must always be installed between the external contacts of the circuit-breaker and the input of the module:
Characteristics Mechanical
Electrical
Description
· fixing: EN 50022 DIN43880 rail · material: self-extinguishing thermoplastic · protection class: IP30 · electrostatic protection: with earth connector shield
· accuracy class: 0,2 · performance: 4 VA · overload: 20% permanent · insulations: 4 kV between inputs and outputs, 4 kV between screen and outputs, 4 kV between screen and inputs · frequency: 45 to 66 Hz
Output Ekip Synchrocheck has an output (K S1 - K S2) used as synchronism contact. The output is insulated from the unit and input, and has the following electrical characteristics:
Characteristics Maximum switchable voltage
Breaking capacity
Dielectric strength between open contacts Dielectric strength between each contact and coil
Maximum limit (1) 150 VDC / 250 VAC. 2 A @ 30 VDC, 0,8 A @ 50 VDC, 0,2 A @ 150 VDC, 4A @ 250 VAC 1000 V AC (1 minute @ 50 Hz). 1000 V AC (1 minute @ 50 Hz).
(1) data relating to a resistive load
224 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 12 - Ekip Synchrocheck
Interface the module has three signaling leds:
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Figure 136
LEDs Power
O SC
Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch: · off: module off · on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on and communication with Trip unit present, flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (two fast flashes per second): module on and communication with Trip unit absent
Indicate the status of the contacts of each output: · off: contact open · on: contact closed
NOTE: The LED shows the output status: it indicates synchronization OK or KO, depending on the contact rest configuration (normally open or closed)
Configurations via menu The specific configuration area will activate in the Advanced - Synchrocheck menu if the Ekip Synchrocheck module is detected correctly by Ekip Touch.
Parameter Enable Dead bar option Udead T hreshold (1)(2)
Ulive Threshold (2)(3)
Stability Time
Delta Voltage
Delta frequency (4)
Delta phase (4)
Description
Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu
Off
On = busbar activated; Off = dead busbar present
Off
Maximum external voltage (with dead busbar and configuration: Normal (2) is the first synchronism condition) The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) and can be set within the range: 0.02 Un to 2 Un, in 0.001 Un steps
0.2 Un
Minimum voltage for starting monitoring of external voltage (with busbar
activated) or internal voltage (with dead busbar and Normal configuration) The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un)
0.5 Un
and can be set within the range: 0.5 Un to 1.1 Un, in 0.001 Un steps
Minimum time within which the Ulive Threshold condition must be
obtained in order to activate voltage monitoring The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 100 ms to
1 s
30 s, in 1 ms steps
Maximum difference between internal and external voltage (first synchronism condition) The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) and can be set within the range: 0.02 Un to 0.12 Un, in 0.001 Un steps
0.12 Un
Maximum difference between internal and external frequency (second synchronism condition) The value is given in Hertz and can be set within the range: 0.1 Hz to 1 Hz in 0.1 Hz steps
0.1 Hz
Maximum difference between internal and external phase (third
synchronism condition) The value is given in degrees and can be set within the range: 5° to 50° in
50 °
5° steps
Continued on the next page
225 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 12 - Ekip Synchrocheck
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Parameter Dead bar configuration
Auto Live-dead detect
Auto Deadbar detect
Primary voltage Secondary voltage Concatenated Ref Contact Type
Description
Default
With dead busbar and generator: · Reversed = Ekip Synchrocheck/external contacts connected to the generator · Normal = Ekip Synchrocheck/external contacts connected to the grid
Standard
Enables automatic synchronism control to be activated: · Manual = Ekip Touch considers the Dead bar option parameter · Automatic = Ekip Touch automatically assesses the configuration to be actuated between the dead busbar and active busbar
Manual
Configuration for detecting dead busbar: · Manual = Ekip Touch considers the Dead bar configuration parameter · Automatic = Ekip Touch automatically assesses the configuration to be actuated between: Reversed and Normal
Manual
Rated voltage Un of installation; the value is given as absolute value (Volts) and can be set within the range: 100 V to 1150 V in variable steps.
100 V
Secondary voltage of the transformer; the value is given as absolute value (Volts) and can be set within the range: 100 V to 120 V in variable steps.
100 V
Line-to-line voltage entering the module among the 3 installation voltages U12
Defines the rest status of the contact with synchronism not present between: open (NO) and closed (NC)
NO
(1) parameter not available with busbar active and Auto deadbar detect= Manual (2) with dead busbar and configuration: Reversed, the roles of the internal and external voltages are reversed (3) 10% hysteresis is applied to the minimum voltage condition: once reached, the condition is lost if the
voltage drops below 90% of the set limit (4) parameter not available with dead busbar and Auto deadbar detect= Manual
NOTE: all the thresholds have ±10% tolerance with the exception of:
· Voltage Delta; the tolerance is the higher value between: ±10% of the set threshold and 0.5% Un (with Un > 220 V) or 1% Un (with Un 220V)
· Frequency Delta; the tolerance is the higher value between ±10% of the set threshold and 0.02 Hz
Remote configurations Additional parameters can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus communication:
Parameter Description
Default
Frequency check
Activates (ON) or deactivates (OFF) frequency control for synchronism assessment
ON
Phase check Activates (ON) or deactivates (OFF) phase control for synchronism assessment ON
Activates (YES) or deactivates (NO) circuit-breaker open status control for
Evaluate CB synchronism assessment
status
NOTE: fourth synchronism condition with busbar active; second
NO
synchronism condition with dead busbar
With active busbar, minimum time within which the Delta Phase condition must
be obtained
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 100 ms to 3 s,
Minimum matching time
in 10 ms steps NOTE: this is not a synchronism condition, but a parameter allowing a discrimination to be made between correct and incorrect combinations of
100 ms
the Delta Frequency and Delta Phase conditions. Owing to worst case
latencies, the time that effectively elapses before synchronism is
recognized may be longer than the set time (approx. 20 ms)
226 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 12 - Ekip Synchrocheck
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Measurements The specific measurement area will activate in the Measurements - Synchrocheck menu if the Ekip Synchrocheck module is detected correctly by Ekip Touch.
Measurement Module Frequency
Voltage
Phase
Ext Side Voltage (1) Int Side Voltage (2) Ext Side Frequency (1) Int Side Frequency (2) Phase Difference (1)
Auto detection
Voltage relation
Frequency relation
Description
· Ok = Synchronism conditions fulfilled · Not Ok = Synchronism conditions not fulfilled or function disabled
· Ok = Synchronism condition regarding frequencies fulfilled · Not Ok = Synchronism condition regarding frequencies not fulfilled or synchronism function disabled, or frequencies outside measuring range limits. · --- = Synchronism condition regarding frequencies not available (example: for operation with dead busbar)
· Ok = Synchronism conditions regarding voltages fulfilled. · Not Ok = Synchronism conditions regarding voltages not fulfilled or synchronism function disabled
· Ok = Synchronism condition regarding phase difference fulfilled · Not Ok = Synchronism condition regarding phase difference not fulfilled or synchronism function disabled, or frequencies outside measuring range limits · --- = Synchronism condition regarding phase difference not available (example: for operation with dead busbar)
· Voltage measured by Ekip Synchrocheck given in Volts · .... = measurement DC or less than 1 VAC · --- = measurement not available (example: because synchronism function is disabled)
Voltage measured on internal sockets, given in Volts. · .... = measurement less than 1 VAC
Frequency measured by Ekip Synchrocheck · --- = measurement not available (example: because synchronism function is disabled, or operation with dead busbar, or frequencies outside measuring range limits)
Frequency measured on internal sockets · --- = measurement not available (example: because synchronism function is disabled, or operation with dead busbar, or frequencies outside measuring range limits)
Phase difference between voltages, given in degrees · --- = measurement not available (example: because synchronism function is disabled, or operation with dead busbar, or frequencies outside measuring range limits)
· Busbar active = with automatic detection of operating mode and operation with active busbar, or with synchronism function not enabled · Dead bar = with automatic detection of operating mode and operation with dead busbar · --- = Measurement not available (example: owing to manual detection of operating mode)
· Vint Vext = Internal voltage the same as external voltage or lower · Vin > Vext = Internal voltage higher than external voltage · --- = Measurement not available (example: because the synchronism function is disabled, or direct voltages or voltages lower than 1 V).
· fint fext = Internal frequency the same as external frequency or lower · fin > fext = Internal frequency higher than external frequency · --- = Measurement not available (example: because synchronism function is disabled, or operation with dead busbar, or frequencies outside measuring range limits)
(1) voltage difference measurement accuracy is ± 10% unless the parameter value is 0.02 Un, in which case accuracy is ± 20% (2) the characteristics of the voltage and frequency measurements coincide with those given on the internal sockets (page 110)
227 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 12 - Ekip Synchrocheck
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Summary page The summary page is activated in the presence of the Ekip Synchrocheck module; access is obtained in the same way as the other summary pages (page 40). The measurements in this page are: · V int: voltage read by Ekip Touch · f int: frequency read by Ekip Touch · : phase difference · SYNC: status of synchronism
About The About - Modules menu contains the specific menu of the module with the serial number and version of the module itself.
Remote information Certain additional information concerning the version and status of the module is available via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by communication via system bus; the information includes: HW and Boot version, CRC status (correctness of the SW in the module).
228 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 12 - Ekip Synchrocheck
13 - Ekip Signalling 3T
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Signalling 3T is a signaling accessory which enables the connection of: · three analog inputs for PT100/PT1000 temperature sensors (2 wires): I42, I43, I44 · an analog input for 4-20mA current loop: I41 The measurements supplied by the module can be associated with different control threshold, useful for configuring alarm signals, states and programmable commands.
NOTE: PT100 temperature sensors are compatible only with Ekip Signalling 3T module installed on Emax 2 with black platform.
Models Ekip Touch can be configured with two different 3T modules: Ekip Signalling 3T-1 and Ekip Signalling 3T-2.
NOTE: if different indications are not given, the information in the next chapter is valid for both models; on the second module the inputs are called I51 (lopp 4-20mA), I52, I53,
I54 (PT100/PT1000)
The two modules can be installed at the same time on the same circuit-breaker so as to extend the opportunities for measuring and monitoring the installation.
IMPORTANT: each circuit-breaker can only be fitted with one module per type. Configuration with two modules of the same model is not allowed (example: two
Ekip Signalling 3T-1 modules)
Connections For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001 To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0527. For PT100/PT1000 sensors, use insulated cables for resistance thermometers such as PENTRONIC TEC/ SITW-24F (Type TX) or similar. Maximum length 3 meters. For the 4-20mA Current Loop sensor, use suitable cables up to 3 meters in length compatible with the workplace in which the 4-20mA current sensor is used.
IMPORTANT: the inputs are not insulated: regardless of plant voltage, the customer must ensure there is insulation between each input and between the inputs and
power supply of the Ekip Supply module on the basis of the customer's own application and network.
For applications in low voltage installations ABB suggests use of the external probe PT1000 3mt, is equippped with a nut and screw for use on busbars and is compatible with the dielectric withstand and insulation levels established by standard IEC 609472 (Ui= 1000 V, Uimp= 12 kV).
Power supply Ekip Signalling 3T is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected.
NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of auxiliary power supply
229 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 13 - Ekip Signalling 3T
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Input The module enables the following quantities to be measured
Input PT100/PT1000 4-20mA current loop
Measurement Temperature DC current
Range -50 ÷ 250 °C (2) 0 ÷ 100 % (3)
Resolution 0,01 °C 0.1 %
Accuracy (1) ± 1 °C ± 0,5 % (4)
(1) accuracy values refer to 3T module without sensors. For complete accuracy, consider the characteristics of
the sensors and cabling used; accuracy increases by 0.5°C with the ABB sensor (2) with ABB PT1000 sensor, the range is -25 ÷ 150°C (3) the measurement is expressed as a percentage, where: 0% = 4 mA and 100% = 20 mA (4) accuracy values refer to full scale: 0.5%= 0.1 mA
Interface Five signalling leds are available:
Figure 137
LEDs Power I 41, I 42, I 43, I 44
Description
Signals the on state and correct communication with the trip unit: · off: module off · on steady or flashing synchronized with the trip unit Power led: module on and communication with trip unit present · flashing not synchronized with trip unit Power led (two fast flashes per second): module on and communication with trip unit absent
Indicate the state of the input contacts: · off: input disabled · on steady: input enabled, sensor connected and measurement valid · flashing: input enabled, sensor not connected and/or measurement not valid
Access from the display
The following areas are activated on Ekip Touch if the Ekip Signalling 3T module is detected correctly:
· Measurements page, accessible from the Home page, containing the measurements of all the PT100/ PT1000 and 4-20mA Current Loop inputs of both modules 3T-1 and 3T-2
· information submenus in the About-Modules menu containing: serial number, module version and statuses of sensors (Present/Alarm)
IMPORTANT:
· if one or more sensors are in the alarm status, the signal on the diagnosis bar will be: Ekip Signalling 3T
· if a sensor is not enabled, the status indicated is: Present
Remote configurations
The configuration of the module is available:
· via Ekip Connect, with communication accessories via service connector or with communication via system bus
· via own communication system and Ekip Com modules installed on circuit-breaker, in the conditions required by the trip unit (use System Interface for details)
All the measurements, states and alarms of the module are available in both conditions.
NOTE: parameters and measurements are distributed in Ekip Connect pages and communication addresses sometimes nonsequential; references to the pages in Ekip Connect 3 are
given in the tables below
230 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 13 - Ekip Signalling 3T
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Enabling and measurements The individual inputs of the modulecan be enabled in the Ekip Signalling 3T page: I42 Temperatures, I43 Temperatures, I44 Temperatures, I41 Current 4-20mA (per 3T-1), I52 Temperatures, I53 Temperatures, I54 temperatures, I51 Current 4-20mA (for 3T-2).
Parameter Enable
Description
Enables the specific input and relative alarm state and signaling controls to be activated
Default Enabled
Alarm signals Up to three alarm thresholds (independent of each other), Threshold A, Threshold B, Threshold C, can be activated and configured for each input in the Protection parameters - Other parameters A (and B if dual set is activated) page
Each alarm threshold has the following configuration parameters:
NOTE: the table lists the parameters of threshold A of input I42; the names and references of all the other thresholds and inputs change
Parameter
Description
Default
Threshold A enable Activates verification of input I42 with alarm Threshold A
Off
Threshold A hysteresis direction
Defines whether the alarm must activate when measurement is above (Up) or below (Down) the set value, with reference to the Threshold A setting
Up
Threshold A value
Alarm threshold A of input I42. The value is given in degrees Celsius
(°C) and can be set within the range: -40°C to 240°C, in 0.1°C steps.
NOTE: the thresholds of the 4-20mA (I41 and I51) Current Loop input are given in percentage form and can be set within the range: 0% to 100 %, in 0.1% steps (each step equivalent
200 °C (I42, I43, I44, I52, I53, I54) / 50 % (I41, I51)
to 0.016µA)
Threshold A hysteresis
Hysteresis value, valid for quitting the alarm condition if the set
Treshold A alarm threshold has been exceeded.
The hysteresis parameter only allows positive values. The trip unit
decides whether to add or subtract this value to or from the alarm
threshold on the basis of the direction parameter, example: · Direction = Up, Value = 200°C, hysteresis= 10°C, the alarm activates over 200° and de-activates below 190°C The value is expressed in degrees Celsius (°C) and can be set within the range: 0°C to 50°C with 0.1°C steps.
1 °C (I42, I43, I44, I52, I53, I54) / 1 % (I41, I51)
NOTE: the thresholds associated with the 4-20mA (I41 and
I51) Current Loop input are given in percentage form and can
be set within the range 0% to 30 %, in 0.1% steps (each step
equivalent to 0.016µA)
States and alarms The state of all control thresholds can be checked in the Warnings/Alarms page
231 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
External electronic accessories | 13 - Ekip Signalling 3T
Other electronic accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - Ekip Signalling 10K
Ekip Signalling 10K is an external accessory signaling module. It can be installed on a standard 35 mm DIN rail (DIN EN 50022 type TS 35x15 mm). This module has: · Ten programmable output contacts · Ten or eleven programmable digital inputs · One power led and twenty or twenty-one signaling leds (one for each input/output) The module can be set in four different configurations · One in case of connection to a Link bus network · Three configurations in case of connection via Local Bus (to allow up to three modules to be connected
to the same trip unit) The module can be supplied by 110...240 V AC / DC or 24...48 V DC. Further details about Ekip Signalling 10K are available in ABB Library, especially in document 1SDH001318R0002.
IMPORTANT: make sure that you have read the recommendations concerning safety and prevention of unauthorized access.
2 - Ekip Signalling Modbus TCP
Ekip Signalling Modbus TCP is an external accessory module. It can be installed on a standard 35 mm DIN rail (DIN EN 50022 type TS 35 x 15 mm).
Its function is to share on another Ethernet network with communication protocol.
The module has 11 digital inputs and 10 output contacts: · The inputs allow the state of the devices and other information to be monitored · The outputs allow the circuit-breakers to be operated. Each input and output is associated with a state LED.
The module can function in three different modes:
Mode CB Supervisor
Multi MCCB Supervisor
Characteristics
The module can be associated with a single circuit-breaker, which can be selected from a list. Configuration of the inputs and output is pre-defined
The module can be associated with up to five circuit-breakers. Configuration of the inputs and output is pre-defined.
NOTE:mode available with moulded-case circuit-breakers
Free I/O
The inputs and outputs can be fully configured by the user
The module can be supplied by 110...240 V AC / DC or 24...48 V DC.
Further details about Ekip Signalling Modbus TCP are available in ABB Library, especially in document 1SDH001456R0002.
232 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Other electronic accessories | 2 - Ekip Signalling Modbus TCP
3 - Ekip Multimeter
4 - Rc Toroid 5 - Toroid S.G.R.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Multimeter is a remote display panel-front module with touchscreen display allowing the parameters of the Trip unit to which it is connected via local bus to be displayed and edited.
Up to four Ekip Multimeter modules can be connected to the same Trip unit. On the other hand, the module can only be connected to one Trip unit.
The rear connector allows the unit to be supplied in two different ways:
Terminals / supply voltage 21,5 ÷ 53 VDC 105 ÷ 265 VAC/DC
Frequency 45 ÷ 66 Hz
Power input Maximum 10W Maximum 10 VA/W
Inrush current Maximum 2 A for 20 ms Maximum 2 A for 20 ms
IMPORTANT: AC and DC supplies cannot be present at the same time
The module provides for 24 VDC auxiliary voltage (terminals 24Vout L+ and L-), which can be used to directly supply the Trip unit.
WARNING! Ekip Multimeter is sized to supply the Trip unit alone, without additional modules: if auxiliary voltage is used via module, it must be connected directly
to the terminal box of the CB without the possibility of using Ekip Supply or other modules
Connections Belden 3105A cables or equivalent, up to 15 m in length, must be used for the local bus and auxiliary supply. The cable shield must be earthed on both sides of the connection. Documents Further details are available in ABB Library, especially in document 1SDH001000R0520.
Rc is an external differential current sensor which can be installed on Ekip Touch Trip units equipped with Rc Rating Plug.
When Ekip Touch is being programmed, check in the Settings-Circuit breaker-Ground protection menu to make sure that the sensor is present (page 46, the configuration menu of the Rc protection parameters must be activated in the Advanced menu (page 44).
IMPORTANT: the toroid can be choosen as an alternative to the S.G.R. one: protections Gext, MDGF and Rc are alternatives to each other
Further details about the Rc toroid connection are available in ABB Library, especially in document 1SDH001000R0521.
|i|S.G.R. or Source Ground Return is an external single-pole current sensor available for LSIG version Ekip Touch Trip units
When Ekip Touch is being programmed, check in the Settings-Circuit breaker-Ground protection menu to make sure that the sensor is present (page 46, the configuration menu of the Gext protection parameters must be activated in the Advanced menu (page 44).
IMPORTANT: the toroid can be choosen as an alternative to the Rc one; protections Gext, MDGF and Rc are alternatives to each other
Further details about the S.G.R. toroid connection are available in ABB Library, especially in document 1SDH001000R0507.
233 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Other electronic accessories | 5 - Toroid S.G.R.
- External neutral
ABB | SACE Emax 2
This is a current sensor for the neutral pole outside the circuit-breaker. It is provided only for three-pole circuit breakers. It allows protection of the neutral to be implemented through the connection to the Ekip trip unit. It is supplied on request. Further information on the connection of the external neutral is available on the website http://www.abb.com/ abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular in the kit sheets: · 1SDH001000R0506 for circuit breakers E2.2. · 1SDH001000R0515 for circuit breakers E4.2 and E6.2.
6 - Ekip Com Actuator
Ekip Com Actuator is an accessory module which allows SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers to be opened and closed remotely.
The module is installed on the front of the circuit-breaker, in the accessories area.
For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDH000999R0501 and 1SDH001000R0501
The Ekip Com Actuator module is supplied on request and is compatible with all Ekip Touch Trip units when the Ekip Com or Ekip Link modules are installed.
7 - Ekip AUP
The communication modules are always supplied with dedicated Ekip AUP auxiliary position contacts. In case of a withdrawable circuit-breaker, the Ekip AUP contacts give the signal of moving part racked-in/out from the fixed part. The assembly assures that the position signalling is given also with the moving part withdrawn.
IMPORTANT: in case of multiple communication modules, only one can be connected to the Ekip AUP contacts.
Further information on assembling Ekip AUP modules and contacts is available on the web site http://www. abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0811.
8 - Ekip RTC
The communication modules are always supplied with an Ekip RTC auxiliary contact, which gives to the trip unit the signal indicating that the circuit-breaker is ready to receive a close command.
Further information on the assembly of the Ekip RTC contact is available on the web site http://www.abb. com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0614.
234 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Other electronic accessories | 8 - Ekip RTC
9 - Testing and Programming
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip TT
Ekip TT is a supply accessory and is useful for powering Ekip Touch in the absence of auxiliary power supply; the unit allows:
· Ekip Touch to be supplied and the tripped protection to be displayed, in the event of a TRIP and absence of auxiliary voltage
· the protections and certain parameters to be set before installation in the system
IMPORTANT:
· Ekip TT can also be connected to Ekip Touch when in service. · Ekip TT only supplies the Trip unit: the presence of an auxiliary supply is required in
order to set and display the information about the electronic accessories Ekip TT is connected to the service connector of Ekip Touch by means of the supplied cable.
To switch on the module, set the side switch to the ON position and check the status of the led: · if green, proceed with the required reading and configuring operations · if red, replace the batteries of the device (three 1.5 V AA batteries) Further details are available in ABB Library, especially in document 1SDH001000R0519
Ekip Programming and Ekip T&P
Ekip Programming is a supply and communication accessory that is useful for:
· Ekip Touch to be supplied and the tripped protection to be displayed, in the event of a TRIP and absence of auxiliary voltage
· the protections and certain parameters to be set before installation in the system · with Ekip Connect software, accessing the programming, measuring pages and other exclusive functions
(Datalogger, Dataviewer, Power Controller, Load Shedding, IPS, IEC 61850)
IMPORTANT:
· Ekip Programming can also be connected to Ekip Touch when in service · Ekip Programming only supplies the Trip unit: the presence of an auxiliary supply is
required in order to set and display the information about the electronic accessories Ekip Programming connects to the USB port of the PC, from which it receives the power required to switch on and also supply Ekip Touch; connection to the service connector of Ekip Touch must be made with the supplied cable.
Ekip Programming has two leds, one green to indicate when the module is on, the other yellow to indicate when communication is activated.
Ekip T&P is a supply and communication accessory with the same characteristics as Ekip Programming, plus a further function: · with Ekip Connect software, it enables access to the test pages
235 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Other electronic accessories | 9 - Testing and Programming
Electrical accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - Electrical control accessories
YO-YC-YO2-YC2 (1): Opening The opening coils, YO and YO2, and the closing coil, YC and YC2 (1), allow the circuit-breaker to be controlled and closing coil remotely.
The opening of the circuit-breaker is always possible with the circuit-breaker closed, while closing is possible with the circuit-breaker open and the closing springs charged.
The opening and closing coils can operate in two different modes: · instantaneous service (the minimum duration of the command impulse must be 100 ms). · service with permanent power supply.
YO-YC-YO2 for E1.2
D1 C1 C11
C3 C13
D2 C2 C12
YU YO 2
YC
YO
D1 C1 C11 C21
C3 C13
D2 C2 C12 C22
YU YO 2
YC
YO YC 2
YO-YC-YO2-YC2 for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
NOTE: the second opening coil YO2 is alternative to the undervoltage coil YU.
IMPORTANT:
· If the closing coil is permanently energized and the opening coil trips, after opening, the closing coil must be momentarily de-energized so that it can be reused for the next closing operation.
· If instead the opening coil trips, it is necessary, after having de-energized it, to wait at least 100 ms before operating the closing coil.
Available voltages and characteristics
The tables listing the available voltages and the electrical characteristics are provided below:
Available voltages (Un) 24 V AC/DC
General characteristics Operating limits
YO-YO2
YC-YC2 (1)
70...110 %Un 85...110 %Un
30 V AC/DC
Inrush power (Ps)
300 VA/W
48 V AC/DC
Continuous power (Pc)
3.5 VA/W
60 V AC/DC
Maximum opening time
35 ms
-
110...120 V AC/DC
Maximum closing time
-
50 ms
220...240 V AC/DC
240...250 V AC/DC
277 V AC/DC
380...400 V AC
415...440 V AC
480...500 V AC
500...550 V AC
(1) YC2 not available for E1.2
Continued on the next page
236 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Electrical accessories | 1 - Electrical control accessories
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
YO-YC-YO2-YC2 (1): Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular,
for E1.2 in the kit sheets: · 1SDH000999R0502 for YO and YO2 coils · 1SDH000999R0503 for coils YC and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheets: · 1SDH001000R0502 for YO and YO2 coils · 1SDH001000R0503 for YC and YC2 coils (1) YC2 not available for E1.2
YU: Undervoltage coil The undervoltage coil YU controls the value of the voltage in the circuit to which it is connected. The coil opens the circuit-breaker when its energizing voltage drops below a value between 35...70%Un The circuit-breaker can be reclosed when the coil energizing voltage is between 85...110% Un.
The undervoltage coil YU can in addition be used for the following purposes: · Trip unit the circuit-breaker remotely using pushbuttons of the normally closed type. · Activate the lock when the circuit-breaker is closed (the closing of the circuit-breaker is allowed only with
the undervoltage coil energized). IMPORTANT:
· The undervoltage coil YU is incompatible with the presence of the Fail Safe device (UL circuit-breakers).
· The undervoltage coil YU is a emergency trip unit. For service operations use the opening coil.
NOTE: the power supply of the coil must be drawn on the supply side of the circuit-breaker or from an independent source.
If the undervoltage coil trips, it is necessary, after having reset it, to wait at least 100 ms before operating the closing coil.
YU for E1.2
D1
D2 YU YO 2
YU for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
D1
D2 YU YO 2
Continued on the next page
237 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Electrical accessories | 1 - Electrical control accessories
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
The tables listing the available voltages and the electrical characteristics are provided below:
Available voltages (Un)
General characteristics
YU
24 V AC/DC
Inrush power (Ps)
300 VA/W
30 V AC/DC
Continuous power (Pc)
3.5 VA/W
48 V AC/DC
Opening time
50 ms
60 V AC/DC
110...120 V AC/DC
220...240 V AC/DC
240...250 V AC/DC
277 V AC/DC
380...400 V AC
415...440 V AC
480...500 V AC
YU: Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0504 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0504.
YR: Remote resetting coil The remote resetting coil deactivates the lock at the closing of the circuit-breaker, generated by the opening of the circuit-breaker caused by tripping of the Ekip protection trip unit.
R1 R2
YR
YR for E1.2
R1 R2
YR
YR for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
The tables listing the available voltages and the electrical characteristics are provided below:
Available voltages (Un)
General characteristics
24 V AC (1)
24 V DC (1)
Operating limits
90...110 %Un
110 V AC (1)
110 V DC (1) (2)
220 V AC (1)
220 V DC (1) (2)
(1) The coil must be activated by a pulse lasting at least 20ms. (2) The coil must be activated by a pulse lasting max 50ms.
YR: Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0606 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0606.
238 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Electrical accessories | 1 - Electrical control accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
M: Motor The motor automatically recharges the closing springs of the circuit-breaker when these are discharged. The motor is equipped with a limit contact S33 M/1 that interrupts the power supply of the motor after charging of the springs is completed. The motor is equipped with a limit contact S33 M/2 that signals the state of the charged springs.For information on the S33 M/2 limit contact refer to the dedicated paragraph "S33 M/2: springs charged signalling contact" in this chapter.
U1 U2 M
M for E1.2
U1 U2 M
M for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
NOTE: The closing springs can in any case be charged manually through the appropriate front control lever.
The tables listing the available voltages and the electrical characteristics are provided below:
Available voltages (Un)
General characteristics
24...30 V AC/DC
Operating limits
85...110 %Un
48...60 V AC/DC
Inrush power (Ps)
500 VA/W
100...130 V AC/DC
Power during charge (Pc):
100 VA/W
220...250 V AC/DC
Charging time
Min 5 s, max 10 s
Available voltages (Un) (1)
380...415 V AC
Available voltages (Un) (2)
277 V AC/DC
380...400 V AC
440...480 V AC
(1) for E1.2 (2) for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
M: Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0609 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0609.
239 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Electrical accessories | 1 - Electrical control accessories
2 - Electrical signalling accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
AUX 4Q: auxiliary open-closed contacts
The AUX 4Q contacts signal the open/closed state of the circuit-breaker.
These are "switching" contacts and are available in three types: · four standard contacts · four digital signals (low power) · two standard contacts (Q1-Q2) + two digital signals (Q3-Q4)
NOTE: The standard AUX 4Q contacts are always included in the circuit-breakers
AUX 4Q for E1.2
11 21 31 41 12 22 32 42 14 24 34 44 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
11 21 31 41 12 22 32 42 13 23 33 43 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
AUX 4Q for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
The following table provides information on the electrical characteristics:
Characteristics DC
Breaking capacity
AC
Minimum load
24V 125V 250V 250V
400V
Standard 0.5A @ 0ms / 0.3A @ 10ms 0.3A @ 0ms / 0.15A @ 10ms 3A cos 0.3 5A cos 0.7 5A cos 1 3A cos 1 2A cos 0.7 1A cos 0.3 100mA @ 24V
Digital signals 0.1 A 1mA @ 5V
AUX 4Q: Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0601 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0601.
240 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Electrical accessories | 2 - Electrical signalling accessories
AUX 6Q (1): Additional open/ closed auxiliary contacts
The additional AUX 6Q contacts signal the open/closed state of the circuit-breaker.
These are "switching" contacts and are available in three types: · six standard contacts · six digital signals (low power) · three standard contacts (Q1-Q2-Q3) + three digital signals (Q4-Q5-Q6)
ABB | SACE Emax 2
51
61 71 81 91 01 HC H1 H2 H3 H4
52
62 72 82 92 02 HC K3 K4 K5 K6
54
64 74 84 94 04 HC K7 K8 K9 K10
Q5..Q10 EKI P S ignalling 4K
(1) Only for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
NOTE: it is possible to order the AUX 6 Q contacts only if the circuit-breaker is not equipped with a protection trip unit with the Ekip Signalling 4K module.
The following table provides information on the electrical characteristics:
Characteristics DC
Breaking capacity
AC
Minimum load
24V 125V 250V 250V
400V
Standard 0.5A @ 0ms / 0.3A @ 10ms 0.3A @ 0ms / 0.15A @ 10ms 3A cos 0.3 5A cos 0.7 5A cos 1 3A cos 1 2A cos 0.7 1A cos 0.3 100mA @ 24V
Digital signals 0.1 A 1mA @ 5V
AUX 6Q: Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular with the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0601.
241 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Electrical accessories | 2 - Electrical signalling accessories
AUX 15Q: External additional open/closed auxiliary contacts
The additional AUX 6Q contacts signal the open/closed state of the circuit-breaker.
These are "switching" contacts and are available in two types: · 15 standard contacts · 15 digital signals (low power)
ABB | SACE Emax 2
The following table provides information on the electrical characteristics:
Characteristics DC
24V 125V 250V
Breaking capacity AC
250V 400V
Minimum load
Standard 0.5A @ 0ms / 0.3A @ 10ms 0.3A @ 0ms / 0.15A @ 10ms 3A cos 0.3 5A cos 0.7 5A cos 1 3A cos 1 2A cos 0.7 1A cos 0.3 100mA @ 24V
Digital signals 0.1 A 1mA @ 5V
AUX 15Q Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0607 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0607.
242 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Electrical accessories | 2 - Electrical signalling accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
AUP: auxiliary position contacts The AUP contacts are intended for circuit-breakers in withdrawable version.
They electrically signal the position of a moving part (inserted/test/withdrawn) in relation to the fixed part in which they are inserted.
These are "switching" contacts and are available in the following configurations:
Up to a maximum of six contacts for E1.2: · six standard contacts · six digital signals Up to a maximum of ten contacts for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2: · five standard contacts · five digital signals · five additional standard contacts · five additional digital signals
AUP for E1.2
AUP for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
The following table provides information on the electrical characteristics:
Characteristics DC
Breaking capacity
AC
Minimum load
24V 125V 250V 250V
400V
Standard 0.5A @ 0ms / 0.3A @ 10ms 0.3A @ 0ms / 0.15A @ 10ms 3A cos 0.3 5A cos 0.7 5A cos 1 3A cos 1 2A cos 0.7 1A cos 0.3 100mA @ 24V
Digital signals 0.1 A 1mA @ 5V
AUP: Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0603 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0603.
243 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Electrical accessories | 2 - Electrical signalling accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
RTC: ready to close signalling contact
The RTC contact indicates that the circuit-breaker is ready to receive a closing command.
The conditions necessary to allow the closing of the circuit-breaker are: · circuit-breaker open · springs charged · absence of an opening command or of a lock in opening
NOTE: if the circuit-breaker is opened due to the tripping of the Ekip protection trip unit, in order to allow closing, the Reset signal of the circuit-breaker must have been reset (press
the TU Reset pushbutton on the front panel).
The RTC is a "switching" contact type and is available in the standard version or in the versions for digital signals.
RTC for E1.2
45 46 48 RT C
45 46 48 RT C
RTC for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
The following table provides information on the electrical characteristics:
Characteristics
DC Breaking capacity
AC Minimum load
Standard
24V
-
125V
0.3A @ 0ms 0.15A @ 10ms
250V
0.3A @ 0ms 0.15A @ 10ms
1A cos 0.3
125V - 250V 2A cos 0.7
3A cos 1
100mA @ 24V
Digital signals 0.1 A 1mA @ 5V
RTC: Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0604 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0604.
244 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Electrical accessories | 2 - Electrical signalling accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
S51: trip unit tripping signalling contact
The S51 contact signals the opening of the circuit-breaker due to tripping of the Ekip protection trip unit.
It is available in two different types: · standard contact · contact for digital signals
NOTE: The standard S51 contact is always included in automatic circuit-breakers, and is associated with the TU Reset mechanical signalling.
95 96 98 S51
S51 for E1.2
95 96 98 S5 1
S51 for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
The following table provides information on the electrical characteristics:
Characteristics
DC Breaking capacity
AC Minimum load
Standard
24V
-
125V
0.3A @ 0ms 0.15A @ 10ms
250V
0.3A @ 0ms 0.15A @ 10ms
1.5A cos 0.3
125V - 250V 3A cos 0.7
5A cos 1
100mA @ 24V
Digital signals 0.1 A 1mA @ 5V
S51: Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0605 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0605.
245 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Electrical accessories | 2 - Electrical signalling accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
S51/2: releases tripped Contact S51/2 signals circuit-breaker opening after the protection release Ekip has tripped. signaling contact Only available with circuit-breakers Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 It is available in two different types: · standard contact · contact for digital signals
NOTE: Contact S51/2 can be used as an alternative to YR and at the same time as S51.
R1 R2
YR
The following table provides information on the electrical characteristics:
Characteristics
DC Breaking capacity
AC Minimum load
Standard
24V
-
125V
0.3A @ 0ms 0.15A @ 10ms
250V
0.3A @ 0ms 0.15A @ 10ms
1.5A cos 0.3
125V - 250V 3A cos 0.7
5A cos 1
100mA @ 24V
Digital signals 0.1 A 1mA @ 5V
S51: Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0614.
246 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Electrical accessories | 2 - Electrical signalling accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
S33 M/2: springs charged The S33 M/2 contact signals the state of the closing springs of the circuit-breaker control (charged or signalling contact discharged). It is available in two types: · standard contact · contact for digital signals
NOTE: the S33_M/2 contact is always included in the gearmotor for automatic charging of the springs in the standard version. The version for digital signals must be requested
with the order for the motor.
35 36 38 S33
S33 M/2 for E1.2
35 36 38 S33
S33 M/2 for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
The following table provides information on the electrical characteristics:
Characteristics DC
Breaking capacity
AC
Minimum load
24V 125V 250V 250V
400V
Standard 0.5A @ 0ms / 0.3A @ 10ms 0.3A @ 0ms / 0.15A @ 10ms 3A cos 0.3 5A cos 0.7 5A cos 1 3A cos 1 2A cos 0.7 1A cos 0.3 100mA @ 24V
Digital signals 0.1 A 1mA @ 5V
S33/M2: Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0609 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0609.
247 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Electrical accessories | 2 - Electrical signalling accessories
Mechanical accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - Mechanical Protection accessories
PBC: opening and closing pushbutton protection
The pushbutton protection inhibits the use of the opening and closing pushbuttons.
It is available in two types: · Protection that simultaneously inhibits the use of both pushbuttons. The use of the pushbuttons is only
allowed with the aid of an appropriate key. · Padlockable protection that inhibits the use of one or both pushbuttons with the aid of a padlock.
PBC for E1.2
PBC for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0715 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0715.
IP54 protection IP54 protection completely protects the front of the circuit-breaker, to achieve protection class IP54.
It is always equipped with two locks for closing, available in two types: · lock with different key code numbers (for an individual circuit-breaker) · lock with the same key code number (for more than one circuit-breaker)
IP54 for E1.2
IP54 for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0714 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0714.
248 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical accessories | 1 - Mechanical Protection accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
HTC / LTC (1): Terminal-cover
Terminal-covers are applied in order to reduce the risk of direct contact with live parts. They are available in two types:
· HTC - High terminal-covers · LTC - Low terminal-covers
(1) Only for E1.2 Information on assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular with the kit sheets: · 1SDH000999R0612 for the high terminal-covers · 1SDH000999R0613 for the low terminal-covers
PB (1): Phase separators The phase separators are applied in order to increase the insulation clearance between two adjacent phases.
(1) Only for E1.2
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular with the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0608.
249 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical accessories | 1 - Mechanical Protection accessories
2 - Mechanical safety accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
KLC: open position key lock The KLC locks the circuit-breaker in the open position.
It can also be used during maintenance activities on the circuit-breaker after removal of the cover of the accessory area.
The KLC lock is available with two types of locking: · lock with different key code numbers (for a single circuit-breaker). · lock with the same key code number (for more than one circuit-breaker). The maximum number of key
code numbers available is five. If set up appropriately, the KLC-A lock can work with four other types of locks: · Ronis · Profalux · Kirk · Castell
NOTE: the supply of Ronis - Profalux - Kirk - Castell locks is at customer's expense.
KLC for E1.2
KLC for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheets
· 1SDH000999R0702 for key locks with lock supplied by ABB · 1SDH000999R0703 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Ronis - Profalux - Kirk locks · 1SDH000999R0718 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Castell locks
and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheets:
· 1SDH001000R0702 for key locks with lock supplied by ABB · 1SDH001000R0703 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Ronis - Profalux - Kirk locks · 1SDH001000R0718 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Castell locks
PLC: padlock The PLC locks the circuit-breaker in the open position.
It is available in two types: · lock usable with a maximum number of three padlocks with a diameter of 4 mm - 0.16" · lock usable with a maximum number of two padlocks with a diameter of 8 mm - 0.32" · lock for a padlock with a diameter of 7 mm - 0.28" or for a latch chain
NOTE: The padlocks are at customer's expenses.
PLC for E1.2
PLC for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0706 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0706.
250 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical accessories | 2 - Mechanical safety accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Anti-insertion lock The anti-insertion lock allows the moving part of the circuit-breaker to be inserted only into the corresponding fixed part. It is intended for all withdrawable circuit breakers.
E1.21L0 12 08 E1.028B1-C0-N12 16 06 06 02
E1.21L0 12 08 E1.028B1-C0-N12 16 06 06 02
02
08E2.2 10
LEFT
1N2-B1-6S
20
25
08
10
E122.216H 20
MATCH ALSO THE RIGHT SIDE
25
Lock for E1.2
Lock for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0701 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0701.
MOC: Operation counter The mechanical operation counter displays the number of mechanical operations performed by the circuitbreaker.
00001
00001
MOC for E1.2
MOC for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0710 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0710.
PLP: padlock in connected/ test/disconnected positions
The PLP locks the moving part of a withdrawable circuit-breaker in the fixed part, in one of the following positions:
· connected · test · disconnected
Only one type is available that allows you to mount up to three padlocks with a diameter of 8 mm.
NOTE: the PLP lock can also be supplied in the presence of a KLP lock
PLP for E1.2
PLP for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0707 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0707.
251 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical accessories | 2 - Mechanical safety accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
KLP: key lock for connected/ test/disconnected positions
The KLP lock for connected/test/disconnected position locks the moving part of a withdrawable circuitbreaker in the fixed part, in one of the following positions:
· connected · test · disconnected
NOTE: it is possible to lock the moving part in the disconnected position only by using the additional accessory KLP lock.
The KLP lock for connected/test/disconnected positions is available with two types of lock:
· lock with different key code numbers (for a single circuit-breaker). · lock with the same key code number (for more than one circuit-breaker). The maximum number of key
code numbers available is five.
Through an appropriate setup, the KLP lock for connected/test/disconnected positions can work with three other types of lock:
· Ronis · Profalux · Kirk · Castell
The maximum number of locks that can be installed per circuit-breaker is the two, for all types of lock.
NOTE: the supply of Ronis - Profalux - Kirk locks is at customer's expense.
NOTE: the KLP lock can also be supplied in the presence of a PLP lock
KLP for E1.2
KLP for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheets
· 1SDH000999R0704 and 1SDH000999R0726 for key locks with lock supplied by ABB · 1SDH000999R0705 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Ronis - Profalux - Kirk locks · 1SDH000999R0719 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Castell locks
and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheets:
· 1SDH001000R0704 for key locks with lock supplied by ABB · 1SDH001000R0705 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Ronis - Profalux - Kirk locks · 1SDH001000R0719 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Castell locks
KLP lock additional accessory This additional accessory limits the blocking function to the disconnected position only.
for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0727 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0727.
252 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical accessories | 2 - Mechanical safety accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
SL: shutter lock The SL shutter locks the shutters of the fixed part. It is possible to lock the upper and lower shutters independently. This is an accessory available on all the fixed parts and can work with the aid of padlocks with diameters of 4 mm - 0.16", 6 mm - 0.24", 8 mm - 0.32", with a maximum of four padlocks per fixed part (two for the upper shutters and two for the lower shutters).
NOTE: The padlocks are at customer's expenses.
SL for E1.2
SL for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2
DLC: Door opening lock with the circuit-breaker in closed
position
The DLC prevents the following operations from being carried out:
· opening the switchgear door with the circuit-breaker closed if the circuit-breaker is in fixed version · opening the switchgear door with the circuit-breaker closed and in connected position if the circuit-breaker
is in fixed version · closing of the circuit-breaker when the switchgear door is open
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0712 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0712.
253 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical accessories | 2 - Mechanical safety accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
DLP (1): door opening lock The DLP lock prevents the switchgear door from being opened when the moving part of the circuit-breaker with the circuit-breaker in is in the connected or test position.
connected/test position It can be installed alternatively on the right side or the left side of the fixed part. NOTE: The DLP lock is used as an alternative to the mechanical interlock.
DLP for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2 (1) Not available for E1.2
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular with the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0709.
DLR (1): lock on racking-in/ The DLR lock prevents the moving part from being racked in/out from the fixed part when the switchgear racking-out of the moving part door is open.
with the door open It is available on request on all fixed parts.
DLR for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2 (1) Not available for E1.2
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular with the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0725.
Fail safe The fail safe is a device that prevents the removal of the mobile part of a withdrawable circuit-breaker from the fixed part if the springs are charged. It is always supplied with UL circuit-breakers. IMPORTANT: · The fail safe device makes undervoltage coil YU unavailable. · It is, however, possible not to install the fail safe device, in which case the undervoltage coil YU must be used. Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheets · 1SDH000999R0708 for the Fail Safe, movable part · 1SDH000999R0711 for the Fail Safe, fixed part and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001400R0821.
254 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Mechanical accessories | 2 - Mechanical safety accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
3 - Mechanical Interlocks
Mechanical interlocks determine the opening/closing logic between two or three circuit-breakers. Four types of interlocks are available, usable in both fixed and withdrawable versions.
Mechanical interlock of type A Two Circuit-breakers 12 OO IO OI
The Type A interlock is applicable to two circuit-breakers (normal power supply + emergency power supply).
It allows you never to have two circuit-breakers in the closed position at the same time.
Information on assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular with the kit sheets: · 1SDH000999R0720 for interlock between E1.2circuit-breakers · 1SDH001000R0720 for interlock between E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers · 1SDH000999R0721 for interlock between one E1.2 circuit-breaker and one E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breaker
Mechanical interlock of type B - The Type B interlock is applicable to three circuit-breakers (two normal power supplies + emergency power Three Circuit-breakers supply).
123 OOO I OO OO I IOI
It only allows the closing of the two circuit-breakers of the normal power supply if the circuit-breaker of the emergency power supply is open. The circuit-breaker of the emergency power supply can be closed only if the others two are open.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular with the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0721.
OIO
Mechanical interlock of type C Three Circuit-breakers 123 OOO I OO
The Type C interlock is applicable to three circuit-breakers (two normal power supplies + a bus tie).
It allows the simultaneous closing of one or two circuit-breakers, resulting in two possible types of power supply of the half busbars: · power supply from a single transformer (bus tie closed) · power supply from both transformers (bus tie open)
OIO OO I OI I
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular with the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0722.
I IO
IOI
Mechanical interlock of type D - The Type C interlock is applicable to three circuit-breakers (three power supplies on the same bar that must Three Circuit-breakers not operate in parallel)
1 2 3 It allows only one of the three circuit-breakers to be closed.
O O O Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in I O O particular with the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0723.
OIO
OO I
Operating coil trip time setting Before the trip command of a YC release on the circuit-breaker (B) which activates an interlock, make sure on interlocked circuit-breakers that at least 60ms have passed since the energizing of release YU or from the de-energizing of release YO -
YO2 on the circuit-breaker to be interlocked (A).
Figure 138 255 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
>
> Mechanical accessories | 3 - Mechanical Interlocks
Alarms or failures
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - Identification of alarms or failures
Introduction Correct maintenance of the unit and connected devices ensures they operate correctly over time. The maintenance operations must be performed by expert personnel, as required by the safety regulations and maintenance schedule described in this document. If faults are discovered, find out what is causing them and eliminate them before putting the unit back into service.
WARNING! Detecting faults must only be managed by (electrically) skilled persons (IEV 195-04-01: person with relevant education and experience to enable him or
her to perceive risks and to avoid hazards which electricity can create), as it may be necessary to perform insulation and dielectric tests on part or all the installation
256 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Alarms or failures | 1 - Identification of alarms or failures
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Faults, causes and remedies The following is a list of possible fault situations, their possible causes and suggestions for resolving them.
Faults
The circuit-breaker doesn't close when the closing pushbutton is pressed
The circuit-breaker doesn't close when the closing coil is powered
The circuit-breaker doesn't open when the opening pushbutton is pressed
Possible causes
Suggestions
The trip signal of the protection trip unit has not been reset
Press the TU mechanical reset pushbutton or operate the electrical reset remotely.
The open-position key lock or padlock Unlock the lock in open position using
is activated
the relevant key
The circuit-breaker is in an intermediate position between connected and isolated for test or between isolated for test and disconnected
Complete the rack-in operation
The undervoltage coil is not energized
Check the power supply circuit and the power supply voltage
The opening coil is permanently energized
Correct operating condition.
The trip unit pushbutton is pressed (withdrawable version)
Rotate the crank to complete
The trip signal of the protection trip unit has not been reset
Press the TU Reset button
The power supply voltage of the auxiliary circuits is too low
Measure the voltage: it should not be lower than 70% of the rated voltage of the coil
The power supply voltage is different from that indicated on the rating plate
Check the voltage on the rating plate
The cables of the coil are not inserted correctly in the terminals
Make sure there is continuity between cable and terminal and if necessary reconnect the cables of the coil to the terminals
The connections in the power supply Check the connections using the
circuit are wrong
relevant wiring diagram
The closing coil is damaged
Replace the coil
The operating mechanism is blocked
Perform the closing operation manually; if the fault persists contact ABB
The open position key lock is activated
Unlock the lock in open position using the relevant key
The circuit-breaker is in an intermediate position between connected and test or the trip unit pushbutton is pressed (withdrawable version)
Complete the rack-in operation
The undervoltage coil is not energized
Make sure that undervoltage coil is energized properly
The opening coil is permanently energized
Correct operating condition. If necessary, disconnect the power from the opening coil
The racking out crank handle is inserted (withdrawable version)
Remove the crank
The operating mechanism is blocked Contact ABB
Continued on the next page
257 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Alarms or failures | 1 - Identification of alarms or failures
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Faults
Possible causes
Suggestions
The operating mechanism is blocked Contact ABB
The power supply voltage of the auxiliary circuits is too low
Measure the voltage: it should not be lower than 85 % of the rated voltage of the coil
The circuit-breaker doesn't open when the opening coil is powered
The power supply voltage is different from that indicated on the rating plate
The cables of the coil are not inserted correctly in the terminals
Use the correct voltage
Make sure there is continuity between cable and terminal and if necessary reconnect the cables of the coil to the terminals
The connections of the power supply Check the connections using the
circuit are wrong
relevant wiring diagram
The opening coil is damaged
Replace the coil
The circuit-breaker doesn't open despite the command of the undervoltage coil
The operating mechanism is blocked
Perform the opening operation manually; if the fault persists contact ABB
It is not possible to charge the closing springs by means of the manual charging lever
The operating mechanism is blocked
Contact ABB
It is not possible to charge the closing springs by means of the gearmotor
The cables of the gearmotor are not inserted correctly in the terminals
The connections of the power supply circuit are wrong The circuit-breaker is in disconnected position
Make sure there is continuity between cable and terminal and if necessary reconnect the cables of the gearmotor to the terminals
Check the connections using the relevant wiring diagram
Switch the circuit-breaker to the test or connected position
The gearmotor protection internal fuse has tripped
Replace the fuse
The gearmotor is damaged
Replace the gearmotor
It is not possible to press the button in order to insert the racking out crank handle
The circuit-breaker is closed
Press the opening pushbutton in order to allow the insertion of the crank with the circuit-breaker open
It is not possible to insert the moving part in the fixed part
The racking-in/racking-out operation is not performed correctly
See chapters "Circuit breaker rackingin/racking-out operations" on pages 150 158
The moving part is incompatible with Check the compatibility between the
the fixed part
moving part and the fixed part
It is not possible to lock the circuit-breaker in the open position
The opening pushbutton is not being pressed
The lock in open position is defective
Press the opening pushbutton and activate the lock
Contact ABB
It is not possible to perform the trip test
Trip coil is not connected properly CB trip signal has not been reset
Check Trip coil connection and messages on display
Press the reset pushbutton
The busbar current is greater than zero Correct operating condition.
Continued on the next page
258 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Alarms or failures | 1 - Identification of alarms or failures
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Faults
Possible causes
Suggestions
It is not possible to remove the circuit-breaker from the disconnected position
Fail Safe lock active
Discharge the closing springs of the command
Wrong threshold/time/curve selected Correct parameters
Trip times different than expected
Thermal memory enabled Zone selectivity enabled
Disable it if it is not necessary Disable it if it is not necessary
Incorrect neutral selection
Modify the neutral selection
Rapid trip with I3 = Off
linst trip
Correct operating condition with short circuit at high current
Incorrect selection of the sensor
High ground-fault current, but
no trip occurs
Function G inhibited owing to high
current
Set internal or external sensor
Correct operating condition (see use cases in the chapter that describes the protection)
Display off and/or not backlit
No auxiliary supply or currents lower than minimum turn-on values
Correct operating condition.
Temperature outside range
Correct operating condition.
Current below the minimum threshold that can be displayed
Correct operating condition.
Incorrect frequency setting
Set frequency
Measurements incorrect or absent (current, voltage, etc)
Harmonic distortion and/or crest factor off range
Incorrect connection between isolation transformer and Measurement module
Correct operating condition.
Check connections between isolation transformer and Measurement module
Rated voltage parameter setting Error
Set the correct parameters
The expected trip does not occur
Trip excluded
Correct operating condition. Enable trip if necessary
Opening data not displayed
No auxiliary power supply and/or battery low
Correct operating condition.
The PIN is not required
The PIN has been disabled or has already been entered in the same programming session
Operating condition correct; consult chapter relating to the PIN
Impossible to change any of the parameters
Trip unit in alarm condition
Correct operating condition.
Trip unit set remotely
Set it in local mode
The language cannot be changed
The circuit-breaker is not open
Open the circuit-breaker
One of the possible power supplies Power the trip unit with Vaux, Ekip
is not present
T&P or Ekip TT
PIN error
PIN wrong or lost
Contact ABB or consult document 1SDH001501R0001
Communication problems with Ekip Com, Ekip Link or Ekip Signalling
Circuit-breaker in withdrawn position, Vaux absent or modules not inserted properly
Insert modules, set circuit-breaker to Connected position, connect Vaux
State of CB Position field not aligned with circuit-breaker position
Absence of Ekip Com or Ekip Link modules, or contact S75I
Check for presence of Ekip Com or Ekip Link modules and connect contact S75/I
Continued on the next page
259 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Alarms or failures | 1 - Identification of alarms or failures
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Faults
Possible causes
Suggestions
The connections or supplies of the
opening/closing actuators are not Check connections and supplies
correct
Circuit-breaker fails to react to opening/closing command from Ekip Touch
Absence of auxiliary power supply to Ekip Touch
Check supplies and status of Power LEDs
Circuit-breaker is in a condition
Check circuit-breaker documentation
which fails to enable the selected and cases that fail to enable
command
command
TRIP fail signaling: Trip Fail command (BF)
One or more of the following conditions: · Trip coil not working · status contacts not working · faulty internal wiring
1. If closed, open CB in the manual mode and check changed status. 2. Press iTest, check that the signal has disappeared from the display and the general status of the alarms. 3. Check the conditions of the wiring and internal contacts 4. Working in safety conditions, close the CB and perform a trip test via the trip unit
Contact ABB if problems persist
260 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Alarms or failures | 1 - Identification of alarms or failures
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Programming errors If during the programming of the parameters an attempt is made to violate certain limitations, the trip unit blocks the saving procedure and signals the error:
Type of error 2I Th > 15kA 30006 30007 30008 30011 30012 30013 Active Power Fail DLog not stopped D Th I Th D Zone Sel = On while S / S2 / I / G / Gext / MDGF = On
G Th > 1200A
G Startup Th > 1200A G FT time = 50 ms is not valid G Time> 400 ms
Gext Time> 400 ms Gext FT time = 50ms isn't valid High priority alarm I and MCR enabled together L Th S Th L Th S2 Th L curve different to I 2t=k L Th >980A Neutral configuration error OV Threshold > 828 V OV2 Threshold > 828 V RC toroid error RQ Q24 Q27 S Th I Th S2 Th I Th S Time > 400 ms
S2 Time> 400 ms
S(V) or S2(V) parameters
SYNCHRO parameters error V DIR Th > 690*1.4 VS Th > 690*1.4
Error description Threshold I31 (protection 2I) > 15kA Parameter change not completed on display within five minutes Attempt at remote control with Trip unit configuration in the local mode Attempt at local control with Trip unit configuration in the remote mode Error in Ekip Link list of actors More than one Time Sync source (IEEE1588 or SNTP) on one single module or between different modules Network Analyzer parameter control unsuccessful Threshold P23 (protection UP) Threshold P26 (protection OP) Modification of datalogger parameters not allowed with datalogger function not stopped Threshold I7 (protection D) Threshold I3 (protection I) Zone selectivity enabling of protection D not allowed with zone selectivity already active for one among protections S, S2, I, G, Gext or MDGF Threshold I4 (protection G) or Threshold I41 (protection Gext or MDGF) > 1200A with CB in standard configuration UL G or Gext or MDGF > 1200A protection threshold start up with CB in standard configuration UL Trip time I4 (protection G) = 50 ms Trip time t4 (protetion G) > 400ms with CB in standard configuration UL Trip time t41 (protetion Gext or MDGF) > 400ms with CB in standard configuration UL Trip time I41 (protection G) = 50 ms Modification of parameters not allowed during protection times Protections I and MCR are mutually exclusive Threshold I1 (protection L) Threshold I2 (protection S) Threshold I1 (protection L) Threshold I5 (protection S2) Protection curve L different from t=k/I 2 with CB in standard configuration UL Threshold I1 (protetion I)> 980A with CB in standard configuration UL Configuration of neutral protection must conform to formula: I1 (A) Iu (A) x Ne config / 100 Threshold U9 (Protection OV) > 828V (690 x1.2) Threshold U16 (Protection OV2) > 828V (690 x1.2) Activation of toroid Rc is not allowed without the presence of a model Rc rating plug Threshold Q24 Threshold Q25 (Protection RQ) Threshold I2 (Protection S) Threshold I3 (Protection I) Threshold I5 (Protection S2) Threshold I3 (Protection I) Trip time t2 (protetion S) > 400ms with CB in standard configuration UL Trip time t5 (protetion S2) > 400ms with CB in standard configuration UL Error in configuration of parameters of protection S (V) or S2 (V); consult user manual of Trip unit for the limits Inconsistency of Synchrocheck protection parameters: Delta phase 180 x Delta freq x [minimum correspondence time + 0.0023] Protection threshold VDIR > 828V (690 x1.2) One of the two thresholds of protection VS Warning > 828V (690 x1.2)
261 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Alarms or failures | 1 - Identification of alarms or failures
2 - Self-diagnosis
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Alarms and signals Alarm Tests
Ekip Touch provides a series of signals that indicate its operating state, alarms present, or configuration errors in progress.
The signals are provided: · By LEDs, as described on page 36. · By messages on the diagnosis bar. The messages on the diagnostics bar can be divided into three categories: self-diagnosis, protection or measurement alarms, and programming error.
Alarms displayed and A list of faults that may appear on the Ekip Touch display is given below along with suggestions on how to suggestions resolve them:
Signal Numerical alarm (e.g. 30002) Battery low
Local bus
CB undefined Trip fail command (BF)
Configuration
Invalid Date Ekip Com Hub
Ekip Link Bus Ekip Sign 3T connection Ekip Sign 3T threshold Internal error SNTP error Measuring Error Ethernet disconnected IEEE1588 synch MAC Address
Suggestions
Internal error; contact ABB if this typoe of error occurs
Change the battery (See 1SDH001000R0509 kit sheet)
Unit on with auxiliary supply, Local Bus parameter enabled but connection to modules not present, incorrect or communication lost (for more than five seconds); check: · connection and powering of modules in terminal box or external · that the moldules connected are compatible with Ekip Touch
Check the circuit-breaker status signal contacts
CB has failed to open and/or current still present after a TRIP command: comply with the procedure proposed in the next chapter 'Faults, causes and remedies'
Protection parameter configuration error: make sure that threshold I4 and time t4 are compatible with the minimum values required for self-supply
Check: · Rating plug of model compatible with Ekip Touch and CB size · If present, protection parameters do not conflict with size of current of unit details on page 20 51) · In the absence of Vaux threshold I4 and/or I41 > 100 A · In the absence of Vaux time t4 and/or t41 > 100 ms · RC protection active and Rating Plug not RC
Wrong date and time: set in Settings-System-Date and Settings-System-Time
Problem of Ekip Com Hub module with: certificates, connected devices, missing Com modules (RTU or with Ethernet connection), API TLS device, Hub events, parsar configuration
Fault in Ekip Link module: check for loss of connection with one or more actors (modules) connected to Link Bus
Alarm for connection of one or more analog inputs to Ekip Signalling 3T module
One or more thresholds of the Ekip Signalling 3T module has/have been exceeded
Internal error; contact ABB if this typoe of error occurs
Fault with Ekip Com modules: synchronization problem of SNTP synchronization reference module
Measurement module parameter reading error, contact ABB
No external cable on one or more Ekip Com modules with Ethernet connection
Synchronization problem of IEEE 1588 synchronization reference module
Ekip Com module detected with incorrect / not allowed MAC address, contact ABB.
Continued on the next page
262 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Alarms or failures | 2 - Self-diagnosis
Continued from the previous page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Signal
Suggestions
Ekip Installation
Installation error between HMI and Mainboard, contact ABB
Measuring installation
Install Measurement module (Settings-Circuit breaker-Installation-MeasuringInstall) menu
RatingPlugInstallation
Install Rating Plug (Settings-Circuit breaker-Rating Plug-Install menu) and check connection if there are further faults
Maintenance
Maintenance alarm: perform maintenance and then reset the alarm via Ekip Connect (see 1SDH001330R1002)
PC Power exceed
The average power limit setting of the Power Controller has been exceeded
Rating plug
Rating plug not present, value or size incompatible with Ekip Touch parameters
Zone Selectivity Diag Error in zone selectivity connections (Hardware Selectivity)
Toroid S.G.R.
Check connection and state of current sensor
Sensor L1/L2/L3/Ne
Fault in connection of sensors to Trip unit; check status of sensors, including external Neutral, or call ABB
Check current sensors, status of terminal and cables connecting to Ekip Touch
Configuration Session
TFTP server enabled and/or configuration session open on module Ekip Com IEC61850 or Ekip Hub
The software versions between Mainboard and display (Ekip Touch) are not
compatible with each other: To restore compatibility, please consult ABB.
Software Not Compatible
NOTE: modification of all parameters is inhibited via display; if present, protections L, I and Iinst are active and function with the parameters prior
to the alarm (parameters of previous unit are active if display has been
replaced)
CB status
CB state incorrect (esample: current present but CB in open state)
Switchboard Actor communication Error
Check configuration and connection of Ekip Link module
TC disconnected
Disconnection of Trip coil detected, check functionality Check Trip coil, status of the terminal and cables connecting to Ekip Touch
Contact Wear
Make sure that the contacts/poles are in good condition.
Protections In the event of protection or measurement alarms, the associated signals are reported:
Signal Trip Test Protection timing (for example: L timing) Protection prealarm (for example: Prealarm G) Protection (Trip off) [for example: S (Trip off) ] 2I Protection Active Load LC1 / Load LC2
Iw1 Warning / Iw2 Warning Harmonic dist. Power factor Phase cycle Frequency 5th harmonic above Th / I sopra Th / THD I above Th / THD V above Th
Type of alarm Trip test performed signal. Press iTEST to reset the message
Specific protection in time delay mode
Specific protection in prealarm
Specific protection, configured with trip disabled, in alarm state
2I Protection active
Current threshold 1 I1 / 2 I1 exceeded and in alarm state
Current threshold Iw1 / Iw2 exceeded and in alarm state
Harmonic Distortion protection in alarm state
Power factor measurement (cos ) less than set threshold
Phase sequence protection in alarm state
Frequency measured off range (<30 Hz or >80 Hz)
Single or total harmonic measurement above threshold
263 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Alarms or failures | 2 - Self-diagnosis
Predictive analysis program
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - Presentation
Objectives Routine maintenance has always been considered a good way to maintain a high level of efficiency in the installation, but it is also a cost item linked to the frequency with which it is performed.
Maintenance work can be promptly organized thanks to application of the new digital technologies and constant monitoring of the vital parameters of the circuit-breaker during normal daily operation.
The ability to estimate the exact time that maintenance must be performed optimizes all aspects concerning maintenance itself: plant efficiency, management of costs and investments, continuity of service.
This condition is known as predictive maintenance.
Proposal In ABB low voltage air circuit-breakers, the system that monitors and identifies the moment in which maintenance is required is made available thanks to the Predict function in the ABB Ability Electrical Distribution Control System (EDCS).
When it is connected to Cloud, the circuit-breaker continuously transmits a set of data which, once organized and analyzed by algorithms, supply a trend with the state of aging of the circuit-breaker.
Operating principle
The main factors that influence circuit-breaker aging are:
· The number of electrical and mechanical openings (switches). · The interrupted current (%In, short-circuit, overload, etc...). · Environmental factors such as temperature, humidity, dust, corrosion, ...
Constant evolution of these data and their combination affect circuit-breaker aging, which can be more or less rapid.
An indication of the condition of the circuit-breaker and, above all, of the date when maintenance should next be performed can be obtained by monitoring these data by means of Predictive Maintenance in ABB Ability EDCS.
If something happens to the circuit-breaker during its normal operation, this data item is updated as a consequence.
Advantages
Any prompt identification of potential problems allows action to be taken:
· So as to optimize the way that the required resources are managed (organization of personnel, shorter lead times for support - thus shorter downtimes,...) .
· On the quality processes and supply of replacement parts. · So as to enhance customer satisfaction by ensuring that the installations are increasingly efficient.
264 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Predictive analysis program | 1 - Presentation
2 - Service offers
Analysis programs Two preventive analysis programs are available:
Name User Circuit-breaker state of aging [on statistical basis] Circuit-breaker state of aging [analysis] Maintenance
ABB | SACE Emax 2
LEAP Easy Audit Customer
X
Predictive maintenance in ABB Ability EDCS ABB Service
X X
LEAP Easy Audit On the basis of the environmental and specific operating conditions of the circuit-breaker in different types of installation, LEAP AUDIT EASY provides a simple analysis using statistical data for the purpose of obtaining an estimation of the conditions of the circuit-breaker itself. LEAP EASY AUDIT can be performed by the actual client, free of charge, after registration in the dedicated WEB page (link).
Procedure
1. The client registers in the dedicated WEB page (link). (link). 2. Waiting for mail with credentials to access software online and directly enter certain data concerning
use of the circuit-breaker (serial number of circuit-breaker, application, average annual environmental conditions and number of operations (opening sequences) since installation). 3. Once this general information has been entered, the customer received a report via mail describing the condition of his circuit-breaker. The result is an analysis purely based on statistical data in the absence of access to the complete operating data of the circuit-breaker.
Predictive maintenance in ABB A section dedicated to predictive maintenance can be activated in ABB Ability EDCS and used to supervise Ability EDCS the conditions of the ABB air circuit-breakers connected in ABB Ability EDCS. If a maintenance contract has been drawn up with ABB service, evidence of maintenance efficacy will also be apparent in ABB Ability EDCS.
265 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Predictive analysis program | 2 - Service offers
Service
ABB | SACE Emax 2
1 - Power Care
Foreword The number of devices that make up an electrical installation varies so greatly that it can be difficult to manage them, even for a very expert installation manager.
To ensure the availability and reliability of electrification systems, ABB offers PowerCare, a wide range of service packages tailored to the type of company, with custom support solutions based on customer requirements.
Description
The PowerCare platform is based on a matrix of services that the customer selects, according to his own needs, when the service contract is activated. The proposed services range from the possibility of having dedicated access, through a portal PowerCare, to a complete range of support services for each type switchgear and controlgear.
All the services are supplied by qualified and certified ABB personnel.
Services The PowerCare matrix consists of 20 products subdivided into five service areas and four levels:
Service Area Each service area represents a service offered by ABB technical support:
Area
Offered service
Skill Development Services
Training on the maintenance to be carried out on ABB products installed at the customer site.
Emergency Maintenance Service
Rapid support for any emergency situation.
Diagnosis & Condition An indication of the state of health of the various products installed with any
Assessment
restoration actions necessary to reduce fault risks.
Self-Maintenance Services
Assistance for implementing an internal maintenance strategy for the customer's organization for carrying out specific tasks. The customer's maintenance staff can access the product documentation by contacting ABB experts, online or by accessing private folders directly.
Delivered maintenance Maintenance of the products installed in order to maintain their good state of
Services
health through preventive maintenance plans.
Levels The levels represent the extent of the service offered: the higher the level the greater the expertise of the service and of the ABB design engineers put at the disposal of the customer to support him.
266 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Service | 1 - Power Care
ABB | SACE Emax 2
267 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Service | 1 - Power Care
1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A
Adobe InDesign 15.0 (Windows) Adobe PDF Library 15.0